DS19 Repair Manual

Editor’s notes for DS19 manual:
This manual was originally published in a form which folded open Likewise with the order. The logic of the division into sections is,
to reveal two separate volumes, in landscape layout, one above the let’s say, an acquired taste! But with luck using a combination of
other. The lower (nearer the reader) was ‘Text’, the upper was the Bookmarks and the Contents List (which is itself Bookmarked)
‘Illustrations’. This is, so far as I know, impractical to do on a you should eventually find what you are looking for. There is also
computer screen, and even if it were possible, the text would be an index of the Illustrations. The contents list and the Index of
unreadably small. Illustrations are both in the form of text, so will search (‘Find’ in
the Edit menu). Half of the main text is also scanned and
Instead, I’ve set up a ‘link’ for every mention of a Drawing in the reformatted as text, so will respond to a search. The task took
text. The drawings are called Plates, abbreviated Pl., sometimes almost an hour per page, which is why I didn’t go on and finish it!
with an additional reference to a ‘fig’ number. These are the If one day I find myself stranded in a very boring place maybe I’ll
separately numbered ‘figures’ sometimes to be found on one continue... Or if one of you has an employee they wish to
‘plate’. punish... Apart from the benefit of searchability, converting the
pages of text into computer ASCII text reduces their size by a
Basically, if you cause your mouse, or other pointing system to factor of 20. The whole text part of the manual would amount to
pass over the text you should see it extend a finger when it comes less than 1 MB, easily passed around as an attachment, if it were
across one of these links. If you click while its finger is out thus all done in this way. (The Drawings would be extra!)
the text will be replaced on the screen by the Plate whose reference
you’ve picked up, or sometimes to a specified figure within the The drawings are scanned at 300 dots per inch, so should print fine
plate. You can then, using the ‘back’ and ‘forth’ arrows at the top on A4 or 8.5” x 11” US letter paper (as should the text). Some of
of the screen, toggle between the text you were reading and the the drawings are works of art. Pl. 30 is a particular favourite! If
illustration you’ve called up. you’d like to see it now pass your mouse pointer over the ‘Pl. 30’
text above, and it should change in appearance. Click it and you’ll
I hope this will be helpful. I’ve undoubtedly missed some. If you be taken to the drawing. Press the ‘back’ arrow to return to this
spot such errors it would be kind if you could e-mail me , and I’ll page.
try and arrage for any later editions to be updated.
One way and another, this was a lot of work. Please use it and
I’ve also made an index in the ‘Bookmark’ column. You can enjoy it!
reveal and use this by clicking on the ‘Show/Hide Navigation
Pane’ icon at the top of the screen, or on the double-arrow gizmo Best regards, T.
near the bottom left of the screen. You’ll then see an index, some
of it nested. If you click on one of these Bookmarks you will be Tony Jackson (tony@you-me-and-us.com)
taken directly to the section named in the Bookmark.
In the interests of clarity and economy of space I’ve occasionally

shortened the names Citroën gave to the sections, but generally
I’ve tried to remain faihful to the slightly idiosyncratic original.
METHOD OF USING THE REPAIR MANUAL
This manual includes all main service operations. Primarily it is intended for left-hand drive cars,
but the application to right-hand cars should present no difficulties as any differences are obvious.
CLASSIFICATION
We have shown at the beginning of this manual a classification of the main units of the car.
The three figured number in front of each unit corresponds to the operation number relating to this
particular unit.
METHOD OF NUMBERING
The number is composed of :-
a) The indication of the type of vehicle : DS.
b) A number of three figures indicating the unit or part of the unit (this number is shown in the
general classification).
c) A code number, indicating the type of work, dealt with in the operation. These figures are
separated from the number by a hyphen.
Use of the code:
The figure 0 indicates the adjustments.

The figures 1, 4, 7 indicate the replacement of units (removal and refitting)
The figures 2, 5, 8 indicate the stripping down and assembling
The figures 3, 6, 9 indicate the overhauling (reconditioning)
EXAMPLES :
Operation No. DS 334-0 : Adjustments on the change speed control.

Operation No. DS 372- 1 : Replacement of a driveshaft or a pivot.
Operation No. DS 100-2 : Stripping and assembling an engine-gearbox assembly.
Operation No. DS 442-3 : Overhauling a steering assembly.
Operation No. DS 451-4 : Replacement of a rear brake drum.
PARTICULAR POINTS
At the beginning of each operation the particular points are given (tightening torsions, adjustment
dimensions, special assembly precautions, etc.).
The number of the line of the particular points corresponds with the number of the paragraph in the
operation.
I L L U ST RA T I O N S
At the top le f t- ha nd c or ne r of e a c h illustr a tion is shown the numbe r of the ope r a tion c onc e r ne d
with this pa r tic ula r illustr a tion ( this inf or ma tion is not give n on the illustr a tion f or the tools) .
TOOLS
The spe c ia l tools use d f or r e pa ir ing the DS 19 a r e indic a te d a s f ollows :
1. By a number, suffixed by the letter T. These tools are sold by Etablissements FENWICK,
15, rue Fénelon, Paris (10e).
2. By a numbe r pr e f ixe d by the le tte r s MR w hic h a r e not supplie d by us. The ne c e ssa r y
inf or ma tion a nd dime nsions f or ma king the m a r e shown in this ma nua l.
T E CH N I CA L I N FO RMA T I O N
A n y e n q u ir ie s sh o u ld b e a d d r e sse d to : SE RV I CE D E PA RT ME N T , CI T RO E N CA RS L I MI T E D ,
SL O U G H , BU CK S, E N G L A N D .
W O RK O N TH E H Y D RA U LI C U N I TS
W he n c a r r ying out wor k on the hydr a ulic units, pr e c a utions must be ta ke n to e nsur e c onditions of
the str ic te st c le a nline ss ( se e Op. DS 00) .
GENERAL CLASSIFICATION
The number in front of each unit corresponds to the operation number relating to this particular unit.
ENGINE ............................................................................ 100

Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Cylinder head ................................................................. 112
Timing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Suspension ................................................................... 133
Feed system :
Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Carburettor and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Petrol pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Petrol tank .............................................................. 175
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Ignition system :
Contact breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ignition coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cooling system :
Water pump, pulleys, belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Radiator and hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fan ................................................................... 241
CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Gearbox lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
SOURCE AND RESERVE OF PRESSURE:
High pressure pump pressure regulator accumulator piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Break accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Distribution block reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
SUSPENSION:
Front suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Rear suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Manual height control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Steering rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Steering relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Hydraulic control, piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Mechanical control, cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
ELECTRICAL:
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
HEATING AND DEMISTING :
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
INDEX OF OPERATIONS SHOWN IN THE REPAIR MANUAL 5
OPERATION PARA. PAGE
COMPONENT No. DESCRIPTION No. No.
GENERAL . . . . . . DS 00 Work on the hydraulics – Precautions .................................... 1 27

Revolutions counters and pressure gauges ................................. 7 31
ENGINE . . . . . . . . DS 100-1 Replacement of an engine gearbox assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34

Adjustment of the rear supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 36
Adjustment of the front crossmember support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 37
DS 100-2 Stripping and assembling an engine gearbox assembly for replacement of the engine 1 40
Stripping and assembling an engine gearbox assembly for replacement of the gearbox 21 42
DS 100-3 Overhauling an engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 46

Grinding the valves .................................................. 23 49
Preparation of the oil pump – Adjusting the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 50
Replacement of a starter gear ring. Grinding the flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 26 51
Preparing the crankshaft line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 52
Fitting the cylinder barrels ............................................ 33 54
Fitting the crankshaft and oil seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 56
Adjusting the end float on the crankshaft ................................. 36 57
Fitting the timing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 57
Fitting the oil pump on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 58
Crankcase ...... DS 111-1 Work on the crankcase.

Replacement of the sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 61
Replacement of the sealing shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 61
Oil system ...... DS 111-4 Work on the oil system.

Checking the oil pressure (on the car) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 66
Replacement of an oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 67
Cylinder head . . . . DS 112-0 Adjusting the valve rocker clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 68

DS 112-1 Replacement of a cylinder head or a cylinder head gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 69
Tightening the cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 71
Replacement of a valve cover gasket (see Op. DS 112-O)
Cylinder head (cont’d) DS 112-3 Overhauling a cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 73

Replacement of a valve guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 74
Grinding the valve seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 74
Calibration of the valve spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 75
DS 112-4 Work on the cylinder head

Replacement of an inlet rocker shaft or a push-rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 78
Replacement of an exhaust rocker shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 80
Replacement of an inlet valve sealing ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 81
Replacement of a valve spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 83
Cleaning a cylinder head cover filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 84
Timing gear ..... DS 120-1 Work on the timing.

Replacement of the timing chain or pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 85
Replacement of a camshaft ............................................ 9 86
Replacement of the tappets ............................................ 36 88
Fitting the timing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 86
Engine suspension DS 133-0 Adjustment of the engine suspension (on the car) ........................... 1 90
DS 133-1 Work on the engine suspension.
Replacement of an upper front crossmember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 92
Replacement of a front support arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 93
Replacement and overhauling a rear flexible mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 94
Pre-adjustment of the rear flexible mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 96
Replacement of a rear arm (on engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 97
Replacement of a rear support (on body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 98
Replacement of a high pressure pump or water pump belt (see Op. DS 231-4).
Feed system :
Manifolds . . . . DS 141-1 Replacement of an inlet manifold ........................................ 1 99
Carburettor . . . DS 142-0 Adjustment of the slow running

With two rod control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 101
With one rod control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 102
DS 142 1 Replacement of a carburettor ........................................... 1 103

Carburettor (cont’d) DS 142-3 Work on the carburettor.

Overhauling a Weber Z4—30 DCLC or 24-30 DCZCI carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 104
Overhauling a Zenith 24-30 EEAC carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 106
Controls . . . . . . .. DS 142-4 Work on the carburettor controls.

Replacement of an accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 110
Replacement of a control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 110
Replacement of a relay control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 111
Replacement of an accelerated idling assembly (first type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 111
(second type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 112
Replacement of an accelerated idling assembly joint (first type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 113
(second type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 113
DS 142-6 Overhauling an accelerated idling control assembly (second type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 114

Air filter . . . . . . . . DS 171-1 Replacement of an air filter silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 115
DS 171-3 Overhauling an air filter silencer.

Overhauling a Miofilter air filter silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 116
Overhauling a Vokes air filter silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 116
Petrol pump ..... DS 173-l Replacement of a petrol pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 118
DS 173-3 Overhauling a Guiot petrol pump........................................ 1 119

Checking for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 120
Piping . . . . . . . . . . DS 174-1 Replacement of a feed pipe (tank to pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 121
DS 174-3 Repairing a feed pipe (or a flexible return pipe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 123
Petrol tank ...... DS 175-1 Work on the petrol tank.

Replacement of a petrol tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 124
Replacement of a filler pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 126
Replacement of an air pipe or an air vent pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 126
Replacement of a petrol gauge tank unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 128
Exhaust ...... DS 180-1 Work on the exhaust system.

Replacement of an exhaust manifold or an exhaust manifold shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 129
Replacement of an expansion chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 130
Replacement of an exhaust silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 130
Replacement of the exhaust pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 131
Ignition system . . DS 211-0 Ignition adjustments.

Adjustment of the ignition advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 132
Adjustment of the contact breaker (with two breakers) (on test bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 133
Adjustment of the synchronisation of the breakers (on fixture 2209-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 134
Adjustment of the contact breaker (with one breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 134
Bench testing a contact breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19 134
Cleaning and adjusting the sparking plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135
DS 211-1 Work on the contact breaker.

Replacement of a contact breaker (with two breakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 136
Replacement of a contact breaker (with one breaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 139
Replacement of a variable ignition control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 139
DS 211-3 Overhauling a contact breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 140

Adjustment of the ignition (see Op. DS 211-0).
DS 212-0 Checking an ignition coil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 142
Cooling system . . DS 231-0 Adjustment of the pulleys and belts.

Alignment of the pulleys (first and second type high pressure pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 144
Adjustment of the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 145
Water pump ... DS 231-1 Replacement of a low pressure and water pump. ............................. 1 146
DS 231-3 Overhauling a water pump (second type). ................................... 1 148

Checking for leakage .................................................. 40 155
Pulleys and belts . . DS 231-4 Work on the pulleys and belts

Replacement of the water pump belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 157
Replacement of the high pressure pump belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 157
Replacement of the pulley driving the water pump, dynamo and high pressure pump . 12 158
Replacement of the driving pulley shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 159
Radiator and fan . . DS 232-1 Work on the radiator and fan

Replacement of a fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 160
Replacement of a fan cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 160
Replacement of a radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 161
Replacement of a thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 162
Checking a thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 163
Precautions against frost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 163
Heating and demisting system (see Op. DS 642-1).
CLUTCH . . . . . . . . DS 312-1 Replacement of a clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 164
DS 312-3 Overhauling a clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 165

Refacing the clutch driving plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 165
Calibrating the springs ................................................ 6 166
Adjusting the mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 166
Controls ........ DS 314-0 Checking and adjustment of the clutch controls.

Checking the clutch cylinder for leakage. Checking the pressure from the hydraulic gear
selector to the clutch cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 169
Adjustment of the clutch drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 171
Adjustment of the clutch clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 172
Adjustment of the clutch re-engagement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 172
Checking a non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 173
DS 314-1 Work on the clutch controls.

Replacement of a clutch cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 175
Replacement of a clutch cylinder joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 176
Replacement of a clutch re-engagement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 177
Replacement of a clutch fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 178
Controls (cont’d. ) . . Replacement of a clutch thrust race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 178

Replacement of a clutch thrust race hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 179
Replacement of a sealing ring (Cyclam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 66 180
Replacement of a pipe assembly between a pressure distributor and hydraulic gear
selector, clutch engagement control and clutch cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 181
Replacement of a non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 182
DS 314-3 Work on the clutch control unit.

Overhauling a clutch cylinder (see Op. DS 314—1, replacement of a joint).
Checking for leakage on a test bench after overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 183
Overhauling a clutch re-engagement control ................................ 3 183
GEARBOX . . . . . . DS 330-1 Work on the gearbox.

Replacement of a gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 185
Replacement of a first speed selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 190
Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 189
DS 330-2 Stripping and assembling a gearbox ....................................... 1 193
DS 330-3 Overhauling a gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 197

Calibrating the fork return springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 201
Preparing the differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 201
Preparing the mainshaft (adjustment of the second speed synchro, of the third speed
synchro, and end play of the bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 203
To assemble the reverse gear shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 206
Adjustment of the bevel pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 207
Adjustment of the differential bearings and the clearance between teeth . . . . . . . . . . . 43 210
Adjustment of the gear engagement (gear control cylinders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 208
Replacement of a clutchfork (see Op. DS 314-1, paragraphs 38 to 46).
Replacement of a thrust race (see Op. DS 314-1, paragraphs 47 to 50).
Replacement of a thrust race hub (see Op. DS 314-1, paragraphs 51 to 65).
Replacement of a sealing ring (Cyclam) (see Op. DS 314-1, paragraphs 66 to 75).
DS 330-4 Replacement of a differential shaft - brake disc or a differential shaft bearing or a front
support arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 213
Gearbox cover ... DS 331-1 Replacement of a gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 217

DS 331-3 Overhauling a gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 220
Calibration of the fork return springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 221
Replacement of a front pipe assembly controlling the forks (see Op. DS 334-7).
Replacement of a rear pipe assembly controlling the forks (see Op. DS 334-7).
Change speed control DS 334-0 Checking and adjustments on the change speed control.
Adjustment of the auxiliary clutch control lever rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 223
Checking the pressure controlling the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 224
Checking the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 225
Checking for leakage from the gear control cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 225
Checking the gear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 226
Adjustment of the pipe assembly controlling the gears (in the case of a replacement
pipe assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 226
Adjustment of the pipe assembly controlling the gears (in the case of replacement of
the cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 228
Bleeding the hydraulic gear selector and the system controlling the gears . . . . . . . . . . 35 228
DS 334-1 Work on the gear control.

Replacement of a gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 229
Replacement of a hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 231
Replacement of a gear change speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 233
DS 334-3 Work on the gear control.

Overhauling a gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 235
Replacement of a starter switch (this Op. above).
Overhauling a gear change speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 237
Overhauling a hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 238
DS 334-4 Work on the hydraulic gear selector (on the car).

Replacement of a third speed automatic control piston ring seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 243
Seizure of an automatic clutch control piston (38 mm dia.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 245
Pipe assemblies . . DS 334-7 Work on the pipe assemblies.

Replacement of a front pipe assembly on the gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 246
Replacement of a rear pipe assembly on the gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 247
Replacement of the ring seal of the cylinders controlling the gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 249
Replacement of a gear change speed control pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 250
Replacement of a non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 251
Replacement of a pipe assembly between a pressure distributor and hydraulic gear
selector, clutch engagement control and clutch cylinder (see Op. DS 314-1)
TRANSMISSION . DS 372-1 Work on the transmission.

Replacement of a driveshaft or a pivot .................................. 1 252
Replacement of a rubber dust cover, gearbox side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 254
Replacement of a dust cover, pivot side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 254
SOURCE AND
RESERVE OF
PRESSURE.
Checking the units on
the car. D5391-0 Rapid check ....................................................... 256
Checking the high pressure pump and pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 256
Checking the total leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 257
Testing the hydraulic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Warming the fluid and the units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 257
Preparing a test (first assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 258
Pre - check of the high pressure pump and control valve .................... 14 258
Checking the brake accumulator valves for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 259
Preparation for testing a brake control unit for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 260
Checking the high pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 260
Checking the pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 261
Preparing a test (second assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 261
Checking the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 262
Checking the hydraulic control of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 262
Checking the rotating union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 262
Checking the brake control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 262
Checking the brake control unit for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 262
Checking the pressure switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 262
Checking the inflation pressure of the brake accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 263
Checking the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 263
Interpretation of the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Checking a non-return valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 263
High pressure pump DS 391-1 Work on the high pressure pump.

Replacement of the high pressure pump belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 266
Replacement of a high pressure pump or a pipe between the pump and pressure
regulator (cars produced before October 1958) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 267
Replacement of a high pressure pump (cars produced since October 1958) . . . . . . . . 25 269
Replacement of a connecting pipe (cars produced since October 1958). . . . . . . . . . . . 38 270
Replacement of a high pressure pump (interchangeability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270
DS 391-3 Work on the high pressure pump.

Overhauling a high pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 272
Checking for leakage from the valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 275
Pressure regulator
accumulator DS 391-4 Replacement of a pressure regulator accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 276
DS 391-6 Overhauling a pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 279
Checking the cutting-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 280
Checking for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 281
Checking the cutting-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 281
Checking the initial pressure of an accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 281
Piping . . . . . . . . . . Repairing the flexible piping (see Op. DS 174-3).
Brake accumulators DS 392-1 Replacement of a brake accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 283

Checking the initial pressure (see Op. DS 391-6).
DS 392-3 Overhauling a brake accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 284

Bench testing a brake accumulator after overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 285
Pressure distribution
block - hydraulic. Checking the pressure distribution block (see Op. DS 393-3).
reservoir
DS 393-1 Work on the pressure distribution block and hydraulic reservoir.
Replacement of a pressure distribution block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 286
Replacement or cleaning a hydraulic reservoir filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 286
Replacement of a hydraulic reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 287
DS 393-3 Overhauling a pressure distribution block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 289

Bench testing a pressure distribution block after overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 290
FRONT AXLE . . . DS 410-1 Adjustments on the front axle.

Adjustment of the camber ............................................ 1 292
Checking the castor angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 292
Adjustment of the alignment (see Op. DS 440-0).
Adjustment of the steering lock (see Op. DS 4’4Q-0).
DS 410-1 Replacement of a front half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 294
Fitting the half axle on the sidemember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 296
Adjusting the anti-roll bar (see Op. DS 433-0).
Pre-adjustment of the heights (see Op. DS 433-0).
Adjustment of the height (see Op. DS 433-0).
Adjustment of the alignment and the steering lock (see Op. DS 440-0).
DS 410-3 Overhauling a front half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 299
Fitting and adjusting the upper ball joint ................................ 10 301
Fitting and adjusting the lower ball joint ................................ 11 303
Adjusting the caster angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-f 305
Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . DS 413-1 Work on the pivot and wheel
Replacement of a pivot seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 306
Replacement of a pivot steering lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 307
Replacement of an upper ball pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 309
Replacement of a lower ball pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 311
Replacement of wheel lock cone (see Op. DS 372-1).
Replacement of a wheel positioning dowel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 312
Replacement of a wheel locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 312
Replacement of a pivot (see Op. DS 372-1).
Replacement of an anti-roll bar (see Op. DS 433-4).
REAR AXLE . . . . DS 420-1 Replacement of a half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 313
DS 420-3 Overhauling a half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 317
Grinding the brake drums ............................................ 12 320
Preparing and adjusting the stub axle bearings ........................... 13 320
DS 420-4 Work on the rear axle.
Replacement of a wheel stub axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 323
Replacement of a bearing oil seal or a bearing thrust collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 325
Replacement of a wheel locking cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 325
Replacement of an anti-roll bar (see Op. DS 434-4).
SUSPENSION . . . . DS 433-0 Adjustments on the suspension.

Pre-adjustment of the heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 328
Adjustment of the heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 328
Adjustments on the front anti-roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 331
Adjustment of the lateral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 331
Adjustment of the lateral clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 332
Adjustment of the bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 332
Checking a suspension cylinder (see Op. DS 433-3).
Checking the initial pressure of a suspension sphere (see Op. DS 433 3).
Front suspension . . DS 433-1 Work on the front suspension.
Replacement of a suspension sphere or a damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 333
Replacement of a height corrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 334
Replacement of a suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 335
Replacement of a dust cover or a cylinder piston rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 337
Suspension units . . DS 433-3 Work on the suspension units.
Overhauling a front damper valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 339
Overhauling a rear damper valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 339
Overhauling a height corrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 340
Overhauling a suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 342
Bench testing a suspension cylinder after overhaul ......................... 22 343
Checking the initial pressure of a suspension sphere ........................ 25 343
Front anti-roll bar . DS 433-4 Work on the front anti-roll bar.
Replacement of an anti-roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 345
Replacement of the anti-roll bar bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 346
Replacement of a height corrector control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 348
Adjustment of the anti-roll bars (see Op. DS 433-0).
Rear axle suspension DS 434-1 Work on the rear suspension.
Replacement of a height corrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 349
Replacement of a suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 350
Replacement of a dust cover or a suspension cylinder rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 352
Replacement of a suspension sphere or a damper valve (see Op. DS 433-1).
Overhauling a rear damper valve (see Op. DS 433-3).
Rear anti-roll bar . . DS 434-4 Work on the rear anti-roll bar.
Replacement of an anti-roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 354
Replacement of a height corrector control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 355
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . DS 434-7 Work on the suspension piping.
Replacement of a front corrector feed pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 356
Replacement of a front suspension feed pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 357
Manual pipe control DS 437-0 Adjustment of the manual height control.
Adjustment of a control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 359
Adjustment of a control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 360
DS 437-1 Replacement of a manual height control.
Replacement of a control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 361
Replacement of a control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 363
STEERING . . . . . . DS 440-0 Adjustments on the steering
Adjustment of the lateral position of the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 365
Adjustment of the angular position of the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 366
Adjustment of the alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 366
Adjustment of the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 367
Adjustment of the point “0” (the position in which the car runs in a straight line) . . . . 10 367
Adjustment of the pressure cross-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 368
Adjustment of the steering pinion (cars produced since November 1959) (see
Op. DS 442-3, paragraph 43 B).
Checking the rotating union for leakage (see Op. DS 391-0).
Checking the steering rack hydraulic control for leakage (see Op. DS 391-0).
DS 441-1 Work on the steering wheel.
Replacement of a steering wheel (second assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 369
Replacement of a steering locating cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 371
Replacement of the steering locating apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 372
Replacement of a steering column bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 372
DS 442-1 Work on the steering.
Replacement of a steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 375
Replacement of a rack hydraulic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 376
Replacement of the rotating union and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 378
DS 442-3 Work on the steering.
Overhauling a rack control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 383
Overhauling the rotating union and pinion assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 386
Overhauling a steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 388
Adjusting the steering pinion (cars produced since November 1959) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 B 391
Bench testing a steering after overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 394
Steering relays . . . . DS 443-1 Work on the steering relays.

Replacement of a steering relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 396
Adjusting the angular position of the relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 397
Replacement of a lower relay lever (on the car) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 399
DS 443-3 Overhauling a steering relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 401
BRAKES ....... DS 451-0 Adjustments on the brakes.
Adjustment of a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 403
Adjustment of the control lever eccentric adjusting stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 404
Centralising the rear brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 404
Adjustment of the mechanical brake cables (see Op. DS 454-0).
Bleeding the brakes (see Op. DS 453-0).
Check the position of the front brake disc (see Op. DS 330-4).
Front brakes . . . . . DS 451-1 Work on the front brakes.
Replacement of the front brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 405
Replacement of a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 407
Replacement of a brake disc (see Op. DS 330-4)
DS 451-3 Overhauling a brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 409
Rear brakes . . . . . . DS 451-4 Work on the rear brakes.
Replacement of a rear brake drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 414
Replacement of the brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 415
Replacement of a brake backplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 417
Replacement of a wheel cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 419
Hydraulic brake .. DS 453-0 Adjustment of the hydraulic brake control.
control Bleeding the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 421
Adjusting the distribution of braking pressure (on the car) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 422
Checking the pressure switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 423
Adjustment of the stop lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 424
DS 453-1 Work on the hydraulic brake control.
Replacement of a hydraulic brake control (first assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 425
Sealing of the hydraulic control slide valves (first assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 426
Replacement of a hydraulic brake control (second assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 427
Sealing of the hydraulic slide valve (second assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 428
Replacement of a braking distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 430
Checking the braking distributor for leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 431
Hydraulic brake
control (cont’d) . . . DS 453-3 Overhauling a hydraulic brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 433
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . DS 453-4 Replacement of a rear brake articulating piping ............................. 1 436
Mechanical brake . . DS 454-0 Adjustment of the mechanical brake.

control. Adjusting the control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 437
Adjusting the connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 437
DS 454-1 Work on the mechanical brake control.

Replacement of a control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 439
Replacement of a control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 440
Replacement of a connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 441
ELECTRICAL . . . . DS 510-1 Arrangement of electrical installation. 443

Schedule of bulbs fitted on the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Dynamo ........ DS 532-1 Replacement of a dynamo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 456
DS 532-3 Work on the dynamo

Overhauling a DUCELLIER dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 460
Overhauling a PARIS-RHONE dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 457
Starter motor . . . . . DS 533-1 Replacement of a starter motor .......................................... 1 464
DS 533-3 Work on the starter motor.

Overhauling a DUCELLIER starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 466
Overhauling a PARIS-RHONE starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 469
HEATING AND
DEMISTING . . . . . DS 642-1 Work on the cut-out valve.
Replacement of a cut-out valve diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 473
Replacement of a cut-out valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 473
DS 642-3 Overhauling a cut-out valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 475

INDEX OF SPECIAL TOOLS SHOWN IN THE MANUAL 19
No. of Service Reference of
Illustration DESCRIPTION Methods No. Tool on sale Remarks Importance
NOTE:
Numbers in the column "IMPORTANCE" have the following significance:
1. Indispensable in all workshops. 4. Of small use.
2. Indispensable in order to save time. 5. For use on actual vehicle.
3. Indispensable in order to recover parts. 6. Only for very large workshop.
ENGINE
16 Retaining clip for bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4158 1
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T 1
125 Setting gauge for steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993-T see steering
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (9 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2219-T 1
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T 1
95 Strap wrench ............................................... 2223-T 1
20-22 Fixture for engine suspension adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1698-T 2
127 Fixture for adjusting the angular position of the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955-T see steering
19 Stand for dismantled engine-gearbox assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2497-T 6
65 Spanner for clutch housing screws (two flats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677-T 1
72 Spanner for clutch housing screws (hexagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2431-T 1
16 Carburettor spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623-T 1
16 Spark plug spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603-T 1
143 Lever for removing front brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2127-T see brakes
143 Fork for disengagement of front brake catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2128-T see brakes
72 Spanner for high pressure pump nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2280-T 1
15 Spanner for camshaft nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667-T 3
15 Spanner for crankshaft nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731-T 3
15 Setting gauge for timing pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1680-T 2
16 Spanner for crankshaft plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1624-T 1
5 Spring compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614-T 1
5 Assembly for removal and refitting the valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616-T 1
10 Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964-T 1
4 Grinding wheel for inlet valve seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662-T 1
4 Grinding wheel for upper and lower clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630-T 1
4 Grinding wheel for exhaust valve seat and upper clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627-T 1
4 Grinding wheel for lower clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633-T 1
4 Valve grinding tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1615-T 1
6 Fixture for calibrating springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2420-T 3
11 Fixture for testing the oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-1811 2
Dial gauge for measuring bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2440-T 3
7 Torsion spanner . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471-T 1
INDEX O F SPECIAL TOOLS SHOWN IN THE MANUAL 20
No. of Service Reference of Remarks
DESCRIPTION Importance
Illustration Methods No. Tool on Sale
16 Spanner for plugs closing front shaft oil-ways (with dowels) . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3462-2O 4
16 Spanner for plugs closing front shaft oil-ways (hexagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3462-70 4
12 Plate for fitting cylinder joints . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4134 1
18 Stand for engine resting on cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-l70 6
13 Piston ring clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656-T 1
44 Mandrel for centralising clutch plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712-T 1
18 Stand for engine resting on crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-160 6
Revolution counter – electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2436-T 1
or or
Revolution counter – mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2434-T 1
35 Lever for driving belt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4208 1
Torsion spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472-T 1
9 Tools for valve guide replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644-T 1
9 Reamer for valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642-T 1
5 Yoke for retaining inlet rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4158-20 2
17 Sleeve for removal and refitting valve springs (on the car) . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4244 1
17 Tappet extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608-T 2
51 Chain sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697-T 1
24 Spanner for engine suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699-T 1
24 Spanner for engine suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700-T 1
24 Spanner steering rack control rod and engine suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1982-T see steering
51 Engine stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797-T 1
63 Spanner for differential shaft nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770-T see gearbox
36 Fixture for pulley alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685-T 1
WATER AND LOW PRESSURE PUMP
41 Stand for water and low pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-180 1
41 Spanner for low pressure pump bearing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634-T 2
41 Low pressure pump bearing extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684-T 1
39 Extractor for Calcar bush of water pump ......................... 2291-T 1
38 Dolly and mandrel for assembly of friction washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2292-T 1
39 Grinder for friction washers and pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2289-T 1
38 Assembly for setting the Calcar bush of the water pump ............. 2288-T 1
41 Sleeve for assembly of water pump shaft seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3470-20 I
94 Taper for fitting joints on pump shaft ............................ MR-3384-10 1
40 Bush for retaining pump shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4251 l
41 Tube for compressing the springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-190 1
41 Spanner for low pressure pump bearing nut ....................... 1646-T 2
63 Spanner for driving shaft bearing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640-T 2
17 Extractor for driving shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3404-30 2
CLUTCH
44 Mandrel for centring clutch disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1712-T see engine
6 Fixture for calibrating the springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2420-T see engine
43 Fixture for toggle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701-T 6
44 Simplified clutch adjustment assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3457-100 1
43 Finger, ring and clamp for fixture 1701-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1704-T 6
49 Hydraulic test bench ......................................... 2290-T 1
49 Spanner for fork spindle screw ................................. 1705-T 1
Electric or mechanical revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2434-T
or see engine
2436-T
7 Torsion spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471-T see engine
48 Mandrel for fitting ring seal of clutch cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3045-60 1
72 Spanner for hydraulic unions (9 mm opening) ..................... 2219-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic unions (10 mm opening) .................... 2221-T see engine
17 Ligarex pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2483-T 1
72 Spanner for high pressure pump nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2280-T see engine
GEARBOX
16 Retaining clip for bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4158 see engine
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T see engine
143 Spanner for leading the front brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2141-T see brakes
125 Setting gauge for steering column .............................. 1993-T see engine
72 Spanner for high pressure pump nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2280-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (9 mm opening) ................. 2219-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (is mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2220-T see engine
51 Chain sling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1697-T see engine
51 Engine stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797-T see engine
51 Gearbox support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799-T 2
65 Spanner for clutch housing screws (two flats) ..................... 1677-T see engine
72 Spanner for clutch housing screws (hexagon) ..................... 2431-T see engine
127 Fixture for adjusting the angular position of the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955-T see steering
63 Spanner for driving shaft bearing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640-T see engine
62 Stand for gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-130 2
41 Spanner for bevel pinion nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734-T 2
61 Extractor body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750-T 1
61 Split collet and ring for differential bearing extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753-T 1
51 Pressure pad for extraction of differential bearing .................. 1742-T 3
63 Spanner for differential shaft nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770-T 2
63 Spanner for nut of differential bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771-T 2
64 Socket for gear control cylinder screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773-T 2
56 Spring compressors for gearbox cover ........................ 1798-T

64 Mandrel for fitting the seals of the cylinders controlling the gears . . . . . . . MR-3676-120
64 Mandrel for fitting the seals of the cylinders controlling the gears . . . . . . . MR-3676-130 1
6 Fixture for calibrating the springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2420-T see engine
61 Mandrel for fitting the differential bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1768-T 2
63 Mandrel for fitting the oil seals and distance washer on the differential shaft 1767-T 2
63 Mandrel and bush for fitting the seal in the outside of the differential bearing
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772-T 2
56 Straight edge for dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3377 1
56 Dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2437-T 1
65 Mandrel for mainshaft bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3045 3
65 Mandrel for assembly for bevel pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-30 3
59 Fixture for adjustment of bevel pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2044-T 1
60 Fixture for adjustment of differential bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766-T 2
60 Dial gauge extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2438-T 2
59 Support for dial gauge (adjustment of tooth clearance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039-T 1
59 Extension for dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2439-T 1
97 Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964-T see engine
97 Pressure pad for extractor 1964-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968-T 1
97 Extractor and pressure pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864-T see front axle
64 Mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-120 2
65 Mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-130 2
GEARBOX CONTROL
171–173 Hydraulic test bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2290-T 1
72 Ratchet spanner for hydraulic gear selector fixing nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2428-T 1
72 Spanner for screws of clutch housing and nuts fixing hydraulic gear selector 2431-T see engine
67 Setting rod for hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2429-T 1
71 Vice support for hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-200 2
71 Rack for hydraulic gear selector pistons and valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-210 1
71 Gauge for checking the bores of the synchronising pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . 2277-T 1
TRANSMISSION
97 Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964-T see engine
97 Pressure pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968-T see gearbox
95 Extractor and pressure pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864-T see front axle
97 Stand for pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922-T 2
97 Spanner for nut between cardan shaft and hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920-T 1
101 Taper fitting for positioning dust cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930-T 1
Illustration Methods No.Tool on Sale
SOURCE AND RESERVE OF PRESSURE

72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (9 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2219-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (13 mm opening) ................. . 2222-T see engine
72 Spanner for high pressure pump nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2280-T see engine
17 Ligarex pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2483-T see engine
94 Tapered sleeve for fitting ring seals on high pressure pump articulating spindle MR-3384- 11 1
93 Tommy bar and spanner for pressure regulator cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2224-T 1
93 Tapered sleeve for fitting pressure regulator piston ring seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2226-T 1
93 Tapered sleeve for fitting pressure regulator bleed screw ring seal . . . . . . . . 2225-T 1
79 "T" union for checking hydraulic units on the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2296-T 1
171 Hydraulic test bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2290-T 1
79 Reservoir for checking high pressure pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2299-T 1
Pipe for separate high pressure pump outlet (used with test bench 2290-T) . . 2297-T 1
82 Spanner for holding high pressure pump pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2281-T 1
82 Extractor for body and high pressure pump shaft ..................... 2282-T 1
83 Rack for high pressure pump cylinders and pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3301-80 1
7 Torsion spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471-T see engine
83 Mandrel for centring high pressure pump distance piece and assembly of bearing . . MR-3436-110 1
83 Retainers (set of 7) for high pressure pump pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2284-T 1
84 Mandrel for assembly of high pressure pump shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2286-T 1
84 Arrangement for fitting the high pressure pump casing ................ 2287-T 1
84a Support for dial gauge for measuring the length of the push-rods . . . . . . . . . MR-2265-60 1
80a Stroboscopic revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-4142-20 6
80b Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2432-T 1
FRONT AXLE
169 Fixture for checking the camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2314-T 1
102 Fixture for checking the castor angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321-T 1
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T see engine
97 Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964-T see engine
97 Pressure pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1968-T 1
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (9 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2219-T see engine
16 Spanner for carburettor fixing and height corrector eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623-T see engine
98 Vice support for half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-120 3
97 Extractor and pressure pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1864-T see engine
97 Spanner for anti-roll bar ball joint cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3691-40 2

99 Vice support for pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922-T see
transmission
99 Spanner for nut between hub and cardan shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1920-T see
transmission
99 Spanner for pivot bearing nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921-T 1
96 Extractor for lower cup of upper pivot ball joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856-T 1
96 Fixture for fitting the lower cup of the upper pivot ball joint . . . . . . . . . . 1857-T 1
96 Straight edge for dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3377 see gearbox
96 Dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2437-T see gearbox
7 Torsion spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471-T see engine
100 Mandrel for fitting the front seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-140 2
100 Mandrel for fitting the rear seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-150 2
102 Bush for adjusting the castor angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1865-T 2
102 Bush for adjusting the castor angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1866-T 2
97 Fixture for adjusting the steering lever on the pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867-T 2
95a Fixture for tightening the wheel locking screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1868-T 1
REAR AXLE
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T see engine
105 Spanner for nut fixing half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757-T 3
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (13 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2222-T see engine
106 Vice support for half axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3053-90 2
107 Extractor for stub axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2018-T 1
108 Extractor for outer cup of outer stub axle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2019-T 1
65 Spanner for brake backplate screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677-T see engine
145 Spring compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2110-T 6
109 Extractor for inner cup of outer stub axle bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2020-T 1
146 Spanner for tightening the brake shoe adjusting cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3354-40 6
147 Mandrel for rectification of brake drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3700-100 1
110 Fixture for stub axle bearing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2021-T 1
110 Dial gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2437-T see engine
147 Mandrel for fitting the oil seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3676-170 2
148 Centring fixture for brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2115-T 2
145 Spanner for positioning brake shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2120-T 2
99 Vice support for stub axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1922-T see
transmission
Illustration Methods No.Tool on Sale
SUSPENSION
97 Spanner for adjusting height corrector eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2285-T 2
170 Gauges for pre-adjustment of the front heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2307-T 1
169 Fixture for adjusting the camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2314-T 1
93 Strap wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2223-T 1
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T see engine
16 Spanner for height corrector fixing nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623-T see engine
17 Ligarex pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2483-T see engine
7 Torsion spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2471-T see engine
118 Mandrel for fitting the height corrector steel cups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3045-80 1
118 Soft jaws for holding the suspension cylinder in a vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3407-30 1
Spring balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472-T 1
171 - 173 Hydraulic test benches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2290-T see gearbox
119 Support for checking the suspension cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2293-T 1
STEERING
168 Jacking bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505-T see engine
125 Fixture for adjusting the angular position of the steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1955-T 1
Spring balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2472-T see suspension
171 - 173 Hydraulic test benches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2290-T see gearbox
126 Spring compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1991-T 2
126 Spanner for steering column retaining collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1994-T 2
72 Spanner for steering wheel bracket screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2428-T see gear
control
124a Support for dial gauge for adjustment of steering pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997-T 1
125 Setting gauge for steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1993-T 3
127 Extractor for hydraulic piston pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1969-T 3
130 Spanner for locknut of steering lock adjusting cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1974-T 3
130 Spanner for end cap locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2186-VA 2CV 2
97 Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1964-T see engine
128 Soft jaws for holding cylinder in a vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MR-3407-20 1
128 Gauge for checking the housing of the piston ring seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1983-T 1
131 Tapered sleeve and mandrel for fitting the piston ring seals . . . . . . . . . . . . 1985-T 1
129 Vice adaptor for steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1999-T 1
DESCRIPTION Remarks Importance
127 Extractor for central ball joint 1967-T 1
127 Spanner for rack control rod 1982-T 1
127 Extractor for rack ball joint 1966-T 1
127 Spanner for rack thrust pad nuts MR-3691-70 3
97 Extractor 1964-T see engine
97 Pressure pad 1968-T see engine
127 Mandrel for fitting flexible bearings MR-3676-110 1
188 Gauge for adjusting the angular position of the steering relay 1995-T 2
139 Spanner for relay upper bearing nut 1988-T 2
139 Spanner for relay lower bearing nut 1989-T 3
139 Tube for positioning relay lower bearing 1990-T 3
BRAKES
143 Spanner for adjusting the movable shoe 2129-T 1
148 Fixture for centring the rear brake shoes 2115-T see rear axle
168 Jacking bracket 2505-T see engine
143 Lever for removing the front brake shoes 2127-T 1
143 Fork for retaining brake block catch 2128-T 1
143 Spanner for front brake bleed screw 2141-T 1
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (9 mm opening) 2219-T see engine
72 Spanner for hydraulic pipe unions (10 mm opening) 2221-T see engine
92 Strap wrench 2223-T see suspension
16 Spanner for screw fixing pedal bracket 1623-T see engine
145 Spring compressor 2110-T see rear axle
107 Extractor for stub axle 2018-T see rear axle
65 Spanner for brake backplate screws 1677-T see engine
146 Spanner for tightening the brake shoe adjusting cam MR-3354-40 see rear axle
171 - 173 Hydraulic test benches 2290-T see gearbox
150 Spanner for hydraulic brake control caps MR-3691-50 1
83 Rack for hydraulic brake control valves MR-3053-210 see source
and reserve
ELECTRICAL of pressure
163 Screwdriver for fitting pole pieces MR-1601-4 1
163 Mandrel for fitting pole pieces MR-1601-2 1
153 Support for dynamo MR-1601-3 1
162 Lever for preparation of "Benada" Bendix springs MR-3526-12 1
152 Support for preparation of "Benada" Bendix springs MR-3526-11 1
162 Support for fitting the "Benada" Bendix springs MR-3526-13 1
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 00 : Work on the hydraulic system. Op. DS 00 27
TOOLS
IMPORTANT REMARK
If any irregularity of working occurs make certain that the hydraulic system is under pressure before doing
anything else. To do this :-
With the engine idling :-
- Unscrew the pressure regulator bleed screw about one to one and a half turns (one should be able to
hear the release of pressure in the control valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
- Screw up the bleed screw and the valve should cut-out in less than 20 seconds (the point of cut-out is
indicated by a reduction in the noise of operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
If the above is not the case, check in the order shown, the following points :
- That there is sufficient hydraulic fluid in the reservoir.
- That the filter in the reservoir is perfectly clean and in good condition.
- That the air is not being sucked in through the pump inlet pipe.
- That the belt of the high pressure pump is not slipping.
- That the bleed screw has been screwed up.
- Carry out the checking as indicated in Op. DS 391-0.
TOOLS
For correct functioning of all the hydraulic system, it is essential that the fluid and the units of the hydraulic
system should be perfectly clean. The strictest precautions must be observed during work on the car and
for storage of the fluid and spare parts.
1 STORAGE
Pipes, units and spare parts must be protected from exposure to dust and from impact. Seals and rubber pipes
must be protected from exposure to dust, air, light or heat.
The fluid must be kept in its original container, securely sealed. We recommend the use of 1 quart (1 litre)
containers (for topping up) or 1 gallon (5 litres) (in the case of draining or refilling) in order to avoid
keeping many small containers.
2 PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK

Before starting work, carefully wash the car or round the area in which the work is to be carried out.
Example : When replacing a rear suspension cylinder, carefully wash the corresponding wheel arch.
Before disconnecting a union, carefully wash it and the surrounding area with alcohol.
Then proceed as follows:-
a) Work on all the units except brakes and brake control :

1. Remove the spare wheel.
2. Unscrew the bleed screw on the pressure regulator.
3. Move the manual height control lever to the low position
b) Work on the brake system :

1. Carry out all the operations mentioned in the preceding paragraph.
2. Connect a flexible pipe (plastic or rubber) on the front brake bleed pipe, on the accelerated idling
hydraulic control. Connect also a pipe on the rear brake cylinder bleed screw and press on the
hydraulic brake pedal until the fluid ceases to flow.
3. If the union is situated below the level of the fluid in the reservoir, drain the latter in order to avoid a
loss of fluid, or immediately close the pipe with the appropriate plug.
3 PRECAUTIONS AFTER DISCONNECTING THE UNIONS
Seal the open ends of pipes with caps.
1. Metal pipes with screwed unions :
3.5 mm dia. cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 435-91
4.5 mm dia. cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 453-131
6.35 mm dia. cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 453-132
8 mm dia. cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 391-60
TOOLS
2. For the pipe assemblies, protect the union flanges with cellulose tape.
Protect plastic pipes in the same manner.
3. For the rubber pipes, use cylindrical pegs :-
8 mm dia. 50 mm long.
12 mm dia. 50 mm long.
4 PROTECTION OF HYDRAULIC UNITS AFTER REMOVAL
Seal the openings of the units as dismantling proceeds.
a) On the high pressure pump :
1 cap D 391-58 for the feed pipe.
2 caps D 391-57 for the high pressure pump outlet (8 mm dia.
connecting pipe).
or 1 rubber cap for the high pressure pump outlet (6.35 mm dia.
connecting pipe).
b) On the pressure regulator :
1 cap D 391-60 for the return pipe.
1 plug D 391-63 for the union of the pressure regulator - brake
accumulator connecting pipe.
1 plug D 391-88 for the intake union of the pump.
1 cap D 391-111 for the union on the pressure regulator
accumulator (accumulator removed).
1 cap D 433-82 for the main accumulator (pressure regulator
disconnected).
c) On the brake accumulator :
1 plug D 391-88 for the outlet union.
2 plugs D 391-63 for the inlet unions and connecting pipe with the
other brake accumulator.
d) Oh the distribution block :
5 plugs D 391-63
e) On the height corrector :
3 plugs D 391-63
1 plug D 435-91
f) On the suspension cylinder :
1 plug D 434-95 for the inlet union.
1 plug D 434-70 for the union on cylinder of suspension sphere.
1 cap D 433-82 for the suspension sphere.
g) On the front brake cylinders:
2 plugs D 391-63 for the inlet unions and bleed pipe.
h) Oh the rear brake cylinders :
1 plug D 391-63
TOOLS
i) On the clutch cylinder :
1 plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 391-63.
j) On the low pressure pump :
2 plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 391-63.
IMPORTANT NOTE : All plugs, caps and pegs must be properly cleaned before using.
5 PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO ASSEMBLY
The steel pipes must be blown through with compressed air. Rubber pipes and ring seals must be washed in
alcohol and then blown off with compressed air. Cleaning of the hydraulic units must be carried out with
alcohol, to the exclusion of all other products. After cleaning, blow off the parts with compressed air.
6 FITTING THE SEALS
a) Seal plates :
Before refitting a seal plate, make sure that the ring seals are in position and in good condition (not
deformed or split). It is necessary to examine the ring seals very carefully, if need be with a
magnifying glass, it is preferable to replace the ring seals.
When fitting position, make sure that the fluid holes in the plate correspond to those in the flanges.
b) Sealing sleeves (see P1. 94, fig. 2):
NOTE - Sealing sleeves must be replaced after each dismantling operation.
1. Place the sealing sleeve (3) on the pipe. This sleeve must be set back 2 mm from the end of the pipe.
2. Centralise the pipe in the bore by aligning it with the axis of the bore.
VERY IMPORTANT - Make sure that the end of the pipe enters the small bore (at "a").
3. Screw the union nut by hand. On certain units the axis of the bore is oblique relatively to the face of the
boss for the nut.
4. Lightly tighten the nut, 4.3 to 5.7 ft/lbs. (0.6 to 0.8 m. kg).
This light tightening of the nut is sufficient to ensure a good seal. Excessive tightening will cause leakage.
c) Ring seals :
NOTE - Because of their design, the efficiency of these seals increases with pressure. One does not
increase the sealing by increasing the tightening of the unions.
Replacement of the ring seals :
1. Moisten the ring seal with hydraulic fluid.
2. Fit a tapered sleeve (tapered sleeve MR-3384-l1 for the union of the high pressure pump, see Pl.94, fig.3
and tapered sleeve MR-3384-l0 for the spindle of the low pressure pump, see Pl. 94, fig. 1), etc Tapered sleeve MR-3384-11
Tapered sleeve MR-3384-10
3. Fit the ring seal in position by sliding it over the tapered sleeve.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 00 : Revolution counters and pressure gauges.. Op. DS 00 31
TOOLS
7 REVOLUTION COUNTERS
Certain adjustments and checking cannot be carried out effectively without the use of a revolution counter.
In order that these adjustments and checks shall be accurate, it is necessary to use an instrument which is sufficiently
accurate for this work. In particular the instrument should be accurate to within 20 r.p.m. at 600 r.p.m.
Electric Revolution Counters

The following instruments have been tested by us with satisfactory results :
"RABOTTI" sold by Société FENWICK, 15, rue Fénelon, Paris, 10e, under number 2436-T.
"SOURIAU, type 1094" sold by Société SOURIAU, 9, rue du Général-Gallieni, Billancourt (Seine).
"L.T.I. type CT1" sold by Société LE TRANSISTOR INDUSTRIEL, 1, rue Anatole-France, Puteaux (Seine).
"GUYOT ELECTRONIC" sold by Société R.E.M., 44, rue Brunel, Paris, 17e.
"SPEED-O-METER JUNIOR", sold by Société C.I.D., 71, rue Chauveau, Neuilly-sur-Seine (Seine).
The electric revolution counters should be periodically checked (approximately every month). This operation can
be carried out by means of a stroboscopic disc, MR-4142-20 (see Pl. 80A).
Mechanical Revolution Counters

These mechanical revolution counters are sold by Société FENWICK, under number 2434-T.
It is preferable to use this revolution counter on a test bench with an appropriate coupling (contact breakers,
dynamo, injection pump, speedometer etc.).
This instrument can also be used on the car, by comparison with an electric revolution counter with a curve which
is known.
In order to carry out this operation, the pulleys and belts should be in good condition, the pulleys should be in
correct alignment and the belts tensioned correctly (see Op. DS 231-0).
These conditions are also imperative in order to use the instrument when carrying out adjustments on the car.
Stroboscopic Disc
This instrument can easily be made. For constructional dimensions ask for note MR-4142-20 from Service
"Méthodes Réparations", 11 bis, rue de la Source, Paris, 16e.
Fit the disc on the high pressure pump pulley and fit the light in position as indicated on Pl. 80A.
The pulleys and belts should be in good condition, the pulleys in correct alignment and the belts correctly tensioned
(see Op. DS 231-0).
a) Checking on the car :
We particularly recommend this instrument in order to check the output of the high pressure pump
(see Op. DS 391-0). In effect the precision of this is greater than that of the better tachometers (it does not
depend on the current frequency).
TOOLS
b) Checking of the revolution counter.
This instrument permits the checking of the electric revolution counter. It permits of checking engine revolutions at
600 r.p.m. i.e. :300 r.p.m. high pressure pump, 1,200 engine r.p.m. i.e. : 600 r.p.m. high pressure pump and all
the multiples of 300 r.p.m. high pressure pump. but beyond 1,200 engine r.p.m. reading becomes very difficult.
NOTE - The disc does not replace a tachometer, it will only check the speeds given above.
8 PRESSURE GAUGES
In order to carry out the various checking and adjustments on the hydraulic units on the car, the use of pressure
gauges is indispensable. As it is necessary to use accurate revolution counters to obtain accurate checking and
adjustment, so it is necessary to use accurate pressure gauges.
The pressure gauges of the test bench Z290-T possess the required accuracy. In order to preserve this accuracy, it
is necessary to use dampers (dash-pots) for protection, sold by Société FENWICK.
We advise the checking of these pressure gauges by comparison with a new pressure gauge reserved for this
purpose.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-1 : Replacement of an engine gearbox assembly. Op. DS 100-1 33
PARTICULAR POINTS
Removal.
2 Release the pressure in the hydraulic system and drain the fluid reservoir.
3 Drain the radiator and cylinder block.
10 Mark the position of the steering pinion in relation to the steering column and mark the position of the steering in its bearings, before
removal.
25 Do not lose the adjusting shims, fitted between the engine front crossmember and the sidemembers.
Assembly.
27 Adjust the position of the rear engine mountings, using the fixture 1698-T (see Op. DS 133-0 and Pl. 20-21-22-23).
29 Refit the front crossmember of the engine-gearbox assembly: replace the shims, found when dismantling, between the crossmember and the
sidemember in order that the dimension between the brake disc and the sidemember on the left side is greater by 70 2 mm than the same
dimension on the right side (use the total number of shims found when dismantling).
30 Couple up the flexible coupling (bibax) to the brake discs, make sure that the dowels are in position.
31 After having connected the mechanical brake control cables to the front brakes, adjust the connecting cable, the control levers being at the
limit of separation from their eccentric stop.
33 Adjust the manual ignition control: put the control in the centre position (count the number of notches) and put the contact breaker in the
central position (between the 2 stops). Check that the contact breaker can move into the "fully advanced" and "fully retarded" positions.
43 Fit the steering, note the markings made when dismantling (position of the pinion in relation to the steering column and the position of the
steering in its bearings).
45 Adjust the alignment of the steering (fixture 1955-T, see Pl. 125) the groove "C" should be in contact with the centre gauge pin (D) of the
fixture.
NOTE-If the steering has been replaced, position the assembly then adjust the alignment and steering lock (see Op. DS 440-0).
48 Fit the ignition coils: connect the wire with the yellow terminal to the lower breaker (rear terminal) and the wire with the red terminal to
the upper breaker (front terminal) (cars produced before July 1959).
53 Refill the water cooling system (bleed) the vane of the heater control being open. Make sure that the pipe (48) (see PL 25) is warm.
54 Refill the hydraulic fluid reservoir (bleed screw loosened). With the engine idling, tighten the bleed screw and check the unions for leaks.
55 Adjust the clutch clearance: 1 to 2 mm (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 20 to 23).
56 Bleed the hydraulic gear selector: operate the auxiliary clutch control lever several times and make successive movements with the gear
lever through all gears, several times, with the front wheels raised (see Op. DS 334-0).
57 Bleed the brake system (see Op. DS 453-0).
58 Adjust the slow running: normal idling = 550 to 600 r.p.m. and accelerated idling 900 ± 25 r.p.m. (see Op. DS I42-0).
TOOLS
STRIPPING DOWN
1 Hold the bonnet open (retaining bar MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1) and put the front of the car on stands
(jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) Retaining bar MR-4158
Jacking bracket Z505-T
2 Remove the spare wheel. Release the pressure in the whole of the hydraulic system. Drain the hydraulic
fluid reservoir. (Retain the fluid in a sealed container) 8 mm spanner
3 Drain the radiator and cylinder block. Retain the water, which contains anti-freeze) 23 mm spanner
4 Remove the crossmember supporting the spare wheel, the air deflection panel, the two front wings and
the protecting covers for the steering (disengage the end of the bonnet catch cable). Remove the front
brake cooling ducts 12-14 mm box spanners
5 Remove the battery.
Disconnect the dynamo wires from the regulator. Remove the coil and bracket
assembly. Disconnect the starter cable from the terminal on the solenoid switch. Remove the battery tray 12 mm spanner
8-14 box spanners
6 Disconnect the feed pipe for the high pressure pump from the outlet pipe on the reservoir and remove the
fixing straps from the hydraulic fluid reservoir 8 mm box spanner
7 To remove the battery support :
Disengage the feed pipe for the high pressure pump from the battery support. Disconnect the bonnet lock
control cable from the lever on the scuttle and remove the support and cable assemblies 12 mm box spanner
8 To remove the expansion chamber (L. H. drive only) :
Remove the fixing clips on the silencer and the manifold. Remove the fixing collar from the exhaust
pipe. Remove the expansion chamber. 12 mm box spanner
9 Disconnect the earth cable from the gearbox and remove the cable harness assembly and protecting tube
(cars produced before February 1957) 14 mm box spanner
10 To remove the steering (see Pl. 125) :
a) Mark the driving pinion with a centre punch or a spot of paint opposite the slot in the tube (at "a").
Remove the screw (1) connecting the steering tube to the driving pinion. Fit the stop 1993-T for the Stop 1993-T
steering tube 12 mm box spanner
b) With a dab of cellulose paint, mark the position of the steering in the relay bearings, at "b".
Disconnect the steering levers from the relay spindles 14-16 box spanners
TOOLS
c) Disconnect the feed pipe assembly (5) from the steering. Remove the sealing plate. Seal the pipe
assembly with a plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm ring spanner
d) Remove the bearing caps, take off the steering towards the left-hand side of the car . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
11 Disconnect the hose (2) on the heating system, from the feed pipe and disconnect the heater pipe from the
steel tube, right-hand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 mm box spanners
12 Disconnect the petrol feed pipe from the pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 Disconnect the brake feed pipe, from the three-way union (41) (see Pl. 25) (spanner 2222-T, see Pl.72, fig.4) Spanner 2222-T
14 Disconnect the union (42) on the distribution block (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4), the
union plates on the hydraulic gear selector and on the clutch re-engagement control (47) (see Pl. 25) . . . Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
8 mm ring spanner
15 Remove the left-hand suspension sphere. (strap wrench 2223-T, see Pl. 93, fig. 1) ................. Strap wrench 2223-T
16 Disconnect the feed pipe (43) and the delivery pipe (44) from the selector (see Pl. 25).
17 Disconnect the choke control from the carburettor lever .
Disconnect the accelerator control from the crosspiece of the throttle valve control. Disconnect the control
from the pivot on the scuttle and twist it towards the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm spanner
18 Disconnect the advance and retard control, from the contact breaker.
19 Disconnect the S pipe assembly from the gearbox.
Disconnect the speedometer cable from the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm ring spanner
12 mm box spanner
20 Remove the pipe between the control valve and the rear brake accumulator (situated at the front)
(spanner 2222-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanner 2222-T
21 Remove the right-hand suspension sphere. Remove the heat insulating screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
22 Remove the nuts from the engine fixing studs on the rear side brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm spanner
23 mm box spanner
23 Disconnect the flexible coupling (bibax) from the driving plates on the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm socket with
extension
24 Remove the brake protection covers. Unscrew the nuts (101) on the connecting cable (110) and remove the
end of the cable (102), from the lever (115) and from the lever (103) (see Pl. 141).
TOOLS
25 Remove the fixing screws from the crossmembers on the sidemembers. Do not mislay them or the adjusting
shims which will be found between the end of the crossmember and the sidemember 14 mm box spanner
26 Put a chain sling in position (chain sling 1697-T, see Pl. 51).
Raise the engine and remove it from the car. Pay particular attention to the pipes remaining on the car.
Do not damage or distort them.
Place the engine-gearbox assembly on a stand (stand 2497-T, see Pl. 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain sling 1697-T
Stand 2497-T
ASSEMBLY (see Pl. 25)
27 Adjust the rear flexible supports (gauging fixture 1698-T, see Pl. 20, 21, 22 and 23) :
1. To adjust the side position of the brackets :-
a) Take the dimension on the engine-gearbox assembly. Place the gauging fixture as shown on Pl. 20,
the point of the pin (A) being engaged in the top fixing hole of the crossmember, undo the screw (B)
and move the sliding rod (c) so as to engage the pin in the hole in tile plate (D) and in the hole in the 12 mm box spanner
suspension arm. Tighten the screw (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauging fixture 1698-T
b) Transfer this to the car (see Pl. 21) move the bracket (45) as required in the slots at "a" so that the
collar of the nut (48) (see Pl. 22) enters the hole on the plate (D). 12 mm box spanner
Tighten the nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauging fixture 1698-T
c) Carry out the same operation for the other side.
2. Adjust the height of the supports (see Pl. 22):-
a) Remove the top fixing screw of the front half axle on the right and left.
b) Place the pin (F) in the bore of the relay spindle.
Screw the pin (G) in place of the screw fixing the front half axle.
c) Fit the hub (H) of the fixture on the pin (F). Move the movable rod (C) until it rests on the pin (G).
Tighten the locking screw (B). Unscrew or screw up the nut (48) so that the shouldered face "c" is
level with the underside of the plate (D) (hole "d" for the right-hand side, hole "e" for the left-hand
side).
3. Adjust the distance between the brackets (see Pl. 23) :-
Offer up the gauge (I) move the left-hand bracket (46) in the slot "f" so that the collar of the nut (48)
enters into the hole of the gauge (I).
28 Pass a sheathed chain sling under the water pump and raise the engine-gearbox assembly (chain 1697-T,
see Pl. 51).
Offer it up on the hull and put it into position.
Pay particular attention to the pipes remaining on the hull and to the accelerator control.
Remove the chain sling.
TOOLS
29 To adjust the front crossmember bracket :
Fit the front crossmember to the hull. Fit the shims found when dismantling between the crossmember and
the sidemembers.
NOTE - The dimension between the left-hand brake disc and the sidemember is greater by 70 ± 2 mm than
the same dimension on the right side. If not, alter the number of shims fitted between the crossmember
and the sidemember. Use the total number of shims found when dismantling:
A shim removed from one side must be fitted on the other side.
Tighten the screws (plain and spring washers).
Fit and tighten the nuts on the rear mounting studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
23 mm spanner
23 mm box spanner
30 Couple up the flexible coupling (bibax) to the driving plates on the gearbox, make sure that the dowels are 12 mm socket with
in position in the dowel holes in tile coupling. Tighten the screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . extension
31 Couple the brake control cable (102) to the lever. Adjust the connecting cable (110). Tension the cable to the
maximum without moving the levers (103) from their stop (104) (see Pl. 141).
32 Put the brake cover plates in position, retain them in position with the clips (105) fitted with the rubber sheath
(see Pl. 142, fig. 2).
Couple up the speedometer cable to the gearbox. Tighten the screw or put the circlip in position . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
33 Couple up the ignition advance and retard control to the plate on the contact breaker.
Tighten the screw clamping the sheath. Place the advance control in the centre position (count the number of
notches).
Put the plate on the contact breaker in mid-course between the two stops.
Tighten the fixing screw of the cable. Move the control and check that the contact breaker can move into the
fully retarded and fully advanced positions (stops in contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 mm spanners
34 Couple up the union plates to the hydraulic gear selector and to the clutch corrector (47) (insert the seal plates).
Tighten the nuts (spring washer). Tighten the union (42) on the distribution block to 6.5 ft/lbs (0.9 m. kg)
(spanner 2219-T to Z221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) ................................... 8 mm ring spanner
100 long maximum
Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
35 Couple the accelerator control to the carburettor.
Couple up and adjust the choke control. Check that it works correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
36 Connect the feed pipe (43) and the outlet pipe (44) from the hydraulic gear selector.
37 Connect the brake pipe to the three-way union (41), (see Pl. 25) (spanner 2219-T or 2222-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) Spanner 2219-T or
2222-T
TOOLS
38 Connect the feed pipe to the petrol pump.
39 Connect the five-pipe assembly to the gearbox. Insert the seal plates. Tighten the screws (spring washers) 8 or 10 mm box spanners
40 Connect the dynamo cables to the terminals on the regulator .................................. 8-10 mm box spanners
41 Fit the cooling ducts for the brake discs.
Make sure they do not touch the discs. If necessary, move the ducts in the slots.
42 Connect the pipe between the regulator and the brake accumulator. Tighten the unions to 4.3 to 5.75 ft/lbs
(0.6 to 0.8 m.kg) (spanner 2219-T or 222l-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
43 Fit the steering (see Pl. 125).
Locate the pinion so as to correspond with the marks made when dismantling (centre punch mark or paint
mark opposite the slot in the tube at "a").
Engage the pinion in the tube. Place the steering assembly in its bearings paying attention to the paint marks
made at "b" when dismantling.
Screw up the fixing screws on the bearing caps.

NOTE - If the steering has been replaced, it is necessary to adjust the position correctly (see Op. DS 440-0).
44 Fit the tube for the cable harness.

Provisionally fix the wire and the earth cable as well as the left-hand plate on the tube for the cable
harness, on the gearbox cover (cars produced before February 1957).
45 Adjust the position of the steering (see Pl. 125).
Fit the fixture 1955-T as shown on the illustration.
Turn the steering in its bearings so as to bring the groove "c" in contact with the centre locator (D) of
the fixture.
Tighten the fixing screws (4) of the bearing caps.
Remove the fixture.
Couple the steering levers to the relay spindles (the nuts engine side).
Tighten the nuts to 18 ft/lbs (2.5 m. kg).
Remove the stop 1993-T. Couple the feed pipe assembly (5) to the steering box. Insert the seal plate,
with the holes for the passage of fluid opposite those in the distributor ..................... Fixture 1955-T
8-12-14-16 mm
box spanners
46 Connect the right and left-hand heater hoses. Tighten the clips.
47 Couple up the exhaust down pipe to the manifold and to the silencer. Fit the clips. Tighten the nuts (spring washers).
Fit the clip fixing the tube to the bracket. Tighten the nuts (plain washers and spring washers) 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-1 : Replacement of an engine-gearbox assembly.. Op. DS 100-1 39
TOOLS
48 Fit the coil and bracket assembly. Connect the leads to the contact breaker, the yellow terminal to the lower
contact breaker (rear terminal) and the red terminal to the top contact breaker (front terminal). Connect
the leads to the sparking plugs 8 mm box spanner
49 Fit the cover plates for the steering
50 Fit the battery brackets. Fit the hydraulic fluid reservoir by means of its clips. Fit the battery tray. Fit the
battery, fix it by means of the tie-rods. Fit the channel for the electric cable harness on the outside tie-rod. 8-10-12 mm box spanners
Connect the cables to t he battery. Connect the cable control for the bonnet lock to the rods on the scuttle 8 mm spanner
51 Pass the feed pipe for the high pressure pump through the rubber grommet in the radiator tie-rod, then in the
rubber collar on the water pipe, and through the rubber grommet on the battery support. Couple the tube
to the outlet pipe on the reservoir. Fit the rubber bush. Fit the clip.
52 Fit the suspension spheres (tighten by hand). Insert the joints.
53 Fill up with water. During this operation, open the heater control vane and undo the bleed screw (46) (see Pl.
125) so as to let the air escape from the engine.
54 Unscrew the screw on the pressure control valve. Fill up the reservoir with hydraulic fluid. Start the engine,
let it run for some minutes. Retighten the bleed screw so as to put the hydraulic system under pressure.
Check all unions for leakage.
With the vane of the heater open, make sure that the pipe (48) is warm (see Pl. 25) 8 mm spanner
55 Adjust the clutch clearance (see Op. DS 314-0).

NOTE - It is sometimes necessary to remake this adjustment after running 30 to 40 miles.
56 Bleed the hydraulic gear selector: operate the auxiliary clutch control lever several times. Make successive
movements with the gear lever through all gears several times so as to bleed the gearbox and clutch
hydraulic system (see Op. DS 334-0).
57 Bleed the brakes (see Op. DS 453-0).
58 Adjust the idling speeds (see Op. DS 142-0).
59 Fit the air deflector panel and the front wings (plain and serrated washers). Couple up the bonnet lock 14 mm spanner
control; adjust the control cable if necessary 14 mm box spanner
60 Fit the air sleeves, fix them by means of the rubber clips.
Fit the crossmember supporting the spare wheel. Fit the spare wheel. Lower the car to the ground
(jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) 12-14 mm box spanners
Jacking bracket 2505-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-2 : Stripping and assembling an engine-gearbox assembly for replacement of the engine 40
TOOLS
STRIPPING AND ASSEMBLING (for replacement of the engine).
Stripping.
1 Place the engine gearbox assembly on the stand Z497-T (see Pl. 19) Stand 2497-T
2 Disengage the high pressure pump feed pipe from its attachment plate on the water tube.
Remove the radiator tie-rod and remove the radiator.
Remove the driving belts from the dynamo and water pump. Remove the dynamo tie-rod.
Remove the dynamo. Remove the rear fixing screw. Unscrew the front screw 8-12-14 box spanners
12-14 mm spanners
3 Disconnect the high pressure pump tie-rod from the water pump 12mm box spanner
4 Remove the starter motor cable 14mm box spanner
5 Disconnect the feed pipe from the clutch cylinder (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4).
Disconnect the gearbox from the engine (spanners 1677-T, see P1. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T, see Pl.
72, fig. 1). Pass the spanner through the holes of the driving pulley.
Leave the gearbox on the truck Spanners 1677-T, 2431-T,
2219-T or 2221-T.
IMPORTANT NOTE - Do not roll the gearbox on the brake discs Rubber protectors
6 To strip the engine :
a) Drain the engine (oil) 21 mm box spanner
b) Remove the air cleaner and tube assembly 12-17 mm box spanners
c) Remove the carburettor (spanner 1623-T, see P1. 16, fig. 2) Spanner 1623-T
d) Remove the petrol pump 14 mm spanner or
spanner 1621-T
e) Remove the water and heater pipe assembly, right side 8 mm box spanner
f) Remove the inlet manifold. Remove the oil dipstick to allow the removal of the manifold 12mm box spanner
g) Remove the contact breaker, its plate and return spring 12mm ring spanner
h) Remove the crankcase breather 12 mm box spanner
1) Remove the plates fixing the exhaust manifold shield 12mm box spanner
j) Remove the starter motor 17mm spanner
14mm box spanner
k) Remove the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see P1. 16, fig. 7) Spanner 1603-T
l) Remove the fan 12mm spanner
m) Remove the low pressure pump feed pipe (spanner 2220-T, see P1. 72, fig. 4) Spanner 2220-T or
14 mm spanner
n) Remove the gearbox dowel pins from the engine crankcase.
TOOLS
Assembly.
7 To fit the contact breaker.

Put the metal fixing plate on the flat lever.
Position the driving dog of the contact breaker so that it corresponds to the oil pump driveshaft. Fit the
contact breaker. Tighten the metal fixing plate screw (spring washer under the head) .............. 12 mm ring spanner
8 Fit the oil dipstick tube. Fit the contact breaker earth wire terminal under the fixing plate of the tube.
Tighten the screw (plain and spring washers). Fit the dipstick ................................. 12 mm box spanner
9 Fit the inlet manifold, insert the gaskets, progressively tighten the nuts (without washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
10 To fit the carburettor.

Assemble in the following order : a gasket, steel distance piece, a gasket, the carburettor (the float chamber
towards the front).
Tighten the nuts (serrated washers) (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1623-T
11 To fit the crankcase breather.

Remove the element, wash with petrol, blow with compressed air, soak in engine oil and refit. Moderately
tighten the nut (plain washer).
Fit the breather on the engine. Insert a paper joint. Tighten the screw (spring washer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 mm box spanners
NOTE - On earlier cars the filter element is omitted.
12 Fit the air cleaner and tube assembly. Tighten the nut on the cylinder head cover (serrated washer).
Tighten the nuts on the water pump cover (serrated washer). Tighten the clip on the carburettor 12-17 mm box spanners
13 Fit the petrol pump. Insert a cork joint. Tighten the nuts (serrated washers). Fit the petrol feed pipe from the
pump to the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 To connect the gearbox.

Fit the dowel pins together with their circlips in their housings on the engine crankcase.
Engage the gearbox resting on its truck, by turning the mainshaft by means of the starting handle relay,
also turn the driving pulley in order to engage the splines.
Tighten the fixing screws (spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig.1 for hexagon headed screws and spanner Spanner 2431-T
1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 for screws with two flats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1677-T
15 Fit the starter motor. Fit the fixing screws, tighten moderately.
Tighten the locknuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
17 mm spanner
TOOLS
16 Fit the fixing plates for the exhaust manifold shield, the smaller at the rear. Tighten the nuts (spring washer) 12 mm box spanner
17 Fit the low pressure pump feed pipe, (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2220-T
18 Align the water pump pulley (see Op. DS 231-0).
Fit the pulley, tighten the nut to 18 to 22 ft/lbs (2.5 to 3 m. kg), insert a plain washer and a lockwasher.
Turn over the lockwasher .............................................................. 16 mm box spanner
19 Fit the fan. Tighten the screws to 6.5 ft/lbs (0.9 m. kg).
IMPORTANT - Do not exceed this tightening torsion ....................................... 12 mm box spanner
20 Tension the water pump and dynamo belts (see Op. DS 231-0). Tighten the screw fixing the tie-rod on the
water pump (spring washer and the nut, on the high pressure pump (plain and spring washers) ..... 12 mm box spanner
STRIPPING AND ASSEMBLING (for replacement of the gearbox).

Stripping.
21 Remove the bracket for the expansion chamber. Do not mislay the distance piece for the left-hand14 mm
box spanner fixing plate
22 Disconnect the flexible pipes from the water pump cover and the steel tube. Remove the tie-rod from the
radiator and remove the radiator. ................................................... 8-12-14 mm box spanners
23 Remove the dynamo tie-rod and remove the dynamo ...................................... 12-14 mm spanners
12-14 mm box spanners
24 Remove the screw from the plate fixing the pump - regulator connecting pipe on the gearbox and
disconnect the pipe from the pressure control valve (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4, or 14 mm spanner).
Remove the pressure control valve and its bracket from the crossmember ..................... Spanner 2220-T
14 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
25 Remove the lower nuts from the tie- rods supporting the brake units.
Remove the fixing screws from the crossmember on the support arms of the box (knock down the 21 mm box spanner
lockwashers) and disengage the crossmember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
26 To remove the brake unit.
a) Remove the adjusting nuts disengage the stops of the sheath and remove the connecting cable from the
right-hand side ........................................................ 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
b) Remove the fixing screws of the rear supports of the brake unit ...................... 14-19 mm box spanners
TOOLS
c) Disconnect the feed pipes from the brake units and disconnect the accelerated idling pipe from the Spanner 2219-T or
left-hand brake unit (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) ....................... 2221-T
d) Remove the brake unit. If necessary, remove the protection cover and remove one brake shoe
(lever 2127-T and fork 2128-T, see Pl. 143, fig. 1) .................................... Lever 2127-T
Fork 2128-T
27 To remove the high pressure pump :
a)Disconnect the high pressure pump tie-rod .......................................... 12 mm box spanner
b) Remove the high pressure pump fixing spindle nut and remove the pipe assembly connecting the
pump to the pressure regulator. Remove the high pressure pump fixing spindle. Remove the pump
(cars produced before October 1958) (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) ................. Spanner 2280-T
c) Remove the fixing spindle of the high pressure pump (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) and remove
the high pressure pump and the pipe connecting the pump to the pressure regulator (cars produced
after October 1958) ............................................................ Spanner 2280-T
28 Remove the driving pulley fixing screw. Remove the pulley, the key and the adjusting washers. Disengage
the driving belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
29 Unlock the locknut and loosen the fixing screw from the bendix housing ........................ 12 mm box spanner
30 Remove the clutch cylinder feed pipe (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Disconnect the control rod from the clutch fork and remove the clutch cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2221-T
12 mm box spanner
31 Remove the clutch bellhousing fixing screws (spanners 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T,
see Pl. 72, fig. 1) and disconnect the gearbox from the engine. Let it rest on the truck of the stand during Spanner 1677-T and
this operation (stand 2497-T, see Pl. 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2431-T
Assembly.
32 Fit the driving pulley and put the belts in position. Align the pulley (see Op. DS 231-0) ............ 14 mm box spanner
-33 To connect the gearbox to the engine :

a) Make sure that the dowel pins (together with their circlips) are in position in the crankcase.
b) Engage the gearbox (resting on its truck) by turning the mainshaft by the starting handle relay,
turning at the same time the driving pulley in order to engage the splines.
c) Tighten the clutch bellhousing fixing screws (spanner 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T, Spanner 1677-T and
see Pl. 72, fig. 1) .............................................................. Spanner 2431-T
TOOLS
34 Fit the clutch cylinder, connect the control rod to the fork and fit the belts on the high pressure pump. Fit the
feed pipe and connect to the clutch cylinder (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Spanner 2221-T
35 To fit the high pressure pump :

a) Offer up the high pressure pump assembly together with the connecting pipe between the pump and
pressure regulator. Fit the fixing spindle and fit the nut (cars produced after October 1958)
(spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2280-T
a) Offer up the high pressure pump assembly together with the connecting pipe between the pump and b)
Offer up the pump and fixing spindle assembly together with the connecting pipe between the pump and
pressure regulator fitted with new ring seals (cars produced before October 1958).
Fit the spindle fixing nut.
c) Fit the screw of the plate securing the connecting pipe on the gearbox.
d) Connect the high pressure pump tie-rod, fit the nut without tightening (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
e) Put the driving belts in position.
36 To fit the brake unit (see P1. 141 and 142):

a) Offer up the brake units fitted with their rear brackets. Tighten the fixing screws of the brackets and
fit an iron locking wire between the two upper screws in order to avoid unscrewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 mm box spanners
b) Connect the feed pipes to the brake units and connect the accelerated idling pipe to the left-hand brake
(spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Spanner 2221-T
c) Fit the connecting cable, pull the centre part towards the rear, in order to fit the sheath end pieces.
Connect the cable to the brake levers and fit the adjusting nuts.
37 To fit the dynamo :

a) Offer up the dynamo and fit the fixing screws (plain and spring washers). Put the belts in position .... 14 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
b) Fit the dynamo tie-rod. Fit the fixing nuts, without locking (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
c) Adjust the dynamo and high pressure pump belts (see Op. DS 231-0).
NOTE - The crossmember, the pressure regulator, the radiator and the expansion chamber bracket should
be fitted after the gearbox has been fitted on the car.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-3 : Overhauling an engine. Op. DS 100-3 45
PARTICULAR POINTS
Dismantling.
11 When removing the assembly of the crankshaft, connecting rods and pistons, make sure that the order and direction of assembly of the
central bearing is marked. If the crankshaft and bearings are to be re-used make a reference mark so that they are not reversed on
assembly.
16 Do not remove the connecting rod small end bushes.
17 The cylinder head, being made of aluminium, one cannot remove the sparking plug tubes or valve seats without the use of special tools. It is
possible to replace the valve guides (see Op. DS 112-3).
If a thread is damaged it is possible to replace it by a "Heli-coil" thread (see note MR-4279).
Assembly.
23 Characteristics of the valve springs.
Outer springs. L = 37 mm under load of 24.200 ± 1.350 kg and L = 28.5 mm under load of 52 ± 2.800 kg.
Inner springs. L = 24.5 mm under load of 5.250 ± 0.300 kg and L = 16 mm under load of 11 ± 0.600 kg.
Do not fit the rubber seal on the exhaust valves.
24 Check the oil pump on a test bench.
With S.A.E. 20 engine oil at 60˚ C. and the pump outlet through a jet of 2.8 mm dia. the pressure should be at 1000 r.p.m. equal to 50 p.s.i.
(3.5 kg/cm2).
25 To fit a starter gear ring on the flywheel.
Heat the bore of the starter gear ring to a temperature of 200 to 250˚ C (straw colour). Do not exceed this temperature.
26 If the clutch bearing face "a" has been ground, remove the same amount from the bearing face "b" of the clutch casing (see Pl. 42). The
distance between the bearing face of the crankshaft and the face of the Ferodo disc should not be less than 15.4 mm.
27 To prepare the parts for the crankshaft.
The tightening torsion of the bearing cap screws is 58 ft./lb. (8 m.kg), admissible clearance = 0.06 mm max. between the crankshaft and
bearings.
The tightening torsion of the connecting rod screws is 36 ft./lb. (5 m.kg), admissible clearance = 0.06 mm max. between the crankshaft and
the connecting rods.
Note the reference marks made when dismantling the bearings and caps.
29 To fit the pistons: heat the piston to 60°C (oil bath) in order to fit the gudgeon pins, note the order of assembly, do not interchange the pins.
30 The tightening torsion of the connecting rod screws is 36 ft/lb (5 m.kg). This tightening torsion must be strictly adhered to.
31 Tighten the fixing screws of the camshaft rear thrust plate to 7.5 ft/lb (1 m.kg) (lockwashers).
33 Fitting the cylinder barrels: adjust their height with one paper joint only.
Cylinder head gasket: smear with boiled linseed oil, the crimping towards the barrels; the new type gasket should be fitted dry, the varnished
side towards the cylinder head.
34 Fitting the cylinder head: First tightening 21.75 ft/lb (3 m.kg), second tightening 43.5 ft/lb (6 m.kg). Observe the tightening torsion and order
of tightening the screws indicated on Pl.7.
Check the bores of the cylinder barrels: deformation or ovality = 0.03 mm max., except for 20 mm at the bottom of the cylinder barrel: 0.05
mm max.
35 Oil seals: Insert a shim steel strip (L = 200, 1 = 10, thickness 0.1 mm) around the oil thrower and tighten the fixing screws of the half-shells.
Remove the bearing cap and remove the shim. Refit the new assembly.
Tighten the bearing cap fixing screws to 72 ft/lb (10 m.kg).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-3 : Overhauling an engine Op. DS 100-3 46
36 Crankshaft endfloat = 0.03 to 0.09 mm adjusted by means of a shim placed between the end cheek of the bearing and the washer on the
timing pinion.
37 Fitting the timing gear: align the reference marks (punch marks); a line passing through the centre-line of the pinions.
Tightening torsion of the nuts: camshaft nut = 110 ft/lb (15 m.kg), crankshaft nut = 145 ft /lb (20 m.kg).
38 Fitting the oil pump (tightening torsions):
Fixing screws = 11 ft/lb (1.5 m.kg) max. and locknut 22 ft lb (3 m.kg). Pipe unions = 43 ft/lb (6 m.kg) and locknuts = 29 ft/lb (4 m.kg).
39 Fitting the timing cover: liquid Hermetic or Festinol on the face of the bearing cap receiving the timing cover gasket.
Brass washer under the head or Hermetic (new screws with circular base), for the three screws projecting on the inside of the cover.
Tighten the screws to 11 ft/lb (1.5 m.kg).
40 Engine flywheel: tighten the screws to 36 ft/lb (5 m.kg) (lockwasher).
41 Clutch: tighten the screws to 14 ft/lb (2 m.kg) (spring washer).
43 Adjustment of the valves: clearance = .008 in (0.20 mm) inlet and .010 in (0.25 mm) exhaust.
Adjust the valves of a cylinder with the piston at T.D.C. (end of compression stroke), the valves of an opposite cylinder are then at the
point of balance: 1st cylinder, the valves of the 4th cylinder being at the point of balance, 3rd cylinder, the valves of the 2nd cylinder
being at the point of balance, 4th cylinder, the valves of the 1st cylinder being at the point of balance, 2nd cylinder, the valves of the 3rd
cylinder being at the point of balance.
TOOLS
DISMANTLING (see Pl. 1).
1 Place the engine on a suitable stand or on a work bench.
2 Remove the cylinder head lubrication pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
3 Remove the side engine mounting arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 mm box spanners
4 Remove the clutch and engine flywheel. Disengage the bearings from the flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
5 Remove the cylinder head cover. Remove the steel cup (3) and the rubber seals (4) from the sparking plug 12 mm box spanner
tubes .
6 To remove the cylinder head :
a) Unscrew the inlet rocker assembly fixing screws (5) without removing them from the brackets (6).
Remove the assembly with the screws in place in order to keep the parts in their correct position . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
b) Remove the exhaust rocker assemblies and brackets. Remove the rocker push-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
c) Remove the cylinder head fixing screws, right-hand side.
Remove the cylinder head, cylinder head gasket and locating dowels .......................... 14 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-3 : Overhauling an engine 47
TOOLS
7 To remove the tappets:
Hold the cylinder barrels in position by means of two washers inserted between the barrels 1-2 and 3-4 and Washers:
secure by screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal dia. = 10.5
External dia. = 46
Turn the engine over and rest it on the face for the cylinder head.
8 Remove the sump and the timing gear cover .................................................... 12 mm box spanner
9 Remove the oil pump ..................................................................... 14-16-17-26mm spanners
10 To remove the timing chain and timing pinions (spanners 1667-T and 1731-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 1 and 3).
When unscrewing the nuts, wedge the pinions with the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15, fig. 2, if not available
insert a wooden wedge between one of the crank pins and the crankcase. Spanner 1731-T
Disengage the keys, the steel washer (12) the bearing thrust ring (9) and the adjusting shims (10) . . . . . . . . Setting gauge 160-T
Spanner 1667-T
11 To remove the crankshaft, connecting rod and piston assembly (see Pl. 14) :
a) Remove the assembly screws (11) from the crankshaft oil seals (13) and (14).
b) Remove the fixing screws from the bearing caps. Remove the bearing caps (make sure that the direction of
assembly is clearly marked).
NOTE – If the crankshaft and bearings are to be re-used, make a reference mark on the centre and rear half
bearing, which are of the same dimensions, so that they are not reversed on assembling.
c) Remove the crankshaft, connecting rod and piston assembly.
Remove the crankshaft bearing thrust ring (8) (see Pl. 1).
12 Remove the upper section of the crankshaft oil seal (13) .......................................... 12 mm box spanner
13 To remove the camshaft (see Pl. 1)
Remove the thrust plate (15) and disengage the shaft from the crankcase ............................ 12 mm box spanner
14 To strip the cylinder block (see Pl. 1)
a) Remove the timing chain lubricator, oil circulation plugs and water drain plug ................. 5-12mm spanners
1-23mm box spanners
b) Remove the cylinder barrels.
c) Remove the conical oil circulation unions from the cylinder block.
15 To strip the crankshaft :
Remove the connecting rod caps and the connecting rods (make sure that the arts are marked). (Socket 1624-T,
see Pl. 16, fig. 3). Mark the bearings if they are to be re-used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket 1624-T
TOOLS
16 To remove the pistons from the connecting rods :
a) Remove the gudgeon pin circlips from the groove in the piston.
b) Heat the pistons to a temperature of 60°C. approximately by immersion in an oil bath or by heating in an oven.
c) Remove the gudgeon pins. Do not mix them up since they are paired with their respective pistons.
NOTE – It is advisable to remove the small end bushes.
The machining and tolerances are of such high precision that this delicate work cannot be carried out with
normal tools.
17 To strip the cylinder head (See Pl. 3):
Remove the valves (spring compressor 1614-T and support 1616-T, see Pl. 5) ......................... Spring compressor
Remove the rear closing plate. 1614-T
Support 1616-T
NOTE – As the cylinder head is made of aluminium, the sparking plug tubes and valve seats cannot be repaired 12 mm box spanner
without the use of special tools.
Nevertheless, in certain cases, the valve guides can be replaced (see Op. DS-112-3, paragraphs 2 to 4).
Do not remove the studs.
18 To strip the oil pump (see Pl. 3)
a) Remove the delivery pipe and remove the conical union. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–26 mm spanners
b) Remove the filters (17) .................................................................. 12 mm box spanner
c) Remove the pump base (18) and the idler pinion (19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
d) Withdraw the driving pinion (20) (extractor 1964-T, see Pl. 10 fig. 4) Extractor 1964-T
Do not use the socket; insert a cylindrical pressure pad 12 mm dia. 40 mm long between the extractor screw
and the pump shaft.
Remove the assembly of the shaft (21) and the pinion (22) from the pump body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure pad12mm
dia, 40mm long
e) Move the fixed pinion (22) on the shaft, release the retaining cotters (23), take off the pinion and its key
from the shaft.
f) Remove the positioning screw from the tube support and remove the tube (24) ...................... 14 mm spanner
g) Drive out the spindle (25) from the idler pinion. 14 mm box spanner
h) Remove the bush (26), the spring (27) and the piston (28) from the non-return valve ................. 12 mm box spanner
i) Remove the bush (29) from the support tube (24) with the aid of a mandrel ......................... Mandrel = 15 dia.
x 250 long
19 Remove the water and low pressure pump (see Op. DS 231-3).
20 Strip the inlet rockershaft assembly.
21 Clean the parts. Do not wash the crankshaft bearing in order to avoid removing the grease. TOOLS
The bearing should be packed with new grease.
22 With a spray gun paint the inside of the crankcase. Use a paint resisting the action of hot oil (paint such as
AC.8, sold by CLEMENT and RIVIERE or MOUQUET).
ASSEMBLY (see Pl. 1)

23 To prepare the cylinder head (see Pl. 4)
a) Grinding the cylinder head:-
A deviation of 0.05 mm in the truth of the surface is admissible.
A slight grinding on the surface is possible. The original thickness of the cylinder head must not be reduced
by more than .3 mm.
If it is suspected that the cylinder head has been ground, check the dimension “c” (see fig. 6).
This dimension should be “c” = 26.5 +0.1/-0.2 mm.
b) Grinding the valves (Black and Decker type valve grinder).
NOTE – The angle of the exhaust valve face is 90˚.
The angle of the inlet valve face is 120˚.
There should be a radius of approximately 0.5 mm on the corners of the valve heads (at “a” and “b”. see fig. 3).
c) Grinding the valve seats.
NOTE – the width “l” of the seat must be between 0.9 and 1.5 mm. Use the following grinding wheels to
obtain these dimensions:-
Inlet valve seat:
For the seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120˚ biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662-T
For the top clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150˚ biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630-T
For the lower clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90˚ biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630-T
Exhaust valve seat
For the seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90˚ biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627-T
For the top clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150˚ biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627-T
For the lower clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 60˚ wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633-T
The large diameter of the seating must be equal to the largest diameter of the valve (see fig. 1 and 2) . . . . . . Grinding wheels
16 62-T, 1630-T,
1627-T and 1633-T
d) Grind the valves (suction tool 1615-T, see fig.4) driven by an electric, pneumatic or hand operated grinder Suction valve
grinder 1615-T
TOOLS
e) Clean the cylinder head with great care so as to eliminate all traces of emery in the valve chambers or gas
passages
This operation should always be carried out with very great care. The powdered emery (even in very small
quantities), entering the engine, will cause rapid wear.
f) Calibrating the springs.
(Spring calibration fixture 2420-T, see Pl. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring calibration
fixture 2420-
SPRING CHARACTERISTICS
Outer spring Inner spring
Length in mm Load in Kg Length in mm Load in Kg
37 24.2 ± 1.350 24.5 5.250 ± 0.300

28.5 52 ± 2.800 16 11 ± 0.600
g) Fit the valves. Oil the valve stems and the faces. Put the valves in position. Fit the sealing ring (3) on the
inlet valve stems only (see Pl. 3, fig. 2).
For each valve fit (see fig. 3):
One thrust washer (31) for the outer spring.
One shouldered thrust washer (32) for the inner spring.
Fit the valve springs. Make sure that the split cotters retaining the cups are properly seated (spring compressor
1614-T and support 1616-T, see Pl. 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
Fit the exhaust valve springs; fit the spring thrust cap, the split cotter locating cup and the split cotters . . . . . 1614-T
Support 1616-T
NOTE – It is not necessary to fit a sealing ring on the exhaust valves.
h) Remove the filter on the cylinder head cover. Wash the filter element in petrol, blow dry with compressed air,
then dip into engine oil.
Replace the filter.
24 To prepare the oil pump (see Pl. 10)

a) Fit the bush (29) into the support tube (24) using a press.
b) Fit the idler pinion spindle (25) using a press, fit the idler pinion (19) making sure that it turns freely. Place
the fixed pinion (22) in the body of the pump and with a set of feelers and a straight edge resting on the base
of the pump, measure the pinion clearance. This clearance must not exceed 0.05mm.
Remove the pinions.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 100-3 : Overhauling an engine. 51
TOOLS
c) Fit the support tube (24). Fit the fixed pinion (22) on the shaft (key and split cotters (23) in position). Insert the
shaft (21) in the body of the pump. Fit the support tube locking screw.
Tighten the nut to 18 ft/lbs (2.5 m.kg) and fit a split pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
d) Grease the entry side of the bore of the driving pinion and fit on the shaft, with a press.
During this operation the shaft should be supported on a cylindrical block. The pinion should not take any strain.
When the pinion (20) is on the spindle, an end float of between 0.03 and 0.1 mm must be left. If the pinion is
pressed down too far, hold the pinion in the hand and with the aid of a copper drift and a hammer tap on the Block = 12 dia. x
end of the shaft until the pinion is in the correct position. 10 long.
e) Fit the idler pinion (19), the paper gasket and pump base (18), (with the filter support on the outlet pipe side).
Tighten the screws t 9.4 ft/lbs (1.3 m.kg) (spring washers under the head), lock the milled head screw by 12 mm spanner
tapping the metal of the pump base into the slot of the screw . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
f) Fit the piston (28), the spring (27) and the spring retaining flange (26). Tighten the screws (lockwashers under
the heads). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
g) On the intake opening fit : one cork seal, the top cover, the upper filter plate, a filter (large diameter hole),
the distance piece, a second filter and the lower plate.
Tighten the screws to 9.4 ft/lbs (1.3 m.kg). Tighten the locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
h) Check the pressure on a test bench.
With SAE 20 oil heated to 60 ± 5˚C and the pump outlet through a 2.8mm diameter jet, the pressure must be
50 p.s.i. (3.5 kg/cm2) at 1000 r.p.m. If this pressure is not obtained, change the spring (27) (see Pl. 10)
NOTE – If a test bench is not available, use the simplified unit MR-1811 (see Pl. 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test bench or
unit MR-1811
25 To replace a starter gear ring :
a) Detach the starter gear ring from the flywheel, driving it off with a hammer.
b) To fit the starter gear ring on the flywheel.
Heat the starter ring with a blow torch fitted with a jet of 800 to 1000 litres.
Heat only the bore, at the same time rotating the ring continuously to ensure the uniform expansion. Cease
heating when the ring reaches a temperature of 200˚ to 250˚ (pale yellow colour) . Above this temperature the
heat treatment of the ring will be modified. Make sure that the flywheel is perfectly clean, offer up the starter
ring perfectly level and fit it rapidly.
26 Grinding the bearing face of the clutch disc on the flywheel (see Pl. 42):
Every time that the bearing of the flywheel is ground at “a”, remove the same amount from the bearing face “b”
of the clutch casing. Carry out these two operations without removing the flywheel from the lathe, so that both
faces reworked are parallel.
The grinding should never exceed 0.3 and 0.5 mm. The distance between the bearing face of the crankshaft and
the face of the Ferodo disc should not be less than 15.4 mm.
TOOLS
27 To prepare the parts for the crankshaft (see Pl. 13)
In general proceed by renewing the parts.
Nevertheless some repairs are possible.
a) Crankcase :
If the bearing caps have been filed by unskilled repairers, it is not possible to fit the standard crankshaft –
connecting rod assemblies. It will be necessary to renew the cylinder block, or failing this, the cylinder
block bearings must be rebored. To do this :
On a surface plate, check that the bearing faces of the caps are in alignment. If necessary, retouch them with
a file or better still, on a milling machine. Place the bearing caps (without the bearings) on the cylinder block
and tighten the screws to 58 ft/lbs (8 m.kg) (spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
Using a dial gauge (dial gauge 2440-T) measure the diameter “a” (see fig. 2).
Make sure that the dimension “a” measured at one of the extremities of the bearings is the same as dimension
“b” measured at the other extremity. If this is not the case, the bearing faces of the cap are not parallel to the
centre line of the crankshaft, it is necessary to correct them with a file or better still a milling machine.
The difference between the two dimensions “a” and “b” should not exceed 0.01 mm.
Continue again by taking the diameter “a”.
The difference between this diameter “a” and the original dimension (58.01 + 0.025 mm) represents the
0
thickness “e” of the shims to be placed between the cap and the cylinder block (see fig. 2) :
0.025
"e"= 58.01+ 0 − a.
The shims must be machined with the greatest care. Their faces must be parallel within 0.01 mm.
Again fit the caps without the bearings, but this time fitting the shims, tighten the screws to 58 ft/lbs (8 m.kg)
and measure the dimension “a”. It must be (58.01 + 0.025 mm); if not, correct the shims.
0
We strongly advise this method which, while taking longer, allows the use of the standard crankshaft
– connecting rod assemblies, sold by our Spare Parts Department, without any reworking. We definitely
Prohibit the taking up of the clearance of these assemblies. The clearance is measured with very great Dial gauge 2440-T
precision at the works and cannot be modified without risk of damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
b) Crankshaft :
If necessary a better finish of the bearings can be obtained by lapping them slightly, provided that the
following maximum clearances are adhered to :
on the crankshaft bearing : 0.06 ..
On the connecting rods : 0.06
With a micrometer, measure the diameter of the bearings; they should be :
On the crankshaft main bearings : 54 - 0 mm or 53.5 - 0 mm.
-0.015 - 0.015
On the bearing for the connecting rod : 48.01 -0.01. mm.
-0.02
TOOLS
c) Connecting rods :
1. The connecting rod bearings can be changed.
2. On engines produced before June 1957, it is necessary to replace the four connecting rods at the same time
(thickness in the centre of the body 19 mm).
3. On engines produced after June 1957, the connecting rods are interchangeable, it is possible to replace only
one connect rod (thickness in the centre of the body 22 mm).
28 To clean the crankshaft :
NOTE – In all circumstances, the crankshaft must be cleaned as indicated below :
a) Remove the crank pin oilway plugs (spanner MR-3462-20 or MR-3462-70, see Pl. 16 fig. 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . Spanner MR-3462-20
or MR-3462-70
b) Thoroughly clean the crank pin bores and the oilways in the journals. Make sure that the connecting rod
lubricating holes in the crank pins are clean. Finally clean with petrol.
c) Fit the plugs, tightening them to 29 ft/lbs (4 m.kg). This tightening torsion is absolutely essential to prevent
the plugs unscrewing when the engine is running.
29 To fit the pistons on the connecting rods :
NOTE – 1. Certain pistons are marked at the top with an arrow and the word “FRONT”.
2. The assembly face of the cap of the connecting rod and of the body is oblique. This direction of assembly
must be observed (see Pl. 2).
3. To allow for the taper of the bores in the piston and of the gudgeon pins, the direction of fitting must be
observed.
The largest bore is marked with a grease pencil on the boss and the smallest diameter of the gudgeon pin
is marked with a grease pencil on the end.
a) Fit a circlip for the gudgeon pin in the side of the boss, not marked with a grease pencil.
b) Bring the pistons to a temperature of 60°C approximately, either in an oil bath or by heating in an oven, so
that the gudgeon pins (first coated with oil) can be inserted by hand (do not interchange the gudgeon pins; they
are weighed and paired with their respective pistons).
c) Fit the other circlip. Make sure that the circlips are seating properly in the groove.
30 To fit the bearings in the flywheel bore :
The circlip being in position in the flywheel, insert the bearing in its housing (use a tube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube :
Internal dia. = 35
External dia. = 41.5
TOOLS
31 To fit the connecting rods on the crankshaft :
Oil the bearing faces with an oil-can (SAE 20 engine oil), do not use a brush as this is liable to cause the
introduction of dirt of brush hairs.
Fit the half bearings in the rod and in the cap. Make sure that the lugs engage in the grooves. If the old bearings
are to be used, make sure that they are fitted in accordance with the reference marks made when dismantling.
Fit the rods on the crankshaft (see Pl. 2, for position). Do not reverse the position of the cap on the rod. Tighten
the screws to 36 ft/lbs (5 m.kg) (socket 1624-T, see Pl. 16 fig. 3). This tightening torsion must be observed . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
Socket 1624-T
NOTE – The bearings are narrower than the cap and the big end of the connecting rod. The cap is also narrower
than the big end of the connecting rod.
32 To fit the camshaft :

a) Fit the camshaft after first oiling its bearings.
Tighten the screws of the thrust plate to 7.5 ft/lbs (1 m.kg) and turn over the lockwashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
b) Fit the oiled tappets in the bores.
33 To fit the cylinder barrels (see Pl. 12) :

NOTE – The precision machining of the cylinder barrels allows them to be assembled in the cylinder block without
the adjustment of the heights, there is therefore, only one type of paper joint (blue marking).
a) Make sure that the base of the cylinder barrels and the bearing face in the cylinder block are perfectly clean;
offer up the cylinder barrels to the cylinder block and make sure they seat squarely.
b) Offer up a joint on the cylinder barrel, the straight edge on the joint parallel to the flat on the cylinder barrel,
the reinforcement towards the cylinder barrel.
By hand, work the joint on to the cylinder barrel until it is as far as the first shoulder on the barrel at “a”.
Then complete the fitting by using the punched plate MR-4134 (see Pl. 12 fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punched plate MR-4134
c) Fit the cylinder barrels in the bores of the cylinder block. Make sure they are correctly in position.
34 To fit the cylinder head (see Pl. 3) :

a) Put the dowels for the cylinder head in position in the cylinder block, the chamfer towards the cylinder head.
b) Fit the cylinder head gasket smeared with boiled linseed oil, the crimping towards the cylinder barrels. Fit
the cylinder head, making sure that no foreign matter is trapped between the cylinder head and the cylinder
head gasket during this operation.
c) Put the rocker push-rods in position (the exhaust valve rods are longer).
TOOLS
d) To prepare the inlet rocker assembly:
1. Dismantle the assembly.
2. Drive out the plugs from the rockershaft by means of a pin punch, passing through the holes for the fixing
screws. Carefully clean the inside of the shaft with a metal pin making sure that the oil hole in the inlet
shafts and the exhaust shafts, as well as those in the rockers and rockershaft brackets are clear.
3. Fit the plugs, tin solder them on assembly.
4. Fit on the inlet rockershaft (previously oiled, the oil holes located towards the bottom and towards the valve)
commencing by the front:
1 long screw (5) fitted with a bearing cap (33) for fixing the spindle,
1 washer,
1 spring,
1 left-hand rocker (34),
1 washer,
1 long screw fitted with a bearing cap,
1 washer,
1 right-hand rocker (35),
1 spring,
1 washer,
1 washer,
1 spring,
1 left-hand rocker (34),
1 washer,
1 washer,
1 right-hand rocker (35),
1 spring,
1 washer,
1 long screw fitted with a bearing cap.
e) Fit the rocker assembly supports (6) (inlet and exhaust) in position. Offer up the inlet rockershaft. Insert the
cylinder head fixing screws.
During this operation, make sure that the rocker push-rods are properly located in the sockets of the adjusting
screws.
f) Put the exhaust rockers in position (see Pl. 3):
1st and 3rd cylinders : Fit on the shaft (oil holes facing downwards) commencing at the front : 1 spring (37),
the rocker (36), 1 washer (29).
2nd and 4th cylinders : Fit on the shaft (oil holes facing downwards) commencing at the front : 1 washer (29),
the rocker (38), 1 spring (37).
Fit these assemblies according to their preparation. Put the caps (7) on the studs. Tighten the nuts ......... 12 mm box spanner
NOTE – On cars produced before April, 1956, the exhaust rockershafts are shouldered. On these cars the side
clearance should be 0.3 maximum, the adjustment being carried out by means of washers. If the shouldered
rockershafts require replacing, fit the new type rockershaft (smooth).
TOOLS
h) Fit the short cylinder head fixing screws. Screw up without tightening.
i) Tighten the screws in the order indicated (see Pl. 7), first tightening 21.75 ft/lbs (3 m.kg), second tightening
43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg). These tightening torsions are very important, (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2) . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
Observe the order indicated. Do not exceed the tightening torsion of 43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm socket.
NOTE – After having travelled 300 miles (500 km), then 1,250 miles (2,000 km), it is necessary to retighten the
cylinder head. Loosen the screws, then proceed as indented line “i”. One should drain the radiator.
j) Turn the engine over (stand MR-3505-170, see Pl. 18, fig. 1).
Check the barrel bores for deformation (dial gauge 2440-T for checking bores): the distortion or ovality must
not exceed 0.03 mm except in the part 20 mm from the bottom where 0.05 mm is admissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand MR-3053-170
Dial gauge 2440-T
35 To fit the crankshaft and pistons into the cylinder block (see Pl. 13 and 14) :
a) Cut from shim steel 0,10 mm thick, a shim 200 mm long and 10 mm wide.
b) Fit the top half bearing (13) on the cylinder block and the lower half bearing (14) on the bearing cap (smear the
faces of the shells with Festinol).
Insert the fixing screws (40) without tightening (no washers under the head of the screws).
c) Fit the main bearings, making sure that the bores in the cylinder block are clean, oil with an oil-can.
d) Oil the pistons. Place the gap of the 1st and 3rd ring at 180° in relation to the gaps in the 2nd and 4th rings.
Fit the ring clips on the pistons (ring clip 1656-T, see Pl. 13, fig. 1).
Fit the bearing thrust ring (8) (see Pl. 1) on the crankshaft, with the chamfer towards the ground face of the
crankshaft, the slot for retaining the washer towards the bearing cap.
Fit the crankshaft by guiding the pistons so as to avoid pinching or breaking the rings. Also ease the bearing
thrust ring into position. Remove the piston ring clip.
e) Insert the shim steel strip (prepared as shown in paragraph “a”) around the oil thrower on the crankshaft as
shown on Pl. 14, fig. 1. Fit the crankshaft on its bearings.
f) Fit the bearing cap. Tighten the two assembly screws (11) of the half shells. Tighten the bearing cap screws
to 72 lb/ft (10 m.kg) (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
Torsion spanner 2471-T
17 mm socket spanner
NOTE – Do not turn the crankshaft during the centring of the half shells.
g) Tighten the shell fixing screws (40) alternately up to 9.5 ft/lbs (1.3 m,kg).
h) Remove the assembly screws (11) from the half shells. Remove the bearing cap. Lift the crankshaft in order
to remove the shim steel strip.
TOOLS
i) Smear the assembly faces of the two half shells with Festinol around the fixing screw holes.
Offer up the bearing caps together with their bearings. Put the sump gaskets in position, the end under the front
and rear bearing caps. Smear these areas with Festinaol. Tighten the bearing screws to 72 ft/lbs (10 m.kg) (torsion
spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
There are no lockwashers under the heads of the screws.
Tighten the assembly screws (11) .............................................................. Torsion spanner 2471-T
IMPORTANT NOTE – Do not turn the crankshaft after it has been fitted. Actually, the valves are not under control,
and if one of them is raised, the piston of the corresponding cylinder cannot pass top dead centre without fouling it.
NOTE – Festinol is sold by Societe Ripolin.
36 To adjust the end float of the crankshaft (see Pl. 1) :

a) Fit the bearing thrust ring (9) with the groove engaged on the retaining pin, an adjusting shim (10) 0.05 mm thick,
the thrust washer (12), the crankshaft pinion (temporarily without key), tighten the nut (spanner 1667-T, see
Pl. 15, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1667-T
Push the crankshaft towards the bearing, timing side, by means of a lever or wedge placed between a throw of the
crankshaft and the cylinder block.
b) Measure the clearance between the thrust ring (9) and the thrust washer (12) (at “g”).
This clearance should be between 0.03 and 0.09 mm. Select from the shims sold by our Spare Parts Department,
one which will allow the correct clearance to be obtained.
Remove the pinion.
37 To fit the timing gear :

a) Fit the timing chain lubricator (16) with the hole located on the centre line of the crankshaft, tighten to
7.5 ft/lbs (1 m. kg) and the locknut to 10 ft/lbs (1.4 m. kg).
Fit the oil-way plugs together with their joints. Smear the threads with Hermetic ........................ 21-23 mm box spanners
b) Place the two pinions for the crankshaft and camshaft on a bench.
Align the two reference marks : a straight edge passing through the centre line of the two pinions should pass
through the mark (centre punch on one tooth) on the camshaft pinion and in between the teeth marked by a centre
punch (see Pl. 15, fig. 2). This tool has a centre line marked on it to enable the reference marks to be aligned . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
c) Fit the chain and pinion assembly. Without displacing the pinions, offer up the chain and pinion assembly : turn
the camshaft by means of the pinion so as to bring the keyways in the pinions and shafts opposite one another.
TOOLS
d) Fit the chain and pinion assembly, making sure that the keys are properly located on the camshaft and crankshaft.
Tighten the camshaft nut to 108 ft/lbs (15 m.kg) (spanner 1731-T. see Pl. 15 fig. 3) and that of the crankshaft
to 144 ft/lbs (20 m.kg) (spanner 1667-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 1) wedging the crankshaft by means of a wedge inserted
between the crankshaft throw and the crankcase or with the aid of the setting gauge 1680-T. Turn down the locking Spanner 1731-T
tabs on the nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1667-T
Setting gauge 1680-T
38 To fit the oil pump :
a) Bring the crankshaft to top dead centre on the 1st cylinder (end of compression).
b) Engage the oil pump so that the driving groove is parallel to the centre line of the engine, and the small side
towards the inside of the engine after it is put in position. Tighten the pointed screw to 11 ft/lbs (1.5 m.kg)
maximum so as not to crush the tube and tighten the locknut to 22 ft/lbs (3 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 mm spanner
c) Place the tapered unions in the cylinder of the body of the pump.
Fit the oil pipe between the pump and the cylinder, tighten the union nuts to 43 ft/lbs (6 m.kg) and the locknuts
to 29 ft/lbs (4 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 mm spanners
39 To fit the sump and timing cover :
a) In the bearing grooves place :
at the front : the cork joint (of which the ends have been smeared with Festinol).
at the rear : the cork joint (of which the ends have been smeared with Festinol) and the sealing plate for the
groove in the cap.
Put Festinol on the joints and in particular in the corners.
Fit the sump. Tighten the sump screws. No washers are fitted under the heads of the screws. The longest
screws are fitted to the front and rear bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tee spanner
12 mm socket
b) Fit the timing cover, insert a paper joint. Smear the surface receiving the joint with Hermetic or Festinol.
Fit a brass washer under the heads of the three screws projecting on the inside of the timing cover or smear
the underside of the heads with Hermetic (new screws have a collar).
Tighten the screws to 11 ft/lbs (1.5 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
40 Fit the flywheel, tighten the screws to 36 ft/lbs (5 m.kg) (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
There are no lockwashers under the heads of the screws ........................................... Torsion spanner 2471-T
17 mm socket
41 To couple the clutch to the engine flywheel :
a) Make sure that the bearing faces for the disc on the flywheel and the clutch are clean.
b) Couple the clutch to the flywheel using a mandrel (mandrel 1712-T, see Pl. 44, fig. 4) of a primary shaft to centre
the disc. Make sure in the course of tightening that the mandrel slides normally, thus indicating a good centring of Mandrel 1712-T
the disc. Tighten the screws to 14 +2 ft/lbs (2 + 0,250 m.kg) (spring washers under the heads). Remove the mandrel. 12 mm box spanner
0 0
TOOLS
42 Turn the engine over. Support it on a stand (stand MR-3053-160. See Pl. 18, fig. 2) ...................... Stand MR-3053-160
43 To adjust the valve clearance :
This clearance should be .008 ins (0.20 mm) for the inlet and .010 ins (0.25 mm) for the exhaust. Adjust the valves
of one cylinder, the piston being at top dead centre, end of compression. The valves of a cylinder opposite are
then in balance, that is to say, inlet valve at the commencement of admission, exhaust valve at the end of exhaust.
Adjust the valves of :-
1st cylinder, the valves of the 4th cylinder being in balance.
3rd cylinder, the valves of the 2nd cylinder being in balance.
4th cylinder, the valves of the 1st cylinder being in balance
2nd cylinder, the valves of the 3rd cylinder being in balance.
44 Oil the valve springs and the sockets of the rockers. Put in position, the metal cups (3) and the seals (4) on the
sparking plug tubes.
Fit the cylinder head cover, the gasket is stuck only to the cover with Hermetic. Make sure that the gasket
and the bearing face of the cylinder head cover are properly clean.
Tighten the nuts (leather and plain washers) ...................................................... 12 mm box spanner
45 Fit the engine side support arms (spring washers under the heads of the screws) ............................ 14–17 mm box spanners
46 Fit the cylinder head lubrication tube, using a double leather joint when securing to the cylinder head and two
fibre joints when securing to the crankcase.
47 Paint the unit.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 111-1 : Work on the crankcase 60
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of the sump.

Remove the engine-gearbox assembly and leave suspended from a pulley block for this operation (see Op. DS 100-1).
Before assembly, cut the old joint close to the bearing caps using a sharp blade. Smear the bearing surface, on the crankcase, with very thin
Hermetic (slightly dilute with alcohol if necessary). Do not fit paper joints.
Replacement of the oil seals.

Removal .
Remove the engine-gearbox assembly and disconnect the gearbox from the engine.
After having removed the sump, turn the engine over, turn the crankshaft so that the throws are horizontal.
Then remove the timing chain and pinion assembly without displacing them.
Assembly .
22 Fitting the half-shells:
Fit a shim steel strip (L=200, l=10, thickness = 0.10) round the crankshaft oil thrower.
Fit the half-shells and the rear bearing cap (Festinol on the bearing faces) and tighten the screws of the bearing cap to 72 ft/lb (10 m.kg).
Tighten the assembly screws of the half-shells.
Tighten the screws fixing the half-shells to 9.5 ft/lb (1.3 m.kg) and remove the assembly screws.
Remove the bearing cap and disengage the shim steel strip. Reassemble the parts (bearing tightening 72 ft/lb (10 m.kg).
23 Adjust the end float on the crankshaft: 0.03 to 0.09 mm (shims fitted between the outer face of the bearing and the timing pinion thrust washer).
24 Fit the timing pinions. Tighten the camshaft nut to 108 ft/lb (15 m.kg) and the crankshaft nut to 145 ft/lb (20 m.kg).
26 Fit the timing cover: smear the bearing face receiving the timing cover join, with liquid Hermetic or Festinol.
Brass washers or Hermetic under the heads of the three screws projecting on the inside of the timing cover (new screws with circular base).
Tighten the screws to 11 ft/lb (1.5 m.kg)
27 Engine flywheel: Tighten the screws to 36 ft/lb (5 m.kg) (no locktabs).
28 Clutch: Tighten the screws to 14 ft/lb (2 m.kg) (spring washers).
30 Connect the gearbox to the engine: smear with Festinol or liquid Hermetic round the area of the driving shaft on the clutch housing.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 111-1 : Work on the crankcase. Op. DS 111-1 61
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF THE SUMP

Removal.
1 Remove the engine-gearbox assembly (see Op. DS 100-1).
2 Leave the engine-gearbox assembly suspended from a pulley block. Drain the engine oil 21 mm box spanner
3 Remove the fixing nuts and screws from the sump, disengage the sump 12 mm socket with
extension
4 Remove the cork gaskets from the front and rear bearing caps. Carefully clean the grooves in the bearing caps.
Assembly.
5 Fit the cork joints on the bearing caps, the grooves being smeared with Festinol. At the front, fit a cork gasket,
the ends of which must be smeared with Festinol. At the rear, fit a cork gasket, the ends of which must be
smeared with Festinol and the front sealing plate of the groove in the bearing cap.
NOTE - Festinol is sold by Société Ripolin.
6 If the gaskets between the sump and the cylinder block are to be renewed, cut each gasket level with the
bearing caps, with a sharp blade.
Carefully clean the gasket faces of the cylinder block and sump. Do not fit a paper gasket, smear the
bearing faces, on the crankcase, with thin Hermetic (slightly dilute with alcohol, if necessary).
7 Fit the drain plug on the sump, inserting a copper and asbestos washer.
Offer up the sump, tighten the fixing nuts and screws, using the longer screws for the front and rear
bearings (no washers under the screw heads) 21 mm box spanner
12 mm socket with
extension
8 Fit the engine-gearbox assembly to the car (see Op. DS 100-1).
Refill the engine with oil, 7 pints (4 litres) S. A. E. 20 oil.
REPLACEMENT OF THE SEALING SHELLS

Removal (see Pl. 1).
Drain and remove the radiator. Remove the expansion chamber 12-14 mm box spanners
10 Remove the fan in order to avoid damaging it when handling the parts 12 mm box spanner
11 Remove the air filter and pipe assembly. Disconnect the flexible feed pipe to the carburettor.
Remove the inlet manifold and carburettor assembly (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2) 12-17 mm box spanners
Spanner 1623-T
TOOLS
12 Remove the flexible pipe and water pipe assembly, left-hand.
13 Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking plug tubes.
Remove the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7).
Remove the cylinder head cover, take off the sealing cups and rubber joints from the sparking plug tubes . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
12 mm box spanner
14 Remove the clutch cylinder feed pipe. Disconnect the accelerated idling pipe from the left-hand brake unit
(spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4).
Disconnect the gearbox from the engine (spanner 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig 4 and spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1).
IMPORTANT NOTE - Do not roll the gearbox on the brake disc, use the stand 2497-T (see Pl. 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Spanner 2221-T
Spanner 1677-T
Spanner 2431-T
Stand 2497-T
15 Remove the clutch and the engine flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanner
16 Drain the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
17 Turn the engine over and place it on a stand (stand MR-3053-170, see Pl. 18, fig. 1).
Remove the timing cover and the sump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand MR-3053-170
12 mm box spanner
12 mm tee spanner
18 To remove the timing chain and pinion assembly :
a) Unscrew the nuts. Hold the pinions by means of the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15, fig. 2) or wedge the crank-
shaft by means of a wooden wedge placed between a crankshaft throw and the crankcase (spanner 1731-T, see
Pl. 15, fig. 3) for the camshaft nut and spanner 1667-T, (see Pl. 15, fig. 1), for the crankshaft nut . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
Spanner 1731-T
Spanner 1667-T
b) Turn the crankshaft until the throws are horizontal.
IMPORTANT - It is essential to place the crankshaft in this position before removing the timing chain and pinion
assembly. Since the camshaft is not under control, if one of the valves is lifted and the crankshaft rotated, the
corresponding piston cannot pass top dead centre without fouling the valve.
c) Remove the timing chain and pinion assembly without displacing them. Place the chain and pinion assembly on
a bench, held by the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15, fig. 2).
Remove the keys, the thrust washer (12), the adjusting shims (10), the bearing thrust ring (9) (see Pl. 1) . . . . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
TOOLS
19 To remove the sealing shells (see Pl. 14):

a) Remove the assembly screws (1l} from the sealing shells (13 and 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
b) Remove the bearing fixing screws. Mark the direction of assembly of the centre bearing cap, remove the
bearing caps together with their bearings and mark the latter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 mm box spanner
c) Raise the crankshaft, connecting rod and piston assembly without removing the pistons from their liners.
Pack up the crankshaft from the cylinder block far enough to enable the fixing screws (40) of the upper section
(13) to be removed.
Remove the sealing shells (13 and 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
20 Clean the parts. Carefully scrape the joints.
Assembly.
21 From shim steel 0.10 mm thick, cut a strip 200 mm long and 10 mm wide.
22 To fit the sealing shells (see Pl. 14) :
a) Fit the upper shell (13) on the cylinder block and the lower shell (14) on the bearing cap (smear the bearing
faces of the shells with Festinol). Insert the fixing screws (40) without tightening them.
b) Make sure that the upper bearings (in the crankcase) are clean.
Oil the journals with an oil-can. Place the shim steel strip (prepared in paragraph 21) round the crankshaft
oil thrower (see Pl. 14, fig. 1) and mount the crankshaft in its bearings.
With the lower bearing in position in the front bearing cap, fit the bearing cap. Guide the thrust washer (8)
(see Pl. 1) during this operation.
Tighten the assembly screws (11) of the half shells. Tighten the bearing cap fixing screws to 72 ft/lbs
(10 m. kg) (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
17 mm socket
NOTE - Do not rotate the crankshaft while centring the caps.
c) Tighten the fixing screws (40) of the half shells alternately to 9.5 ft/lbs (1.3 m. kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
d) Remove the assembly screws (11) of the half shells. Remove the bearing cap, raise the crankshaft and
remove the shim steel strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
e) Smear the bearing surfaces of the half shells with Festinol around the holes for the screws only.
TOOLS
Offer up the bearing caps fitted with their bearings (according to the reference marks made when dismantling).
Put the joints in position under the front and rear bearing caps and level with the face of the joint with the
half shells and timing cover; smear these areas with Festinol. Tighten the bearing screws to 72 ft/lbs (10 m. kg)
(torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
Tighten the half shell assembly screws. Do not rotate the crankshaft (see note, paragraph 22) . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
17 mm socket
8 mm box spanner
NOTE - Festinol is sold by Société Ripolin.
23 To adjust the end float of the crankshaft:
See Op. DS 100-3, paragraph 36.
24 To fit the timing gear :
a) Fit the chain and pinion assembly making sure that the keys are properly in position on the camshaft and on the
crankshaft.
b) Tighten the camshaft nut to 108 ft/lbs (15 m.kg) (spanner 1731-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 3) and that of the crankshaft
to 145 ft/lbs (20 m. kg) (spanner 1667-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 1). Hold the pinions with the setting gauge 1680-T
(see Pl. 15, fig. 2) or wedge the crankshaft with a wooden wedge inserted between a crankshaft throw and the
crankcase.
Turn down the nut locking tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1731-T
Spanner 1667-T
Setting gauge 1680-T
25 To fit the sump :
See paragraphs 6 and 7, this operation.
26 To fit the timing cover :
Insert a paper joint. Tighten the fixing screws to 11 ft/lbs (1.5 m. kg) (brass washers under the heads of the three
screws projecting inside the timing cover)or smear the base of the screw heads (new screws have a circular base)
with Hermetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
27 Fit the engine flywheel. Tighten the fixing screws to 36 ft/lbs (5 m. kg) (no locking tabs) (torsion spanner 2471-T,
see Pl. 7, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
17 mm socket
28 To connect the clutch to the flywheel :
See Op. DS 100-3, paragraph 41.
29 Turn the engine over and place it on the stand 2497-T (see Pl. 19).
Insert the sealing cups and the rubber joints on the sparking plug tubes.
TOOLS
Fit the cylinder head cover, sticking the gasket only on the cover with Hermetic. Check that the gasket and the
bearing face on the cylinder head cover are properly clean. Tighten the fixing nuts (leather and plain washers).
Fit the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7). Fit the bakelite and rubber caps on the sparking plug
tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 1603-T
30 Smear LIQUID Hermetic on the bearing face of the cylinder block, on the clutch housing and in the area beneath
the oil thrower of the driving shaft.
Connect the gearbox to the engine (spanner 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1). Spanner 1677-T
Spanner 2431-T
31 Fit the inlet manifold and carburettor assembly, insert the gaskets. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers)
(spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2). Connect the flexible feed pipe to the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1623-T
8 mm box spanner
32 Fit the air filter and pipe assembly.
Fit the fan, tighten the screws to 7.5 ft/lbs (1 m. kg). Do not tighten beyond this . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
33 Fit the engine-gearbox assembly on the car.

See Op. DS 100-1.
34 Fit the radiator. Connect the hoses. Fill the radiator with water.
Fit the expansion chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
35 Connect the accelerated idling pipe to the left-hand brake unit. Fit the clutch cylinder feed pipe (spanner 2219-T
or spanner 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Spanner 2221-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 111-4 : Work on the oil circulation. Op. DS 111-4 66
PARTICULAR POINTS
Checking the oil pressure (on the car).
1 Start the engine and leave it running in order to bring the oil temperature to 600 C.
2 Fit a pressure gauge 0 to 150 p.s.i. (0 to 10 kg/cm2) in place of the oil feed pipe to the cylinder head.
3 The pressure should read between 54 and 58.5 p.s.i. (3.8 and 4.1 kg/cm 2 ) with the engine running at 4,000 r.p.m.
Replacement of an oil pump.
Removal.
Remove the engine-gearbox assembly and leave it suspended from a pulley block.
Refitting.
10-11 Rotate the crankshaft to top dead centre of the first cylinder and fit the pump, the drive dog for the distributor is parallel to the centre-line
of the engine, the small side towards the engine after fitting.
Tightening torsions:
Pump fixing screws 11ft/lb (1.5 m.kg) and the locknuts 22 ft/lb (3 m.kg).
Pipe unions 43 ft/lb (6 m.kg) and the locknuts 29 ft/lb (4 m.kg).
12 Fitting the sump: replace the bearing cap cork joints, smear the bearing surface of the crankcase with very thin Hermetic. Do not fit the joint
between the sump and the crankcase.
14 Fill the engine with oil: 7 pints (4 litres) of S.A.E. 20 oil.
TOOLS
CHECKING THE OIL PRESSURE (on the car)
1 Start the engine and let it run in order to bring the oil temperature to 60°C approximately. Stop the engine.
2 Remove the cylinder head lubrication screw. Connect the pressure gauge feed pipe using the union MR-3705
(see Pl. 16, fig. 6).
Use a pressure gauge graduated from 0 to 150 p.s.i. (0 to 10 kg/cm 2 ) 12-17 mm box spanner
Union MR-3705
Pressure gauge
0 to 150 p.s.i.
0 to 10 kg/cm2 )
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 111-1 : Work on the oil circulation. Op. DS 111-1 67
TOOLS
3 Start the engine and let it run at 4000 r.p.m.: read the pressure which should be between 54 and 58.5 p.s.i.
(3.8 and 4.1 kg/cm2). (Electric revolution counter 2436-T or mechanical revolution counter 2434-T) . . . . Revolution counter
2434-T or 2436-T
NOTE — if the pressure is not correct, the oil pump must be removed. For this operation, it is necessary to
remove the engine.
4 Stop the engine. Disconnect the pressure gauge. Replace the cylinder head lubrication screw. Insert a double
copper joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
REPLACEMENT OF AN OIL PUMP
Removal.
5 Remove the engine-gearbox assembly (see Op. DS 100-1). Leave the engine-gearbox assembly suspended
from a pulley block. Drain the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
6 Remove the sump .................................................................. 12 mm box spanner
7 Remove the carburettor and inlet manifold assembly. Remove the distributor ....................... 12 mm box spanner
8 Unscrew the pipe union from the oil pump. Unscrew the pipe union on the cylinder block and rotate the pipe
in order to release it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 26 mm spanners
9 Unlock the locknut and unscrew the screw fixing the oil pump. Remove the pump .................... 16 mm box spanner
17 mm spanner
Refitting.
10 To fit the oil pump :
a) Rotate the crankshaft to top dead centre of 1st cylinder (end of compression).
b) Engage the oil pump so that the driving dog for the distributor is parallel with the centre line of the engine,
the small side towards the engine after the pump has been placed in position.
c) Moderately tighten the pointed screw fixing the pump, so as not to deform the tube, 11 ft/lbs (1.5 m.kg)
maximum. Lock the locknut to 22 ft/lbs (3 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 mm box spanner
17 mm spanner
11 Place the piping in position after making sure that the conical union is in the pump. Tighten the pipe union
nuts to 43 ft/lbs (6 m.kg) and the locknuts to 29 ft/lbs (4 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14—26 mm spanners
12 To fit the sump :
See Op. DS 111-1, paragraphs 5-6 and7.
13 Fit the distributor (see Op. DS 211-1). Fit the carburettor and inlet manifold assembly ................. 12 mm box spanner
14 Fit the engine-gearbox assembly, on the car (see Op. DS 100-1).
Fill the engine with oil - 7 pints (4 litres of S.A.E. 20 oil).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-0 : Adjusting the valve rocker clearances. Op. DS 112-0 68
PARTICULAR POINTS
Valve clearance = 0.008 in (0.20 mm) for the inlet and 0.010 in (0.25 mm) for the exhaust.
Adjust the valves of one cylinder with the piston at top dead centre, end of compression, the valves of the corresponding cylinder are then at
the point of balance: 1st cylinder, the valves of the 4th cylinder being at the point of balance, 3rd cylinder, the valves of the 2nd cylinder
being at the point of balance, 4th cylinder, the valves of the 1st cylinder being at the point of balance, 2nd cylinder, the valves of the 3rd
cylinder being at the point of balance.
TOOLS
ADJUSTING
1 Remove the air filter and pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 17 mm box spanners
2 To remove the cylinder head cover (see Pl.1):
a) Disconnect the leads from the sparking plugs. Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking
plug tubes.
b) Remove the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) so as to avoid breaking the electrodes
when moving the cylinder head cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
c) Remove the cylinder head cover, do not mislay the sealing joints (4) of the sparking plug tubes . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
3 Adjust the clearance of the valve rockers to :
0.008 ins (0.20 mm) for the inlet valves.
0.010 ins (0.25 mm) for the exhaust valves.
Adjust the valves of one cylinder with the piston at top dead centre, end of compression. The valves of the
corresponding cylinders are then in balance, that is the inlet valve is at the start of admission and the
exhaust valve at the end of exhaust. (Turn the engine by means of the starting handle, after having
pressed the auxiliary clutch control forward and upwards).
Adjust the valves of:
1st cylinder, the valves of the 4th cylinder being at the point of balance.
3rd cylinder, the valves of the 2nd cylinder being at the point of balance.
4th cylinder, the valves of the 1st cylinder being at the point of balance.
2nd cylinder, the valves of the 3rd cylinder being at the point of balance.
4 To fit the cylinder head cover.
With Hermetic, stick the gasket to the cover only. Clean the gasket and its seating on the cylinder head.
Clean the joint face, engine side. Make sure that the sealing joints (4) are properly located in the
sparking plug tube caps (3). Tighten the nuts fixing the cylinder head cover (leather and plain washers). 12 mm box spanner
5 Fit the air filter and pipe assembly. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers). Tighten the hose clip on
the pipe to the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 17 mm box spanners
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-1 : Replacement of a cylinder head or a cylinder head gasket. Op. DS 112-1 69
PARTICULAR POINTS
Removal.
15 Disengage the push-rods by lifting the inlet rockershaft slightly.
16 Remove the cylinder head fitted with the inlet rockershaft.
Assembly.
19 Place the cylinder head gasket in position with the crimping towards the cylinder barrels. The old type joints should be smeared with
linseed oil before fitting, the new type joints (varnish) are fitted dry.
Fit the cylinder head, make sure that the two locating dowels are on the cylinder block. The early type engines are not fitted with locating
dowels; fit the two end screws, exhaust side, in order to centre the cylinder head gasket.
Slightly raise the inlet rockershaft in order to fit the pushrods.
Tighten the cylinder head fixing screws; 1st tightening 21.75 ft/lb (3 m.kg), 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lb (6 m.kg) (do not exceed this tightening
torsion and observe the order of tightening indicated on Pl. 7. Make sure that the pushrods are correctly positioned).
28 Tighten the fan fixing screws to 6.5 to 7.25 ft/lb (0.9 – 1 m.kg). Do not exceed this tightening torsion.
32 Adjust the valve clearances to: inlet 0.008 in (0.20 mm), exhaust 0.010 in (0.25 mm) (see Op. DS 112-0).
33 The cylinder head cover joint should be stuck with Hermetic on the cylinder head cover only (note the direction of fitting).
34 Fill the water-cooling system with water, with the heater control open (bleed).
35 Adjust the idling (see Op. DS 142-0).
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Drain the cooling system. Retain the water which contains anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
2 Remove the air filter and pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17 mm box spanners
3 Disconnect the leads from the sparking plugs
4 To remove the carburettor (see Op. DS 142-1).
Remove the screw from the plate fixing the accelerated idling pipe on the hot spot cover plate on the inlet
manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-1 : Replacement of a cylinder head or a cylinder head gasket. Op. DS 112-1 70
TOOLS
5 Disconnect the rubber heater tube from the inlet manifold and the rubber feed pipe from the water pump.
6 On the low pressure system :

Disconnect the feed pipe union from the low pressure pump, (lower union).
Disconnect the return pipe from the low pressure pump. Protect the clutch from any spillage of fluid.
7 Remove the water return hose.
8 Disconnect the high pressure pump feed pipe from the reservoir. Seal the opening. Disconnect the radiator
tie-rod from the radiator and water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 12 mm box spanners
9 Disconnect the dynamo tie-rod from the water pump. Unscrew the dynamo fixing screw.
Remove the fan.
Disengage the belts from the water pump pulley. Disconnect the high pressure pump tie-rod from the
water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–14 mm box spanners
10 Disconnect the flange coupling the exhaust manifold to the expansion chamber.
Disconnect the heater pipe from the water pump cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 12 mm box spanners
12 mm spanner
12 Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking plug tubes.
Remove the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
13 Remove the cylinder head cover ............................................................. 12 mm box spanner
14 Remove the sealing cups and their rubber joints from the sparking plug tubes.
15 Completely unscrew the screws fixing the cylinder head. Remove the nuts and the distance pieces (early
models) or the caps (7) (new models) (see Pl. 3) from the exhaust valve rockershaft studs; raise the
rockershaft slightly to remove the push-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratchet spanner
12 – 14 mm sockets
16 Remove the cylinder head. Remove the cylinder head gasket (note the centring dowels).
Hold the cylinder barrels using two washers placed between the cylinder barrels 1-2 and 3-4 and fixed
by a screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washers :
Internal dia. = 10.5
External dia. = 45
17 Strip down the cylinder head.
Remove the exhaust manifold shield and rear plate.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-1 : Replacement of a cylinder head or a cylinder head gasket.. Op. DS 112-1 71
ASSEMBLY TOOLS
18 Assemble the cylinder head
Refit the rear plate and exhaust manifold shield (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
19 To fit the cylinder head.
Remove the washers holding the cylinder barrels.
Fit the cylinder head gasket, previously oiled with boiled linseed oil (early models). The new varnished
type gaskets should be fitted dry. Place the crimping of the gasket towards the cylinder barrel. Make sure
that the cylinder head dowels are in position. Centre the gasket. Fit the cylinder head. Pay attention to the
rockershaft oil feed pipe and the inlet manifold drain pipe. On the early models, fit the two end screws,
exhaust side, in order to centre the cylinder head gasket.
Disengage the rockers slightly and fit the push-rods (the exhaust push-rods are longer).
Fit the caps or distance pieces (early cars) and tighten the nuts on the studs of the exhaust valve rockers.
Fit the cylinder head fixing screws, then tighten (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
1st tightening 21.75 ft/lbs (3 m.kg).
2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg).
The torsion of tightening is of the greatest importance. Do not exceed the tightening torsion of 43.5 ft/lbs
(6 m.kg). Observe the order of tightening as indicated on Pl. 7 fig. 1. During the tightening, make sure that 12 mm box spanner
the spherical ends of the tappet adjusting screws are properly seated in the sockets on the rocker push-rods. Torsion spanner 2471-T
14 mm socket
NOTE – It is an obligatory procedure to retighten the cylinder head when a distance of 300 miles (500 km)
has been covered. It is imperative to proceed in the following manner :
1. Work on the screws one by one.
2. Loosen each screw, then tighten to 43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg) (torsion spanner 2471-T).
3. After a few thousand miles, proceed to retighten the cylinder head following the same conditions.
20 Connect the rockershaft oil feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
21 Put the driving belts in position in the grooves of the driving pulleys of the water pump and dynamo. Connect
the dynamo tie-rod, tension the belts (see Pl. 35). Tighten the dynamo fixing screws. Tighten the tie-rod
screw (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
Lever MR-4208
22 Connect the feed pipe to the low pressure pump (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2220-T or
14 mm spanner
23 Connect the high pressure pump tie-rod to the water pump (spring washer) .......................... 12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-1 : Replacement of a cylinder head or a cylinder head gasket.. Op. DS 112-1 72
TOOLS
24 To fit the carburettor (see Op. DS 142-1).
Refit the accelerated idling pipe to the hot spot cover plate (spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
25 Connect the water hose to the inlet manifold hot spot, to the water pump and to the heater return pipe.
Fit the hose clips.
26 Connect the low pressure pump return pipe.

Fit the clips (rubber bush).
27 Connect the heater outlet pipe to the water pump cover.
28 Fit the fan. Start the screws by hand, then tighten to 6.5 to 7.25 ft/lbs (0.9 to 1 m.kg). Do not exceed this
tightening torsion. Fit the radiator tie-rod (plain and spring washers).
Connect the feed pipe to the reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12-14 mm box spanners
29 Connect the exhaust pipe to the manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
30 Fit the sparking plugs (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) ........................................ Spanner 1603-T
31 Fit the water return pipe. Fit the clips.
32 Adjust the rockers (see Op. DS 112-0).
33 Refit the steel cups and the sealing joints on the sparking plug tubes. Refit the cylinder head cover. If the
gasket is renewed, stick it with Hermetic on the cylinder head cover only. Make sure that the gasket and
the bearing face of the cylinder head are properly clean.
Tighten the nuts (plain and leather washers). Fit the bakelite and rubber caps on the sparking plug tubes.
Connect the sparking plug leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
34 Refit the air cleaner. Tighten the clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 1 mm box spanners
35 Refill the radiator with water. During this operation, unscrew the bleed screw and open the heater control vane.
36 Start the engine. Unscrew the pressure control valve bleed screw, leave the engine running for a few minutes
and retighten the bleed screw. Check the union for leakage.
Adjust the slow running (see Op. 142-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-3 : Overhauling a cylinder head. Op. DS 112-3 73
PARTICULAR POINTS
Dismantling.
1 Since the cylinder head is made of aluminium, one cannot replace he sparking plug tubes or the valve seats without he use of special tools.
Do not remove the studs.
One can replace the valve guides (see paragraph 2). If a thread is damaged (except sparking plug holes) it is possible to replace it by a
“Heli-Coil” thread (see note MR-4279).
Assembly.
7 Characteristics of the valve springs.
Outer springs: L = 37 mm under load of 24.200±1.350 kg and L = 28.5 mm under load of 52 ± 2.800 kg.
Inner springs L = 24.5 mm under load of 5.250 ± 0.300 kg and L = 16 mm under load of 11 ± 0.600 kg.
8 Do not fit the rubber sealing ring on the exhaust valves
TOOLS
DISMANTLING
1 Stripping down the cylinder head (see Pl. 3).
a) Remove the short screws fixing he cylinder head, the inlet rockershaft and the rockershaft supports.
b) Stripping the inlet rockershaft assembly :
Remove the fixing screws (5), the caps (33), the washers (38), the springs (39), the rocker arms (34 and 35).
Drive out the plugs from the rockershaft by means of a pin punch passing through the fixing screw holes.
Clean the interior of the shaft using a metal pin and make sure that the lubrication holes of the inlet and
exhaust shafts as well as those of the rocker arms and shaft supports are clear.
c) Remove the water pump and water pump cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14-17 mm box
spanners
d) Remove the exhaust manifold and the manifold screen fixing brackets.
Remove the inlet manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
e) Remove the valves (spring compressor 1614-T, and support and base assembly 161-T, see Pl. 5) . . . . . . Spring compressor
1614-T
f) Remove the rear closing plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
TOOLS
NOTE – Since the cylinder head is made of aluminium, one cannot replace the sparking plug tubes or the valve
seats without the use of special tools. Avoid removing the studs. It is however possible to replace a stripped
or damaged thread by a “HELI-COIL” thread, see note MR-4279
2 To replace the valve guides (Fixture 1644-T, see Pl. 9)
a) To withdraw the faulty guide or guides (see Pl. 8, fig.1) :
Place the screw (D) in the guide to be withdrawn by inserting it through the combustion chamber.
Place the tube (C) and the washer (B) in position and screw the nut (A) on the screw (D). Grease the thread
of the screw (D) and the faces of the washer (B) with tallow.
Hold the screw (D) and tighten the nut (A) until the guide is withdrawn.
b) To refit a new guide.
On the screw (D) fit the socket (E) (for the inlet guide, see Pl. 8, fig. 2) or the socket (G) (for the exhaust
valve guide, see Pl. 8, fig. 3).
Insert the screw (D) together with the socket (E or G) in the guide bore.
Insert the screw, socket and guide assembly through the combustion chamber and put the socket (F), the
washer (B) and the nut (A) in position. Grease the thread of the screw (D) and the faces of the washer (B)
with tallow.
Hold the screw (D) and tighten the nut (A) after making sure that the guide is correctly positioned (see l. 8,
fig. 2 and 3), the lowest part of the end of the guide must be directed towards the centre of the combustion
chamber. If necessary, make a reference mark at this point with a spot of paint before fitting the guide.
Tighten the nut (A) until the bearing face of the socket (E o G) rests on the face of the valve seat (the latter
must be clean) Fixture 1644-T
17 mm spanner
c) Reamer the new valve guides to a diameter of 9± 0.015 mm (reamer 1642-T, see Pl. 9, fig. 2).
0.010 mm
Check the bore with a “GO-NO GO” plug gauge or failing this, with a valve stem. Too much clearance
leads to excessive oil consumption Reamer 1642-T
3 To grind the valves (valve grinder, Black and Decker type).
NOTE – The face angle of the inlet valve is 120°.
The face angle of the exhaust valve is 90°
Chamfer the corners of the valve heads to approximately 0.5 mm (at “a” and “b”, see Pl. 4, fig. 3).
4 To grind the valve seats (see Pl. 4).
NOTE – The width “l” of the seat must be between 0.9 and 1.5 mm (see fig. 3).
In order to obtain these dimensions, use the following grinding wheels :
Inlet valve seating:
For the seating 120° wheel 1662-T
For the top clearance 150° biconical wheel 1630-T
For the bottom clearance 90° biconical wheel 1630-T
TOOLS
Exhaust valve seating:
For the seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90° wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627-T
For the top clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150° biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 1627-T
For the bottom clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° biconical wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 1633-T Wheels 1627-T,
1633-T
It is essential that the large diameter seating must be equal to the largest diameter of the valve (see fig. 1 and 2).
5 Grind the valves (suction valve grinder 1615-T, see Pl. 4 fig. 4).
This attachment can be driven by an electrically, pneumatically or manually operated grinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suction valve
grinder 1615-T
6 Clean the cylinder head with great care so as to eliminate all traces of emery in the valve chambers or gas passages.
This operation must be carried out with very great care. Powdered emery (even in very small quantities) entering
the engine, will cause rapid wear.
ASSEMBLY
7 To calibrate the valve springs (spring calibration fixture 2420-T, see Pl. 6).
a) Outer springs :
Length = 37 mm under load of 24.2 ± 1.350 kg.
Length = 28.5 mm under load of 52 ± 0.600 kg.
b) Inner springs :
Length = 24.5 mm under load of 5.250 ± 0.300 kg.
Length = 16 mm under load of 11 ± 2.800 kg. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring calibration
fixture 2420-T
8 To assemble the cylinder head (see Pl. 3) :
a) Fit the valves (spring compressor 1614-T and support and base assembly 1616-T, see Pl. 5).
Oil the faces and stems of the valves. Place the valves in position, fit a sealing ring (30) on the stems of the
inlet valves only (see fig. 2).
For each valve, fit one thrust washer (31) for the outer spring and one shouldered thrust washer (32) for the
inner spring.
Fit the exhaust valve springs. Fit the spring thrust cups, the cup retaining the split cotters, the split cotters (see
fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
1614-T
Support and base
assembly 1616-T
NOTE – It is important not to fit sealing rings on the exhaust valves.
TOOLS
b) To assemble the inlet rockershaft assembly (see Pl. 3) :
Oil the inlet rockershaft (40) and with the lubrication holes facing downwards (on valve side), commence
fitting at the front :
1 long screw (5) together with the shaft fixing cap (33).
1 washer (38).
1 spring (39).
1 left-hand rocker (34).
1 washer (38).
1 long screw together with cap.
1 washer.
1 right-hand rocker (35).
1 spring.
1 washer.
1 washer
1 spring
1 left-hand rocker.
1 washer.
1 washer.
1 right-hand rocker.
1 spring.
1 washer.
c) Fit the brackets and the inlet rockershaft, on the cylinder head.
d) Fit the water pump cover, inserting a joint smeared with Hermetic. Fit the water pump, inserting a joint
smeared with Hermetic. Tighten the fixing screws and nuts.
e) Fit the rear closing plate, inserting a joint smeared with Hermetic.
f) Fit the exhaust manifold, inserting copper and asbestos gaskets, fit the manifold screen fixing brackets (the
upper bracket which is the longest is fitted at the front). Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers).
g) Fit the inlet manifold, inserting the gaskets ...................................................... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 112-4 : Work on the cylinder head. Op. DS 112-4 77
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of an inlet rocker assembly.

Removal.
1 Drain the radiator and the cylinder block.
4 It is necessary to remove the last exhaust rockershaft, in order to allow the removal of the last fixing screw of the inlet rockershaft and the
cylinder head (remove the 4th exhaust rockershaft, the first five fixing screws of the inlet rockershaft, the washer and the spring of the 1 st
inlet rocker, in order to disengage the inlet rockershaft with its rear bracket).
Assembly
8 Make sure that the cylinder head fits correctly on the centering dowels.
When fitting the inlet rockershaft and rear bracket assembly, position the lubrication holes of the rockershaft towards the bottom, valve side.
Tighten the cylinder head: 1st tightening 21.75 ft/lb (3 m.kg), 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lb (6 m.kg) (do not exceed the tightening torsion and
observe the order of tightening indicated on Pl.7. Make sure that the push rods are correctly positioned).
10 Adjust the valve rocker clearances: inlet = 0.008 in (0.20 mm), exhaust 0.010 in (0.25 mm) (see Op. 112-0).
14 Fill the water cooling system, the vane of the heater control open (bleed).
Replacement of an exhaust valve rocker assembly.

In order to replace a bracket, it is necessary to remove the inlet rockershaft (see above).
Replacement of an inlet valve sealing ring or spring.
Removal.
29 Drain the radiator and cylinder block. Unscrew the cylinder head fixing screws.
Raise the inlet rockershaft, in order to disengage the push-rod of the valve in question and put the rockershaft in position.
30 With piston of the valve in question at top dead centre, release the rocker at the side, place the collar MR-4244 in position and compress
the valve springs.
If necessary, release the cup retaining cotters with a light tap with a hammer.
Assembly.
33 Raise the inlet rockershaft, in order to put the removed push-rod into position (see paragraph 29).
34 Tighten the cylinder head: 1st tightening 21.75 ft/lb (3 m.kg), 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lb (6 m.kg) ( do not exceed the tightening torsion and
observe the order of tightening indicated on Pl.7. Make sure that the push rods are correctly positioned).
35 Check the valve rocker clearances: inlet = 0.008 in (0.20 mm), exhaust 0.010 in (0.25 mm) and adjust if necessary.
Replacement of a valve spring.

This operation is only an emergency repair. If the engine has been running for some time, the valve will have to be refaced.
For the dismantling and assembly proceed as indicated in paragraph 29 (replacement of sealing ring).
Cleaning a cylinder head filter.
This operation should be carried out after every 3,700 miles (6,000 km) approximately. Wash the filter element in petrol, then immerse in
engine oil and refit.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF AN INLET ROCKERSHAFT ASSEMBLY

1 Drain the radiator and cylinder block, retain the water which contains anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
2 Remove the air filter and tube assembly .......................................................... 12-17 mm box spanners
3 Disconnect the lead from the sparking plugs. Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking plug tubes.
Remove the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) as a precautionary measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
4 Remove the cylinder head cover, the sealing joint (4) and the cup (3) of the 4th sparking plug tube. In order to
remove the inlet rockershaft assembly, it is necessary to remove the last exhaust rockershaft bracket so that the
last fixing screw of the inlet rockershaft and the cylinder head can also be removed.
Unscrew the fixing screws (5) of the inlet rockershaft, and the screws fixing the cylinder head, right-hand side.
Remove the 4th rockershaft, the first five screws fixing the inlet rockershaft and their caps, the washer and the
spring of the first inlet rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
5 Remove the inlet rockershaft assembly and rear bracket (6) of the inlet and exhaust rockershafts.
6 To strip the rockershaft (see Pl. 3).
Remove the fixing screw (5) and its cap (33), the springs (39), the rockers (34 and 35).
Drive out the plugs of the shaft (40) with a in punch passing through the holes for the fixing screws. Carefully
clean the inside of the shaft with a metal pin and make sure that the lubrication holes in the shaft are clear.
TOOLS
Assembly (see Pl. 1).
7 To assemble the rockershaft (see Pl. 3) :

Fit the plugs to the shaft (40) and tin solder.
Place in position on the shaft (previously oiled, and with the lubrication holes facing downwards, valve side,
(see fig. 3), commencing from the front :
2 washers (38).
1 spring (39).
2 washers
1 spring (39)
2 washers (38).
1 spring (39).
1 washer (38).
1 long screw (5) together with its cap (33).
Hold each assembly of spring (39) and washer (38) with a yoke (yoke MR-4158-20, see Pl. 5, fig. 3) in order to
avoid tightening the caps (33) on the washers (38), this can cause damage to the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yoke MR-4158-20
8 Make sure that the cylinder head is properly located on the locating dowels and that the intermediate supports
(41) are in position on the cylinder head.
Fit the rockershaft and rear brackets assembly. Fit the shaft in position on the other brackets. Fit the spring
(39) and the washer (38) of the first rocker. Fit the first five fixing screws (5) together with their cap (33).
Offer up the rockershaft fixing screw and the cylinder head fixing screws, right-hand side.
Remove the retaining yoke from the assembly of the spring(39) and washer (38).
Tighten the cylinder head fixing screws (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2):
1st tightening 21.75 ft/lbs (3 m.kg) 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg).
NOTE – It is an obligatory procedure to retighten the cylinder head when a distance of 300 miles (500 km) has
been covered, then 1,250 miles (2000 km) (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraph 19, NOTE).
The tightening torsion is of great importance. Observe the order of tightening (see Pl.7, fig. 1).
During the tightening, make sure that the tappet adjusting screws are properly located in the sockets of the
push-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
14 mm socket
9 Fit the 4th rockershaft. Tighten the fixing nuts, inserting the caps or distance pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
10 Adjust the valve rocker clearance, 0.008 ins (0,20 mm) for the inlet and 0.010 ins (0,25 mm) for the exhaust
(see Op. DS 112-0).
TOOLS
11 Fit the cups (3) and the sealing joints (4) on the sparking plug tubes (see Pl. 1).
Fit the cylinder head cover, secure the gasket with Hermetic to the cylinder head cover only. Check that the
gasket and the bearing face on the cylinder head cover are properly clean.
Tighten the fixing nuts (leather and plain washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
12 Fit the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7). Fit the bakelite and rubber caps on the sparking plug
tubes. Connect the sparking plug leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
13 Fit the air filter and tube assembly. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers). Tighten the collar securing the
piping on the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
14 Fill the radiator. During this operation , open the vane of the heater control and bleed the water system.
REPLACEMENT OF AN EXHAUST ROCKER ASSEMBLY
Removal (see Pl. 1 and 3).
16 Disconnect the leads from the sparking plugs. Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking lugs.
Remove the 4th sparking plug as a precautionary measure (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
17 Remove the cylinder head cover, the sealing joints (4) and the cups (3) from the sparking plug tubes .......... 12 mm box spanner
18 Remove the rockershaft assembly fixing nuts. Remove the rockershaft and the caps (7) or the distance pieces . . . 12 mm box spanner
19 To strip the rockershaft assembly :

Remove the washer (29), the spring (37) or the adjusting washer (1st arrangement), the rocker (36 or 38).
Remove the expanding washer from the shaft with a punch. These washers must be renewed after each
dismantling operation.
Carefully clean the inside of the shaft with a metal pin and make sure that the lubrication holes are not blocked.
NOTE – To replace a bracket, it is necessary to remove the inlet rockershaft (see paragraphs 4 and 5, this
operation).
TOOLS
Assembly (see Pl. 1 and3).
20 To assemble the rockershaft assembly :

a) Before assembly, smear the expanding washer seating face with Hermetic.
b) To fit the rockershaft assembly :
1st and 3rd cylinders : place on the shaft, starting from the front, a spring (37), the rocker (38) and a washer (29).
2nd and 4th cylinders : place on the shaft starting from the front, a washer (29), the rocker (38), a spring (37).
NOTE – On cars produced before April 1956, if the shafts are to be removed, fit a new smooth type model.
21 Place the shaft in position on its bracket, with the lubrication hole towards the bottom. Fit the caps (7) on the
fixing studs. Tighten the nuts; when tightening, make sure that the tappet adjusting screws are properly
located in the sockets of the push-rods ........................................................ 12 mm box spanner
22 Adjust the valve rocker clearance to 0.008 ins (0.20 mm) for the inlet valves and 0.010 ins (0.25 mm) for the
exhaust valves (see Op. DS 112-0).
23 Fit the cups (3) and the sealing joints (4) on the sparking plug tubes. Fit the cylinder head cover, secure the
gasket with Hermetic to the cover only.
Tighten the fixing nuts (leather and plain washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
24 Fit the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7). Fit the bakelite and rubber caps on the sparking
plug tubes. Connect the sparking plug leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
25 Fit the air filter and tube assembly. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers).
Tighten the clip securing the pipe to the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
REPLACEMENT OF AN INLET VALVE SEALING RING OR A SPRING
Removal.
26 Remove the air filter and pipe assembly .......................................................... 12-17 mm box spanners
27 Disconnect the leads from the sparking plugs. Remove the rubber and bakelite caps from the sparking plug tubes.
Remove the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7) as a precautionary measure. Remove the
cylinder head cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1603-T
28 Remove the rubber joints (4) and the cups (3) (see Pl. 1)
TOOLS
29 Drain the radiator and cylinder block. Save the water which contains anti-freeze. Unscrew the cylinder head
fixing screws.
Unscrew the inlet rockershaft fixing screws. Raise the rockershaft and disengage the push-rod of the valve in
question. Replace the rockershaft and tighten the fixing screws moderately. When tightening, make sure that
the spherical ends of the adjusting screws are engaged in the sockets of the push-rods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
30 Release the rocker at the side, place the collar MR 4244 in position (see Pl. 17 fig. 4).
With the piston of the valve in question at top dead centre, compress the valve spring (spring compressor
1614-T, see Pl. 5).
If necessary, free off the split cotters by lightly tapping on the edge of the cup with a hammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collar MR-4244
Spring compressor
1614-T
31 Remove the split cotters, the upper spring retaining cup, the springs and the sealing ring (30) (see Pl. 3, fig. 2).

32 Make sure that the thrust washers (31 and 32) for the springs are in position. Put in position the sealing ring (30),
then the springs and upper thrust cap.
33 Fit the split cotters (collar MR-4244 and spring compressor 1614-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 4).
Raise the inlet rockershaft and fit the push-rod removed in paragraph 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collar MR-4244
Spring compressor
1614-T
34 Offer up the cylinder head fixing screws and tighten (torsion spanner 2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
1st tightening 21.75 ft/lbs (3 m.kg), 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lbs (6 m.kg).
On no account must the tightening torsion of 43.5 lbs (6 m.kg) be exceeded.
Observe the sequence of tightening the screws (see Pl. 7, fig.1). During the tightening, make sure that the tappet
adjusting screws are properly located in the sockets of the push-rods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
14 mm socket
NOTE – It is an obligatory procedure to retighten the cylinder head when a distance of 300 miles (500 km) has
been covered, then 1,250 miles (2000 km) (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraph 19, NOTE).
35 Check the valve rocker clearances 0.008 ins (0.20 mm) for the inlet valves and 0.010 ins (0.25 mm) for the exhaust
valves. If necessary, re-adjust (see Op. DS 112-0).
36 Fit the cups (3) and the rubber joints (4) on the sparking plug tubes (see Pl. 1).
Fit the cylinder head cover, securing the gasket with Hermetic to the cover only. Tighten the nuts (leather
and plain washers).
Fit the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7), the bakelite and rubber caps.
Connect the sparking plug leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 1603-T
TOOLS
37 Fit the air filter and tube assembly. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers). Tighten the clips fixing the piping
on to the carburettor ...................................................................... 12-17 mm box spanners
REPLACEMENT OF A VALVE SPRING

NOTE – This operation is only an emergency repair. If the engine has been running for some time with a broken
valve spring, the valve will have to be refaced (see Op. DS 112-3).
Replacement of an inlet valve spring.

38 See paragraphs 26 to 37, this operation.
Replacement of an exhaust valve spring (see Pl. 3).

Removal.
39 Remove the cylinder head cover (see paragraphs 15 to 17, this operation).
40 Remove the rockershaft. Strip the shaft, disengage the washer (29), the rocker (36 or 38), the spring (37) . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
41 Provisionally fit the shaft. Put the caps (7) or the distance pieces in position and tighten the nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
42 Move the piston, corresponding to the valve, to top dead centre.
Remove the split cotters, the cotter retaining cup, the spring upper thrust cup, the springs (collar MR-4244
and spring compressor 1614-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collar MR-4244
Spring compressor
1614-T
Assembly
43 Make sure that the spring thrust washers (31 and 32) are in position. Fit the new springs and the upper spring
housing cup.
Compress the assembly (collar MR-4244 and spring compressor 1614-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 4) and fit the split
cotter retaining cup and the split cotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collar MR-4244
Spring compressor
1614-T
NOTE – No sealing ring should be fitted on the exhaust valve.
44 Remove the shaft from the cylinder head :

Fit the washer (29), the rocker (36 or 38), the spring (37) or fit an adjusting washer and the rocker in order to
obtain a side clearance of 0.3 mm maximum (cars produced before April, 1956). Fit the rockershaft on its bracket
the lubrication holes located towards the bottom, fit the caps (33) or the distance pieces and tighten the rocker-
shaft fixing nuts. Make sure that the tappet adjusting screws are properly located in the sockets of the push-rods. 12 mm box spanner
TOOLS
45 Adjust the valve rocker clearance (see Op. DS 112-0).
46 Refit the cylinder head cover and the air filter (see paragraphs 23 to 25, this operation).
CLEANING A CYLINDER HEAD COVER FILTER (see Pl. 1).
NOTE – The filter element should be cleaned after every 3,700 miles (6000 km) approximately, (when the car is
used on normal roads).
47 Unscrew the knurled nut (49). Remove the cover (50) and disengage the filter element (51).
48 Clean the parts. Wash the filter element (51) in petrol. Brush the filter element and blow with compressed air.
Then immerse in engine oil and allow to drain.
49 Replace the filter element (51) on the cylinder head cover. Fit the cover (50) and tighten the nut (49).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 120-1 : Work on the timing gear.. Op. DS 120-1 85
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a timing chain or timing pinions.

On assembly align the reference marks (punch marks). A straight line passing through the centre-line of the pinions.
Tighten the crankshaft pinion nut to 145 ft/lb (20 m.kg) and the camshaft pinion nut to 110 ft/lb (15 m.kg) (lockwashers).
Replacement of a camshaft.
Assembly.
12 Insert a ring seal in the front groove of the camshaft.
Tighten the screws of the rear thrust flange to 7.5 ft/lb (1 m.kg) (lockwashers).
18 Tighten the cylinder head fixing screws: 1st tightening 21.75 ft/lb (3 m.kg), 2nd tightening 43.5 ft/lb (6 m.kg) (do not exceed this tightening
torsion and observe the sequence of tightening indicated on Pl. 7. Make sure that the push-rods are correctly positioned).
19 Adjust the valve rocker clearance: inlet 0.008 in (0.20 mm) and exhaust 0.010 in (0.25 mm) (see Op. 112-0).
27 Fill up the engine with oil: 7 pints (4 litres) S.A.E. 20 engine oil.
Replacement of a tappet.
Removal.
37 It is preferable to replace the tappets one at a time (extractor 1608-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 1).
Refitting.
40 Tighten the cylinder head: see paragraph 18 above.
Adjust the valve rocker clearance: see paragraph 19 above.
48 Refill with water, the heater control vane open (bleed).
49 Adjust the slow running (see Op. DS 142-0).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A TIMING CHAIN OR TIMING PINIONS
Removal.
2 Remove the timing case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
3 To remove the timing chain and pinion assembly :
a) Retain the pinions of the crankshaft and camshaft by means of the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15, fig. 2) . . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 120-1 : Work on the timing gear. Op. DS 120-1 86
TOOLS
b) Turn back the lockwashers and unscrew the pinion fixing nuts (spanner 1731-T for the camshaft nut, see Pl. 15,
fig. 3 and spanner 1667-T for the crankshaft nut, see Pl. 15, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1731-T
Spanner 1667-T
c) Remove the setting gauge 1680-T
d) Remove the timing chain and pinion assembly from the engine.
Assembly.
4 Place the two pinions of the crankshaft and camshaft on a bench.
Align the reference on the two pinions. A straight edge passing through the centre lines of the two pinions must
pass through the reference mark (punch mark on a tooth) of the camshaft pinion and through the reference mark
(punch mark between two teeth) of the crankshaft pinion. One can also use the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15,
fig. 2), for alignment of the reference marks.
Then fit the chain on the two pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
5 To fit the timing chain and pinion assembly :

a) Without displacing the pinions, offer up the assembly on the engine.
b) Rotate the camshaft by means of its pinion, so that the keyways on the pinions and shafts correspond.
c) Fit the chain and pinion assembly, making sure that the keys are properly located on the camshaft and the
crankshaft.
6 Retain the crankshaft by means of the setting gauge 1680-T (see Pl. 15, fig.2).
Tighten the camshaft nut to 110 ft/lbs (15 m.kg) (spanner 1731-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 3) (insert a lockwasher).
Tighten the crankshaft nut to 145 ft/lbs (20 m.kg) (spanner 1667-T, see Pl. 15, fig. 1) (insert a lockwasher).
Remove the setting gauge 1680-T and turn down the lockwashers on the nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting gauge 1680-T
Spanner 1731-T
Spanner 1667-T
7 Fit the timing cover inserting a gasket. Tighten the fixing screws to 11 ft/lbs (1.5 m.kg) and fit a brass washer
under the head of the three screws projecting inside the timing cover or smear the base of the screw head with
Hermetic (new type screws have a circular base). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
8 Fit the engine-gearbox assembly on the vehicle (see Op. DS 100-1).
REPLACEMENT OF A CAMSHAFT
10 Remove the sump, distributor and oil pump (see Op. DS 111-4, paragraphs 5 to 9).
TOOLS
11 Place the engine-gearbox assembly on a stand (stand 2497-T, see Pl. 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand 2497-T
31 Remove the air filter and tube assembly.
Remove the cylinder head cover ............................................................ 12-17 mm box spanners
32 To remove the cylinder head (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraphs 3 to 16).
33 Remove the tappets (extractor 1608-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor 1608-T
34 Remove the timing cover ...................................................................... 12 mm box spanner
35 Remove the timing chain and pinion assembly (see paragraph 3, this operation).
Remove the key from the camshaft.
36 Remove the screws fixing the camshaft thrust flange (15). Remove the flange (15) ........................ 12 mm box spanner
37 Remove the petrol pump ...................................................................... 14 mm box spanner
38 Withdraw the camshaft from the rear of the engine.

39 Fit the ring seal (47) in the groove on the splined portion of the camshaft. Oil the bearing surfaces of the camshaft
and engage it from the rear of the engine.
Fit the rear thrust flange (15), tighten the screws to 7.2 ft/lbs (1 m.kg) and turn down the lock-tabs . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
40 Fit the timing chain and pinion assembly, fit the timing cover (see paragraphs 4 to 7, this operation).
41 Fit the petrol pump, inserting a cork joint. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers) ........................ 14 mm box spanner
42 Fit the tappets, previously oiled (extractor 1608-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 1) .................................... Extractor 1608-T
43 Fit the cylinder head (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraphs 19 and 20).
44 Adjust the valve rocker clearances (see Op. DS 112-0).
45 Fit the steel cups (3) and the rubber joints (4) on the sparking plug tubes.
Fit the cylinder head cover, using Hermetic to secure the gasket to the cover only. Tighten the fixing nuts
(plain and leather washers).
Fit the air filter and tube assembly. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm box spanners
46 Fit the accelerated idling control ................................................................ 8 mm ring spanner
TOOLS
47 Fit the water pump and dynamo driving belt.

Tension the belt, tighten the screw fixing the dynamo and the nut fixing the tie-rod on the dynamo (Op. DS 231-0) 14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
12 mm box spanner
48 Connect the petrol feed pipe to the carburettor.
31 Fit a covered chain around the water pump cover (chain 1697-T, see Pl. 51) and raise the engine on a pulley block Chain 1697-T
32 Fit the oil pump (see Op. DS 111-4, paragraphs 10 and 11).
33 Fit the sump (see Op. DS 111-4, paragraphs 5 to 7)
34 Fit the contact breaker (see Op DS 211-1, paragraphs 14-18).
35 Fit the engine-gearbox assembly on the car (see Op. DS 100-1).

Fill the engine with oil, 7 pints (4 litres) SAE 20 oil.
REPLACEMENT OF TAPPETS
Removal.
36 Drain the cooling system (radiator and cylinder block). Retain the water which contains anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
38 Remove the cylinder head (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraphs 3 to 16).
39 Remove the tappets (extractor 1608-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 1).
NOTE – It is advisable to replace the tappets one at a time, otherwise the replacement tappet may fall into an empty
bore upside down. In this position, it would be almost impossible to recover without dismantling the engine. Extractor 1608-T

40 Fit the tappets, previously oiled (extractor 1608-T, see Pl. 17, fig 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor 1608-T
41 Fit the cylinder head (see Op. DS 112-1, paragraphs 19 and 20).
42 Adjust the valve rocker clearances (see Op. DS 112-0).
TOOLS
43 Fit the flange coupling the exhaust downpipe to the pipe ............................................. 12 mm box spanner
44 Fit the accelerated idling control, insert the rubber sleeve and turn down the plate on the pipe
45 Fit the water pump and dynamo belt in position. Fit the dynamo tie-rod, tension the belt (see Op. DS 231-0) and
tighten the dynamo fixing screw and the nut fixing the tie-rod on the dynamo (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
14 mm ring spanner
46 Connect the petrol feed pipe, the choke control and the accelerator control to the carburettor.
47 Fit the sealing cups (3) and the rubber joints (4) on the sparking plug tubes.
Fit the cylinder head cover. If the gasket has to be renewed, secure it with Hermetic to the cylinder head
cover only.
Tighten the fixing nuts (leather and plain washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
48 Fit the 4th sparking plug (spanner 1603-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 7). Fit the bakelite and rubber caps on the sparking plug
tubes. Connect the caps to the sparking plugs ..................................................... Spanner 1603-T
49 Fit the air filter and tube assembly (spring washers under the fixing nuts) ................................ 12-17 mm box spanners
50 Fill the radiator, the vane of the heater control open. Bleed.
Check the joints for leakage (water and oil).

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 133-0 : Adjustment of the rear engine mountings (on the car). Op. DS 133-0 90
TOOLS
ADJUSTMENT (see Pl. 24).
IMPORTANT NOTE – This operation should not be carried out on cars produced after July 1959.
1 Raise the car on a lift or put the front of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking bracket 2505-T
2 To adjust the left-hand mounting :
Hold the rubber block adjusting nut (5) with the spanner 1700-T
Loosen the locknut (12) with the spanner 1699-T. Tighten or loosen the adjusting nut until the fibre and rubber
washer (9) turns freely without play (spanner 1700-T).
Tighten the locknut (12) (spanner 1699-T) ...................................................... Spanner 1700-T

Spanner 1699-T
3 To adjust the right-hand mounting :
Proceed in the same manner but hold the adjusting nut (5) with the spanner 1699-T and loosen the locknut (12)
with the spanner 1982-T
Check that the nuts fixing the mounting to the body are tight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1699-T
Spanner 1982-T
12 mm ring spanner
4 Lower the car to the ground.
5 Check that the nut (1) locking the arm (2) is tight (see fig 2) .......................................... 23 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 133-1 : Work on the engine mountings. Op. DS 133-1 91
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a front upper crossmember.
Assembly.
11 Between the sidemembers and the crossmembers insert the number of shims required to give a difference in the measurement between the
brake disc and the sidemembers, on the left-hand side which should be greater by 70 ± 2 mm than the same dimension measured on the
right-hand side.
17 Fill the radiator, heater control vane open. Bleed the system. Make sure that the hot water circulates.
Replacement of a rear flexible mounting (cars produced before July 1959).
Removal.
It is necessary to remove the threaded spindle downwards from the car and the flexible mounting upwards from the car, after having measured
the distance “a” (see Pl. 24) between the bearing face for of the engine support arm on the upper nut and the bearing face of the flexible
mounting on the steel support fixed on the body.
Assembly.
31-34 Insert the threaded spindle (fitted with the lower parts) from underneath the car, in the flexible mounting and screw the bearing nut of the
engine support arm, until the dimension “a” measured when dismantling, is obtained.
38 Check the adjustment of the engine mountings (see Op. DS 133-0).
Replacement of a rear flexible mounting (cars produced since July 1959).

It is necessary to remove the flexible mounting and rear support assembly from the engine.
Pre-adjustment of a rear flexible mounting (cars produced before July 1959).

41 Bring the rubber washer in contact with the flexible mounting bracket and tighten the lower cupped nut 8 complete turns (10 mm).
Pre-adjustment of a rear flexible mounting (cars produced since July 1959).

Work on the lower cap, in order to obtain a dimension of 98 mm between the upper face of this cap and the lower bearing face of the flexible
mounting on the body support.
Replacement of a rear support (cars produced before July 1959).
Removal.
It is necessary to remove the flexible mounting (see above) and its threaded spindle.
Assembly.
Lower the engine then displace the support and flexible mounting, in order to centralise the parts in relation to the support arm on the engine.
Check the adjustment of the engine mountings (see Op. DS 133-0).
Replacement of a rear support (cars produced since July 1959).

It is necessary to remove the flexible mounting and rear support assembly from the engine.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF AN UPPER FRONT CROSSMEMBER
Removal.
1 Drain the radiator retaining the water which contains anti-freeze.
2 Remove the spare wheel, the support bar, the front wings ......................................... 12-14 mm spanners
3 Remove the battery, the battery tray, the straps from the hydraulic fluid reservoir and the battery support . . . . . . 8-12 mm box spanners
4 Remove the radiator tie-bar. Disconnect the water pump return hose from the radiator and disconnect the hose
between the radiator and steel pipe from the steel pipe ............................................. 8-12 mm box spanners
5 Loosen the screw holding the fixing plate on the pressure regulator and pivot the plate towards the front.
6 Remove the radiator fixing screws on the lower front crossmember.

Remove the distance pieces. Remove the radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
7 Pass a covered chain (chain 1697-T, see Pl. 51) around the water pump cover and support the engine-gearbox
assembly either by means of a stand (stand 1697-T, see Pl. 51) or by means of a pulley block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain 1696-T
Stand 1797-T
8 Remove the cups of the flexible half collars between the upper and lower crossmembers, remove the upper flexible
half collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
9 Remove the screws securing the upper crossmember to the sidemembers and remove the crossmember, Withdraw
the adjusting shims between the crossmember and sidemember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
TOOLS
Assembly.
10 Slightly raise the engine-gearbox assembly and offer up the upper crossmember. Place the upper flexible half
collars and caps in position. Insert and tighten the screws securing the crossmember on the support arms,
inserting locking tabs and tuning down on the screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
11 Lower the engine-gearbox assembly until the crossmember rests on the sidemember. The difference in the
measurements between the brake disc and the sidemember, on the left-hand side should be greater by 70 ± 2 mm
than the same dimension measured on the right-hand side.
Between the sidemembers and the crossmember, insert the number of shims required to give this dimension, the
crossmember must be a good fit between the sidemembers. Tighten the screws securing the crossmember to the
sidemembers (plain and spring washers under the heads of the screw).
Withdraw the chain and remove the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
12 Make sure that the rubber blocks are in position on the supports on the crossmember and place the radiator in
position.
Connect the hoses and tighten the clips.
Place he distance piece between the exhaust downpipe bracket and radiator in position and the distance piece
Between the regulator support and the radiator (the longer distance piece is fitted on the exhaust downpipe
bracket side). Insert the fixing screws and centre the radiator; the fan blades must not touch the cowling.
Tighten the radiator fixing screws (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
13 Fit the radiator tie-bar. Tighten the fixing screw and nut (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
8 mm box spanner
14 Fit the battery bracket. Tighten the fixing screw (plain and spring washers under the screw heads), insert the
distance piece between the battery bracket and the gearbox support crossmember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
15 Fit the front wings, the spare wheel support and the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm spanners
16 Fill the radiator. During this operation, open the heater control and bleed the system.
REPLACEMENT OF A FRONT SUPPORT ARM

17 Remove the differential shaft bearing assembly, the differential shaft, support arm, flexible coupling (bibax)
left side or the differential shaft bearing assembly, the differential shaft and support arm, right side
(see Op. DS 330-4).
TOOLS
18 Unscrew the retaining screw (50) from the locknut (51) of the differential bearing (52) on the differential shaft and
remove the nut (51) (spanner 1770-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
Spanner 1770-T
19 Drive out the disc and shaft assembly. Remove the bearing support bracket (2).

20 Put the bearing support bracket (2) on the differential shaft bearing.
Offer up the bearing as prepared on the differential shaft. Using a tube and a press, press into position. Pay
attention to the centring dowel on the differential shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube:
dia. = 30 x 39
length = 200
21 Tighten the locknut (51) of the shaft bearing (52) to 72 ft/lbs (10 m.kg) (spanner 1770-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 4).
Tighten the locking screw (50) of the nut (51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
Spanner 1770-T
22 Fit the differential shaft and bearing assembly (see Op. DS 330-4).
REPLACEMENT OF A REAR FLEXIBLE MOUNTING (cars produced before July 1959)

23 Put the front of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking bracket 2505-T
24 Left-hand side : disconnect the distributor return spring.
Right-hand side : remove the exhaust manifold screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
25 Remove the upper nut (1) from the arm (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
26 Pass a covered chain sling (chain sling 1697-T, see Pl. 51) round the water pump cover and suspend the engine
on a chain block.
Measure the distance “a” between the bearing face “b” of the arm on the nut (3) and the bearing face “c” of
the flexible block on the support plate (4).
Remove the lower nut (3) from the arm (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain sling 1697-T
23 mm box spanner
27 Hold the nut (5) from beneath the car (spanner 1700-T, see fig. 3) and remove the nut (6) and the cup (7).
28 Withdraw the spindle (8) with the rubber washer and fibre washer (9), the rubber block (11), the nut (5) and the
locknut (12) from underneath the car.
29 Remove the flexible mounting (13) together with the distance piece (14). Remove the distance piece from the
flexible mounting.
TOOLS
30 Offer up the flexible mounting on the support plate (4), fitted with the distance piece (14) and the steel cup (15).
31 Insert the spindle (8) complete with the rubber washer and fibre washer (9), the rubber block (11), the nut (5) and
the locknut (12) in the flexible mounting.
32 Place the steel cup (7) in position and tighten the nut (6). Hold the nut (5) from underneath the car (spanner 1700-T,
see fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
Spanner 1700-T
33 Tighten the lower nut (3) on the arm (2) until the measurement “a” measured in paragraph 26 is obtained.
34 Engage the spindle (8) in the bore of the arm (2). Gently lower the engine and engage the shoulder of the lower
nut (3) in the bore of the arm (2).
35 Insert and tighten the screws securing the flexible mounting on the steel support (4). Tighten the upper nut (1) on
the arm (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 mm box spanners
36 Left-hand side : hook on the distributor return spring.

Right-hand side: fit the exhaust manifold screen. Tighten the fixing screws (plain washers under the heads) . . . . 12 mm box spanner
37 Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Remove the chain sling 1697-T.
REPLACEMENT OF A REAR FLEXIBLE MOUNTING (cars produced since July 1959)

Removal.
38 Left-hand side : unhook the distributor return spring.
Right-hand side: remove the exhaust manifold screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
39 Pass a covered chain sling (chain sling 1697-T, see Pl. 51) round the water pump cover and suspend the engine on
a chain block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain sling 1697-T
40 Remove the screws fixing the support arm on the engine and the screw fixing the flexible mounting on the body
support. Disengage the flexible mounting and the support arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 mm spanners
41 Remove the upper nut fixing the arm on the flexible mounting and disconnect the arm from the flexible mounting 23 mm box spanner
No work is possible on the flexible mounting.
TOOLS
Refitting.
42 Fit the arm on the flexible mounting previously adjusted (see paragraph 50) and tighten the upper nut on the arm
(shakeproof washer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
43 Fit the flexible mounting and support arm assembly on the car. Insert and tighten the fixing screws of the flexible
mounting and support arm, after having correctly positioned these parts (spring washers under the heads of
the screws fixing the arms, plain washers and spring washers under the heads of the screws fixing the
flexible mounting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 mm spanners
Right-hand side: fit the exhaust manifold screen. Tighten the fixing screws (plain washers under the heads of
the screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
REPAIRING A FLEXIBLE MOUNTING AFTER REMOVAL (cars produced before July 1959)
Dismantling (see Pl. 24).
45 Remove the spindle (8), the rubber washer and fibre washer (9), the rubber block (11), the cupped nut (5) and the
locknut (12).
Clean the parts.

46 On the spindle (8), fit the rubber washer and fibre washer (9), the rubber block (11), the cupped nut (5) and the
locknut (12).
PRE-ADJUSTMENT OF THE REAR FLEXIBLE ENGINE MOUNTING (cars produced before

July 1959) (see Pl. 24)
47 Tighten the cupped nut (5) until the upper face of the washer (9) comes into contact with the face “d” of the
support (4). The washer (9) must turn freely, without play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
48 Hold the spindle (8) by the nut (6) fixing the cup (7) and tighten the cupped nut (5) eight complete turns, which
corresponds to a movement of 10 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm spanner
23 mm box spanner
49 Tighten and lock the locknut (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm spanner
23 mm box spanner
TOOLS
PRE-ADJUSTMENT OF THE REAR FLEXIBLE ENGINE MOUNTING (cars produced since July 1959)
50 Bring the upper face of the lower nut tightening the arm, to a distance of 98 mm from the bearing face of the
flexible mounting on the steel support on the body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
REPLACEMENT OF A REAR ARM (cars produced before July 1959)

51 Put the front of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) ................................. Jacking bracket 2505-T
52 Left-hand support arm : unhook the distributor return spring.
Right-hand support arm: remove the exhaust manifold screen ........................................ 12 mm box spanner
53 Remove the upper arm (1) fixing the arm (2) on the flexible mounting ................................. 23 mm box spanner
54 Place a covered chain sling around the water pump cover (chain sling 1697-T, see Pl. 51) and support the engine
on a chain block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain sling 1697-T
55 Remove the screws fixing the rear arm (2) and remove the arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
17 mm spanner
17 mm box spanner
56 Place the rear arm (2) in position and tighten the fixing screws (spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 mm spanners
57 Engage the spindle (8) in the bore of the arm (2). Lower the engine slightly and engage the shoulder of the nut (3)
in the bore of the arm (2). Tighten the upper nut (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
Right-hand side: fit the exhaust manifold screen .................................................. 12 mm box spanner
59 Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Remove the chain sling 1697-T .......... Jacking bracket 2505-T
REPLACEMENT OF A REAR ARM (cars produced since July 1959)
60 Proceed as indicated for the replacement of a flexible mounting (see paragraphs 38 and onwards, this operation).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A REAR FLEXIBLE MOUNTING SUPPORT (cars produced before July 1959)
61 Remove the spindle of the flexible mounting (see paragraphs 23 to 28, this operation).
62 Remove the screws fixing the flexible mounting (13) on the support (4) and remove the flexible mounting . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
63 Remove the nuts fixing the support (4) and remove the support ....................................... 14 mm spanner
Assembly (see Pl. 24)
64 Place the support in position, fit the fixing nuts, without tightening (plain and spring washers).
65 Place the rubber block in position on the bracket and insert the fixing screws without tightening (plain and spring
washers under the heads).
66 Engage the spindle (8), complete with rubber washer and fibre washer (9), the rubber block (11), the cupped nut (5)
and the locknut (12) in the flexible mounting (13).
67 Place the steel cup (7) in position and tighten the nut (6). Have the cupped nut (5) held from underneath the car by
an assistant (spanner 1700-T, see fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1700-T
23 mm box spanner
68 Tighten the lower nut (3) of the arm (2) until the measurement “a” mentioned in paragraph 26 is obtained.
69 Engage the spindle (8) in the bore of the arm (2). Gently lower the engine and engage the shoulder of the nut (3)
in the bore of the arm (2). Fit and tighten the upper nut (1) on the arm (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 mm box spanner
70 Tighten the screws fixing the flexible mounting (13) on the support (4) (plain and spring washers under the heads)
and tighten the nuts fixing the steel support (4) on the body (pain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
71 Left-hand side : replace the distributor return spring.
Right-hand side: fit the exhaust manifold screen. Tighten the fixing screws (plain and spring washers under the
heads). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
72 Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Remove the chain sling 1687-T .......... Jacking bracket 2505-T
Chain sling 1697-T
73 Check the adjustment of the engine mountings. Re-adjust if necessary (see Op. DS 133-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 141-1 : Replacement of an inlet manifold (cars delivered before July 1959). Op. DS 141-1 99
PARTICULAR POINTS
Removal.
1 It is necessary to drain the water from the radiator and cylinder block.
12 It is often necessary to remove the two rear studs in order to remove the manifold.
Assembly.
20 Refill with water, the vane of the heater control open (bleed).
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Drain the water from the radiator and cylinder block. (Retain this water which contains anti-freeze).
Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
Stop MR-4158
2 Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
3 Remove the pipe between the carburettor and air filter.
4 Disconnect the leads from the sparking plugs.
5 Remove the coil and bracket assembly .......................................................... 8 mm spanner
6 Disconnect the heater pipe from the inlet manifold.
7 Disconnect the petrol feed pipe from the carburettor.
8 Disconnect the accelerator control from the butterfly crosshead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm spanner
9 Remove the spring (13) upwards from the support (14) (see Pl. 28).
Remove the screw fixing the accelerated idling control on the cover of the carburettor.
Remove the screw fixing the hydraulic control plate on the hot spot plate of the manifold. Disconnect the choke
control from the carburettor. Unhook the clutch re-engagement control spring.
Remove the carburettor (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1623-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 141-1 : Replacement of an inlet manifold (cars delivered before July 1959). Op. DS 141-1 100
TOOLS
10 Disengage the accelerator control on the scuttle and turn towards the left.
11 Remove the oil dipstick.
12 Remove the inlet manifold. It is often necessary to remove the two rear studs in order to disengage the manifold . . 12 mm box spanner
ASSEMBLY
13 Refit the inlet manifold (renew the joints at each removal).

Smear the studs removed with Hermetic, then refit.
Fit the carburettor (plain and spring washers) (use the spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 1623-T
14 Refit the accelerated idle control. Insert a plain washer between the control and the carburettor, then a second
plain washer and a spring washer under the heads of the screws.
Hook on the spring (13) by pressing on the support (14) (see Pl. 28).
15 Engage the accelerator control on its joint on the scuttle, connect the control to the carburettor, tighten the nut
and the locknut. Connect the choke control, the heater pipe to the inlet manifold, and the petrol feed pipe to
the carburettor. Hook on the clutch re-engagement control spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 – 8 mm box spanners
16 Connect the pipe between the carburettor and air silencer.
17 Fix the coil and bracket assembly on the scuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
18 Connect the leads on the sparking plugs.
19 Refit the oil dipstick.
20 Refill the radiator. During this operation, open the heater valve and bleed the system.

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-0 : Adjustment of the slow running. Op. DS 142-0 101
PARTICULAR POINTS
The adjustment should be carried out with the engine hot, choke closed, ignition control in the mid-way position.
The use of a revolution counter is indispensable. In practice, this adjustment should be carried out after the adjustment of the clutch drag (see
Op. DS 314-0.
2 Adjust the slowrunning on cars produced before March 1956 (accelerator control with 2 rods): 550 r.p.m.
4 Adjust the accelerated idling: 950 to 1,000 r.p.m. to the point where increased resistance is felt on the control, adjust only by turning on the
outside rod.
Adjust the slow running on cars produced since 1956 (accelerator control with 1 rod): 550 to 600 r.p.m., unhook the accelerated idling spring.
Adjust the accelerated idling: 900 ± 25 r.p.m. hook on the spring, work on the adjusting screw..
TOOLS
IMPORTANT REMARKS
a) The adjustment described above should be carried out with the engine hot. Make sure that the choke control is
fully closed and that the ignition control is in the midway position.
b) The use of a revolution counter is indispensable. Use the mechanical revolution counter 2434-T, connected to the
high pressure pump pulley, or the electric revolution counter 2436-T, connected to the yellow terminal of the
upper coil
1. MECHANICAL REVOLUTION COUNTERS
In order to compensate for an error due to belt slip or irregular running of the engine during the checking,
unscrew the bleed screw of the pressure control valve or place the manual height control lever in the low
position.
2. ELECTRIC REVOLUTION COUNTERS
The electric evolution counters should be checked periodically (periods varying according to use and quality).
If it is desired to use a commercial revolution counter, it should conform to the following specifications :-
- Large diameter graduated from 0 to 1500 r.p.m. maximum.
- Work on a contact breaker with two cams.
- Needle steady whilst in use.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE SLOW RUNNING (on cars produced before March 1956).
Accelerator control with 2 rods.
1 Make sure that the accelerator control works normally and that the spring returns the throttle butterfly to the closed
position.
2 Adjusting the slow running to 550 r.p.m. (see Pl. 26, fig. 4).
Only adjust the screw (2) of the throttle valve and the volume screw (3) controlling the richness of the mixture for idling.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-0 : Adjustment of the slow running. Op. DS 142-0 102
TOOLS
Set the screw (2) to give the minimum opening of the secondary throttle which will allow the engine to idle evenly.
Turn the volume screw (3) to increase the richness of the mixture to give the highest speed at the throttle
opening already determined. In order to reduce the speed to that desired, unscrew the screw (2).
NOTE – After each alteration to the setting of the secondary throttle valve screw (2), give the throttle a flick open
and shut to ensure that the throttle returns fully to stop on the screw.
3 Checking the maximum opening of the throttle valve (see Pl. 46).
Remove the tube between the carburettor and the air cleaner-silencer. Press the accelerator pedal right down.
If necessary, adjust the maximum opening of the throttle valve by adjusting only on the inside rod (16) (engine
side)
Connect the tube to the carburettor.
4 Adjustment of the accelerator control rods (see Pl. 46, fig. 1).
Press down the accelerator slightly to the point where increased resistance is felt on the control. Hold the
accelerator in this position.
Check the speed of the engine, it should be from 950 to 1000 r.p.m.
If necessary, adjust the outside rod (17). In no circumstances, must the inside rod (16) be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE SLOW RUNNING (on cars produced since March 1956)
Accelerator control with 1 rod and accelerated idling (see Pl. 28).
5 Adjusting the slow running :
a) Unhook the spring (13) by removing it from the support tube (14) (pull it upwards) to disengage it from the
accelerator control.
b) Adjusting the slow running on a Weber carburettor (see paragraph 2, this operation).
c) Adjusting the slow running on a Zenith carburettor (see Pl. 27).
Adjust the screw (36) and the screw (30) controlling the richness of the mixture for idling, by proceeding as
indicated in paragraph 2, this operation).
6 Checking the maximum opening of the throttle valve:
See paragraph 3. Adjust the accelerator rod.
7 Adjusting the accelerated idling (see Pl. 28).
Hook the spring (13) in position by pressing on the support tube (14).
Adjust the screw (15) in order to obtain a speed which exceeds the speed at which the clutch drags by 150 r.p.m.
(900 ± 25 r.p.m.).
NOTE – In practice, this adjustment should be carried out after the adjustment of the clutch drag (see Op. DS 314-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-1 : Replacement of a carburettor. Op. DS 142-1 103
TOOLS
REMOVAL.
2 Loosen the clip fixing the tube between the carburettor and the air filter and remove the tube.
3 Disconnect the choke control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
4 Disconnect the accelerated idling control (take care of the washers between the control and the carburettor) . . . . 8 mm ring spanner
5 Disconnect the cruciform coupling controlling the throttle valves on the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
6 Remove the carburettor (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2). Remove the joint .......................... Spanner 1623-T
FITTING
7 Fit the carburettor, putting the joint in position.
8 Slightly raise the carburettor to enable the nuts to be fitted.

Insert under each nut: a plain washer and a spring washer.
Tighten the nuts (spanner 1623-T, see pl. 16, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1623-T
9 Couple up the throttle control. Insert plain washers under the nuts. Tighten the locknuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
10 Couple up the accelerated idling control. Insert a plain washer between the accelerated idling control and the
carburettor and a second plain washer and a spring washer under the heads of the screws. Tighten the screws. 8 mm ring spanner
11 Couple up the choke control. Make sure that it opens and closes correctly ............................. 7 mm box spanner
12 Fit the tube between the carburettor and the air filter and tighten the clip.
13 Couple up the petrol feed pipe to the carburettor.

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-3 : Work on the carburettor. Op. DS 142-3 104
PARTICULAR POINTS
44 Adjust the closing of the throttle valve of the 1st body on the Zenith 24/30 EEAC carburettor: unscrew the stop screw until the throttle valve
is totally closed, bring the screw into contact with the stop then screw up three quarters of a turn exactly and lock the locknut.
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A WEBER 24/30 DCZCI or 24/30 DCLC CARBURETTOR
1 To remove the cover (21) complete.

a) Unscrew the fixing screws (22) and raise the cover vertically in order to disengage the floats (23).
b) Remove the paper joint.
c) Remove the floats (23) by withdrawing the pin (24).
d) Remove the needle valve (25) and unscrew the needle valve seat (26). In cases of defect, replace the assembly. 10 mm box spanner
e) Remove the cover (27) from the filter, disengage the joint (28), disengage the filter gauze (29) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
f) Clean the parts, blow through the channels with compressed air.
2 Remove the accelerator pump (30) by drawing out the connecting rod (31).
3 Remove the main jets (32 and 35) and the volume screw (3) with its spring (37).
Remove the emulsion tubes (38) ............................................................. 10 mm box spanner
4 Remove the pump delivery valve (39). Be careful not to mislay the joints (40), also that of the pump jet (41) . . . 8 mm box spanner
5 Remove the starter jet (42) and the corrector (43) (24/30 DCLC). Remove the pump inlet valve (44) . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
6 Remove the complete choke control (45).
7 Remove the primary and secondary venturi sleeves (46 and 47). To do this remove the screw (48).
NOTE – It is imperative that the disassembly of the carburettor should be limited to the operations described
above otherwise it may be made unusable. It is important that in no event should the adjustment of the stop
screw (49) of the throttle valve in the first body be disturbed, the adjustment is carried out by
Messrs Weber and is particular to each carburettor.
TOOLS
8 Clean the parts in petrol and blow out the passages in the carburettor and the different jets carefully with
compressed air.
NOTE – Never use metallic wire to unblock the jets, the holes in these are machined with great precision and
such an action may modify their output.
9 To assemble the cover (21) on the carburettor.

a) Fit the needle valve seat (26), interposing the aluminium joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
b) Put the needle valve (25) in position.
c) Put the floats (23) in position and fit the pin (24), then carry out the levelling of the floats.
- with the cover (21) of the carburettor turned towards the front, the dimension “a” between the float and
the surface of the cover should be 5 mm ± 0.5 mm.
- when the levelling has been carried out, make sure that the movement of the float (23) is “b” = 12 ± 0.5 mm;
if necessary, modify the position of the stop (50.
d) Put the filter gauze (29) in position, the joint (28), the cover (27) and the screw. Tighten the screw, fitting a
joint under the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
NOTE – If the filter was fitted with a rubber joint, it must be replaced by a joint of the new type.
10 Put the accelerator pump (30) in position and engage the retaining plate (51) as far as possible.
11 Fitting the jets.

a) Put the primary venturi slow running jet (34) in position (diameter = 0.45 mm).
b) Put the primary venturi main jet (32) in position (diameter = 1.05 mm).
Fit a copper joint under the head of the jet carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
c) Put the secondary venturi slow running jet (35) in position (diameter = 0.65 mm).
d) Put the secondary venturi main jet (33) in position (diameter = 1.45 mm).
e) Fit the volume screw (3) and the spring (37).
12 Put the emulsion tubes complete (38) in position.

a) The emulsion tube with 220 air jet (primary venturi side).
b) The emulsion tube with 230 air jet, (secondary venturi side) (DCLC carburettor) or with 240 air jet
(DCZCI carburettor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
TOOLS
13 Put the pump jet (41) in position (position marked with a dowel).
Fit the joint (40) between the jet and the carburettor body. Put the delivery valve (39) in position, fitting the
joint (40) between the pump jet (41) and the head of the valve.
14 Put the starter jet (42) in position, fitting an aluminium joint under the head. Fit the starter corrector (43)
(DCLC carburettor) in its housing (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
15 Put the pump feed valve (44) in position.
16 Put he primary and secondary venturi sleeves (46 and 47) in position, tighten the screws (48).
17 Check that there is no dirt on the seating (53) of the choke control (45) and put it in position. Tighten the screws (54).
18 Put the joint of the cover (21) in position. Engage the cover (21) vertically on the body of the carburettor. Put the
fixing screws (22) in position with serrated washers under the heads.
Tighten the screws.
NOTE – (see fig. 5). On the 24/30 DCLC carburettor, the correct working of the “starter” is dependant upon the
temperature; in consequence :
in summer, turn the corrector (43) so that the letter “E” is on the same side as the mark C”.
in winter, turn the corrector (43) so that the letter “I” is on the same side as the mark “C”.
OVERHAULING A ZENITH 24/30 EEAC CARBURETTOR

19 To remove the cover complete (1) :
9 Unscrew the fixing screws (2).
10 Disengage the connecting rod (3) and the retainer (37) and turn the throttle control (5) in order to disengage
the connecting rod (6), after having removed the retaining clip (4).
11 Lift the cover (1) vertically, in order to avoid damage to the accelerator pump (7).
12 Remove the paper joint from the cover.
13 Remove the pin (8), the screw (10), the lever (11), the spring (12) and the piston (7) from the accelerator pump.
Disengage from the rod (9), the rubber washer (13) and the steel washer (14).
14 Remove the connecting rod (6) from the control lever (15) of the choke (16).
15 Clean the parts.
20 Remove the float (17) with the needle valve (19) by unscrewing the pin (18). The needle valve (19) is attached to
the float (17) by the connecting pin (20).
TOOLS
21 Remove the plug (22). Remove the filter (21).
22 Remove the plugs (23 and 24) as well as the plug (25).
23 Remove the pump inlet valve (26).
24 Remove the slow running jets (27) and the emulsion tubes (28).
25 Remove the delivery valve (29) from the accelerator pump.
26 Remove the volume screw (30) with its spring.
27 Remove the retaining clip (31) and remove the connecting rod (3).
28 Remove the main jets (35). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special ZENITH

spanner
29 Clean the parts with petrol and blow with compressed air.
NOTE – Never use metallic wire to unblock the jets. The calibration is carried out with great precision and such
an action may modify their output.
30 Put the main jets (35) in position : the jet 35 in the small bore and the jet 46 in the large bore.
31 Put the volume screw (30) with its spring in position and tighten a few turns.
32 Put the delivery valve (29) in position in the accelerator pump.

Insert a joint under the head.
33 Put the emulsion tubes (28) in position together with the slow running jets (27).
34 Put the pump inlet valve (26) in position.
35 Put the plug (25) in position, inserting an aluminium joint.
36 Put the plugs (24 and 23 in position, inserting aluminium joints.
37 Put the filter (21) in position, then the plug (22).
38 Engage the assembly of the needle valve (19), the float (17), then fix with the pin (18).
TOOLS
39 To prepare the cover (1) :
a) Fit on the rod (9) of the piston (7) the steel washer (14) and the rubber washer (13).
b) Engage the rod (9) thus prepared in the cover (1).
c) Engage the rod (9) in the lever (11), fitting the spring (12) and the screw (10).
d) Fit the pin (8) and open out the ends.
40 To fit the cover (1) :
a) Put the connecting rod (3) in position and secure with the retaining clip (31).
b) Put the connecting rod (6) in position on the lever (15)
c) Fit the float chamber paper joint. Offer up the float chamber cover (1) and lower vertically in position on the
accelerator pump (7).
41 Couple up the connecting rod (6) and fix with the retaining clip (4).
42 Couple up the connecting rod (3) and fix with the retaining clip (37).
43 Put the fixing screws (2) in position and tighten (spring washers under the heads).
44 To regulate the closing of the butterfly of the 1st body :
a) Unscrew the locknut (32 and the screw (33) until the butterfly is totally closed.
b) Bring the screw (33) into contact with the stop (34) and then tighten the screw (33) exactly three quarters of a
turn.
Tighten the locknut (32)

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-4 : Work on the carburettor controls. Op. DS 142-4 109
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a control rod.
Removal.
4 Withdraw the rod from underneath the car.
Assembly.
6 Cars produced before March 1956.
In the case of replacement of the outside rod, press down the accelerator slightly in order to obtain an engine speed of between 950 and 1,000
r.p.m.
Do not work on the rod, engine side.
Replacement of a control relay.
Assembly.
10 Adjust the clutch re-engagement control (see Op. DS 314-0).
Replacement of an accelerated idling control assembly.
Removal (cars produced before January 1959):

On these cars, it is possible to replace the control assembly, without replacing the feed pipe.
Assembly.
23 Bleed the brake system (see Op. DS 453-0).
Replacement of the accelerated idling control joints (cars produced before January 1959) :
27 It is preferable to fit the new type accelerated idling control assembly.
Replacement of the accelerated idling control joints (cars produced since January 1959) :
In order to carry out this operation it is preferable to remove the control assembly (see this operation paragraphs 11 to 16) and then proceed
as for overhauling (see Op. DS 142-6).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF AN ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Removal.
1 Place the car on a lift or over a pit. Unscrew the nut from the screw fixing the lever on the pedal spindle.
Disengage the accelerator pedal spindle from the bearing by pressing on the end of the spindle, if necessary, use
a small bronze drift. Remove the plain washer and the rubber washer fitted between the bearing and the pedal
spindle lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
Assembly.
2 Offer up the accelerator pedal spindle (previously greased with graphite grease) in the bearing.
Hold the pedal in the raised position.
From underneath the car, fit on the pedal spindle, the rubber washer, the plain washer and the return lever.
Fit the lever fixing screw and tighten the nut (plain and spring washers). Lower the car to the ground . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
3 Disconnect the carburettor air intake pipe and make sure that the throttle butterflies open and close correctly.
REPLACEMENT OF A CONTROL ROD

Removal.
4 Place the car on a lift or over a pit. Unlock the locknut and remove the adjusting nut and the locknut from the rod.
Remove the nut fixing the rod on the pedal lever and remove the rod from the lever. Withdraw the rod from
underneath the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm spanner
7 mm box spanner
Assembly.
5 Engage the rod from underneath the car and provisionally fit the adjusting nut (to the upper part). Make sure that
the rubber distance piece is fitted on the fixing trunnion. Connect the rod to the trunnion, insert a plain
washer, tighten the fixing nut moderately and tighten the locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm spanner
7 mm box spanner
6 Lower to the ground. Disconnect the carburettor air intake pipe and set the adjusting nut of the rod in such a
position to enable the throttle butterflies to open and close correctly.
NOTE – (Cars produced before March 1956).
In the case of replacement of the rod (16) engine side (see Pl. 46, fig. 1), proceed as indicated above.
In the case of replacement of the outer rod (17) (see Pl. 46, fig. 1), proceed as follows :
Press the accelerator pedal down until a resistance is felt on the pedal; hold the pedal in this position; the
engine should then be between 950 and 1000 r.p.m. If necessary, work on the adjusting nut of the rod (17).
On no account, work on the rod (16), engine side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm spanner
7 mm box spanner
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CONTROL RELAY

7 Disconnect the accelerator control return spring (22) and the spring (1) of the clutch re-engagement control
from the control relay.
Disconnect the carburettor control rod from the carburettor and disconnect the control rod or rods from the
relay. Disengage the relay, if necessary, remove the ball joint from the relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
Refitting (see Pl. 46).

8 Fit the control relay and the ball joint (the ball joint previously being smeared with graphite grease).
Make sure that the ball joint is located in the cylindrical part of the bore of the relay. Connect the relay control
to the carburettor. Connect to the relay, the control rod or rods, the accelerator return spring (22) and the
spring (1) of the clutch re-engagement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 mm spanners
10 Adjust the clutch re-engagement control (see Op. DS 314-0).
REPLACEMENT OF AN ACCELERATED IDLING CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Removal (cars produced before January 1959).
11 Release the pressure in the front brake system (spanner 2141-T, see Pl. 143, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2141-T
12 Disconnect the clip retaining the slow running pipe to the rear support of the left-hand brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
13 Disconnect the clip retaining the slow running pipe to the closing plate of the inlet manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
14 Disconnect the union of the slow running pipe, from the left-hand brake unit (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see
Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2221-T or
Spanner 2219-T
15 Remove the screw fixing the accelerated idling control assembly support on the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm ring spanner
16 Remove the accelerated idling control assembly and pipe from the car. Do not mislay the washers fitted between
the support and the carburettor.
TOOLS
Removal (cars produced since January 1959).
NOTE – On these cars, it is possible to replace the accelerated idling control without replacing the pipe.
17 Release the pressure in the front brake system (spanner 2141-T, see Pl. 143, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2141-T
18 Disconnect the connecting pipe between the left-hand brake unit and the accelerated idling control from the
accelerated idling control (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig.. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
Spanner 2221-T
19 Remove the screw fixing the accelerated idling control on its steel support and remove the accelerated idling
control. Do not mislay the washers fitted between the support and the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
Refitting.
NOTE – On the cars produced before January 1959, it is preferable to fit a new type of accelerated idling control.
20 Offer up the new accelerated idling control, inserting the washers between the carburettor and the support.
Place the assembly in position at the top of the slots. Tighten the fixing screws (plain and spring washers
under the heads of the screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm ring spanner
21 Connect the feed pipe to the control assembly (cars produced since January 1959) (spanner 2219-T, see Pl..72, fig.4). Spanner 2219-T
22 To fit the feed pipe (cars produced before January 1959) :

a) Put the rubber guides and fixing plates on the pipe.
b) Offer up the pipe, connect the unions of the control assembly and the left-hand brake unit (spanner 2219-T,
see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T
c) Fix the rear clip fixing the feed pipe to the inlet manifold closing plate (spring washer under the heads of the
screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
d) Fix the front clip fixing the feed pipe to he rear support of the left-hand brake unit.
Insert a lockwasher or place a washer under the head of the fixing screw. Lock the two upper fixing screws
of the brake units, using iron locking wire in such a manner to avoid rotation in the unscrewing direction, or
turn over the lockwashers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
e) Make sure that the rubber guide for the pipe is in position in fixing the clip on the left-hand brake unit.
23 Start the engine and bleed the brake system. Make sure there are no leaks from the unions.

TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF THE ACCELERATED IDLING CONTROL SEALS (cars produced before March 1959).
Dismantling.
25 Remove the coils and bracket assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
26 Disconnect the low pressure pipe assembly from the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm spanner
27 Disengage the return spring engagement plate.
Disengage the dust cover from the body of the control. Remove the cap. During the unscrewing, hold the
support with a flat spanner.
Remove the seal from the cap. Remove the piston from the cap and remove the ring seal from the piston . . . . 28 mm spanner
24 mm spanner or
24 mm angled ring
spanner
NOTE – It is preferable to fit a new type of accelerated idling control.
28 Clean the parts with alcohol only. Do not use trichlorethylene.
Assembly.
29 Fit the seal, previously smeared with fluid on the piston.
NOTE – In the case where slight scratches are found on the piston, a light rubbing with No. 600 abrasive paper
smeared with alcohol is permitted. Clean and blow with compressed air.
Engage the piston in the bore of the cap.
Fit the ring seal on the cap. Fit the assembly in the body of the control. Tighten the cap (hold the support with
a flat spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 mm spanner
24 mm spanner or
24 mm angled ring
spanner
30 Connect the low pressure pipe assembly to the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm spanner
31 Offer up the coils and bracket assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
32 Bleed the control (see Op. DS 453-0). Put the control under pressure by pressing on the brake pedal; maintain this
pressure for a few moments and check for leakage from the control.
33 Put the control lever in its normal position and put the dust cover in position on the body and on the collar of the
control lever. Refit the attachment plate and return spring.
REPLACEMENT OF THE ACCELERATED IDLING CONTROL SEALS (cars produced since March 1959).
35 In order to carry out this operation, it is preferable to remove the control assembly (see this operation. Paragraphs
11 to 16) and proceed as for overhauling (see Op. DS 142-6).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 142-6 : Overhauling an accelerated idling control assembly (cars produced since January 1959). 114
TOOLS
DISMANTLING (see Pl. 28, fig. 1 and 2).
1 Remove the support (14) of the spring (13) from the body of the control assembly.
2 Remove the support (14) and the spring (13) from the lever (26).
3 Remove the adjusting screw (15), the spring (27) and the washer (28), from the lever (26).
4 Disengage the dust cover (21) from the cap (22) and from the lever (26).
5 Unscrew the cap (22) holding the assembly by its support and remove the assembly of the cylinder (23) and the
piston (24). Disengage the seal (29) between the cylinder and the body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-28 mm spanners
6 Disengage the piston (24) from the cylinder (23). Remove the seal (25) from the cylinder (23) using a small
brass wire hook.
7 Remove the bleed screw (30), from the body of the control assembly.
8 Clean the parts with alcohol only. Do not use trichlorethylene.
ASSEMBLY see Pl. 28, fig. 1 and 2).
NOTE – In the case of slight scratches being found on the piston, a light rubbing with No. 600 abrasive paper
smeared in alcohol is permitted. Clean with alcohol and blow with compressed air.
When refitting the parts, they should be smeared with hydraulic fluid..
9 Put the ring seal (25) in position and fit the piston (24) in the cylinder (23).
10 Put the cylinder piston in the cap (22), fit the seal (29) in the body of the control assembly and screw the cap (22) 27-28 mm spanners
on the body.
11 Put the dust cover (21) in position on the cap (22) and the lever (26).
12 Fit the lever (26), the washer (28), the spring (27) and the adjusting screw (15).
13 Put the spring (13) in position on its support (14). Engage the support in the body of the assembly.
14 Fit the bleed screw (30).

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 171-1 : Replacement of an air filter-silencer. Op. DS 171-1 115
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Loosen the fixing clip on the air filter-silencer of the tube between the air-filter-silencer and the carburettor.
Disconnect the tube from the air filter-silencer.
2 Remove the air filter-silencer fixing nuts. Disengage the air filter-silencer .............................. 12-17 mm box spanners
ASSEMBLY
3 Offer up the air filter-silencer. Connect the tube between the air filter-silencer to the air filter-silencer.
4 Tighten the air filter-silencer fixing nuts (spring washers). Tighten the clip fixing the tube on the air filter-silencer. 12-17 mm box spanners
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 171-3 : Work on the air filter-silencer. Op. DS 171-3 116
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A VOKES AIR FILTER-SILENCER
Dismantling (see Pl. 28 fig. 4)

NOTE– It is important to clean the air-filter-silencer every 3700 miles (6000 km) (the car running on normal roads).
1 Unscrew the wing nut 18, remove the cover (19), remove the interior tube (21) complete with the filter element (20),
Remove the filter element (20) from the inner tube (21).
2 Clean the parts. Hold the filter element vertically and release the dust covers by tapping gently with the hand on
the ends.
Assembly (see Pl. 28, fig. 4)
3 Fit the filter element (20). Make sure that the felt joints (22 and 23) on the inner tube assembly (21) are stuck in
position. If not, restick with EC 847 paste, sold by Société Minnesota de France, 135, boulevard Serrurier,
Paris 9e. Tel BOL 71-79 and BOT 42-80. Engage these parts in the body of the air filter-silencer. Put
the cover (19) in position together with its felt joint (24). Position the rear fixing plate (25) in relation to
the front fixing plate (26) and tighten the wing nut (18) (plain washer).
NOTE – for efficient operation the filter element should be under pressure at the two ends on the felt joints
(22 and 24). Make sure that the element is sufficiently compressed by the cover, if not, add a second felt
washer (22) and stick it to the first one with EC 847 paste.
OVERHAULING A MIOFILTRE AIR FILTER-SILENCER
Dismantling (see Pl. 28, fig. 3)

NOTE– It is important to clean the air-filter-silencer every 3700 miles (6000 km) (the car running on normal roads).
4 Unscrew the wing nut (1) and remove the shake-proof washer (2).
Remove the front cover (3) together with its felt joint (4) and disengage the filter element (5) with the cork
joint (9).
5 Remove the rear cover and tube assembly (6) from the air filter-silencer body (7).
6 Clean the parts. Wash the filter element (5) in petrol. Brush the filter element (5) then blow with compressed air.
Following this, soak the element in engine oil and leave to drain.
TOOLS
Assembly.
7 Make sure that the felt joint (8) for the rear cover is stuck in position. If not, restick (EC 847 paste, see
paragraph 3, this operation). Engage the rear cover and tube assembly (6) in the body of the air filter-silencer
(7). Put the front cover (3) in position together with its felt joint (4).
8 Position the rear fixing plate (10) in relation to the front fixing plate (11). Tighten the win nut (1) inserting the
shake-proof washer (2).
Make sure that the filter element (5) is applied correctly to the felt joint (4); if not, add a second felt washer
and stick it to the first one with paste (paste EC 847).
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Disconnect the inlet and outlet pipes from the pump.
2 Remove the nuts from the pump fixing studs ..................................................... 14 mm box spanner
3 Remove the pump and the cork joint.
REFITTING
4 Fit the cork joint and put the pump in position. Fit the front nut, without tightening, to hold the pump on the
crankcase (serrated washer).
Fit the rear nut (shake-proof washer).
Tighten the nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
5 Connect the rubber pipes. Tighten the clips.

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 173-3 : Overhauling a petrol pump. Op. DS 173-3 119
PARTICULAR POINTS
Overhauling a GUIOT pump.
The seats of the inlet and outlet valves are set in the cover of the pump. In case of poor functioning of the valves it will be necessary to
replace the pump.
The diaphragms should be fitted dry (important).
Immerse the pump in a container filled with clean petrol, no leak should occur when compressed air is injected through the feed pipe at a
pressure of 11/2 p.s.i. to 41/2 p.s.i. (100 to 300 g/cm2).
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A GUIOT PETROL PUMP
1 Remove the filter cover (1), disengage the filter (2). Extract the cover joint (3).
2 Disengage the upper part of the pump (4) from the body (5). Drive out the pin (6) from the operating lever.
Disengage the diaphragm assembly (7) and the push-rod (8).
3 Unscrew the nut (9), withdraw the serrated washer.

Disengage the rod (8), the upper support washer (10), the set of 4 diaphragms (7), the lower support washer (11),
the joint (12), the spring (13), the cup (14), the joint (15), the cap pressure washer (16) and the sealing cap (17). 10 mm spanner
NOTE – The seats of the inlet and outlet valves are set in the cover of the pump, in cases of poor functioning of
the valves it will be necessary to replace the pump.
4 Clean the parts.
Assembling (see Pl. 29).
5 Put the sealing cap (17) on the push-rod (8).

Then place on the rod (8) in the following order; the cap pressure washer (16), the joint (15), the cup (14),
the joint (12), the spring (13), the end with the large diameter on the washer (16). Fit the lower support washer
(11), the set of 4 diaphragm washers (7), the upper support washer (10), a serrated washer and screw on the
nut (9) without tightening.
6 Offer up the diaphragm and push-rod assembly in the pump body.

Fit the operation lever and press in the pin (6) and peen it lightly.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 173-3 : Overhauling a petrol pump. Op. DS 173-3 120
TOOLS
7 Make sure that the screw holes in the diaphragm correspond with the threaded holes in the pump body, tighten
the nut (9).
Connect the upper part of the pump (4) to the body (5). The diaphragms should be fitted dry without any
hermetic or similar product.
Tighten the screws without inserting washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm spanner
8 Put the filter cover joint (3) into position. Fit the filter element (2). Fit the filter cover (1), tighten the yoke
knurled nut.
9 Check for leaks (see paragraphs 10 and onwards).
INSPECTION FOR LEAKS (see Pl. 30).
10 Block up the outlet to the carburettor by means of a plug. Fit a rubber tube on the inlet pipe.
11 Completely immerse the pump in a receptacle containing clean petrol.
12 Blow compressed air at a pressure of 11/2 p.s.i. to 41/2 p.s.i. (100 to 300 g/cm2) through the rubber tube. At first,
this can cause bubbling, due to the movement of the diaphragm.
Hold the pressure for a short time.
If air bubbles continue to escape through the opening for the operating lever at “a”, there is a leakage
through the diaphragms and they must be replaced.
If air bubbles escape between the faces of the cover and the body or at the screws holding the cover to the
body at “b”, the faces are defective or the screws are not tightened down sufficiently.
If air bubbles continue to escape between the filter cover and the faces of the cover at “c”, the joint is
defective or the filter cover is insufficiently tightened.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 174-1 : Replacement a petrol feed pipe. Op. DS 174-1 121
PARTICULAR POINTS
In order to avoid leakage from the rear rubber pipe, fit two Ligarex clips as indicated in Pl. 29 fig. 3. Tighten the clips moderately in order
to avoid deformation of the nylon pipe.
TOOLS
REMOVAL.
1 Put the front of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Remove the right-hand front wing and the
side protection panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking bracket 2505-T
8-12-14 mm box
spanners
2 Remove the finishing panels, under the sidemember.
3 Unscrew the fixing screws and remove the rubber protectors from the straps securing the petrol feed pipe to the
right-hand sidemember and panel and front crossmember under the engine (lower part). Withdraw the pipe
from the straps .......................................................................... 8 mm box spanner
4 Remove the rear seat and squab. Remove the petrol tank cover plate, unstick the trimming from the sidemembers. 12 mm box spanner
5 Remove the petrol feed pipe together with the rubber pipe from the tank and from the opening on the rear part of
the sidemember.
6 Remove the rubber connecting pipe to tank from petrol feed pipe. Disconnect the front rubber union from the
petrol pump and remove the union from the feed pipe.
7 Disconnect the front part of the feed pipe from the front crossmember under the engine from the right-hand side-
member and from the side panel.
8 Disengage the pipe from the sidemember, by pulling towards the front.
ASSEMBLY
9 Close the front and rear openings in the petrol feed pipe. Drain the petrol tank by the right-hand drain plug . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
10 Engage the rear part of the pipe in the hole in the closing panel, then fit the pipe in the straps in the sidemember.
11 With the narrow part of the feed pipe towards the rear, slide the rubber connecting pipe towards the front of
the narrow part of the feed pipe, with the rear end of the rubber pipe 370 mm from the rear end of the feed pipe.
Use talc only for sliding the pipes.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 173-3 : Replacement a petrol feed pipe. Op. DS 174-1 122
TOOLS
12 Insert the rear end of the feed pipe in the petrol tank and couple the rear end of the rubber pipe in the union of
the tank. Cut the rear end of the feed pipe obliquely close to the bottom of the tank and fit the drain plug
(insert the joint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
13 Refit the petrol tank cover plate. Tighten the fixing screws (plain washers under the heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
IMPORTANT NOTE - In order to avoid leakage from the rubber connecting pipe to the tank, make sure that
there is a tight joint between the rubber pipe and the tank and between the rubber pipe and the nylon pipe by
using two Ligarex clips, fitted as shown on Pl. 29, fig. 3. Tighten the clips moderately, in order to avoid
deformation of the nylon pipe (pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2). Pliers 2483-T
Paste the siderail trimming on the petrol tank cover plate (Glutafix T Paste, sold by Establissements Bessier,
125, rue de Reuilly, Paris 12e).
Refit the rear seat and squab ............................................................... Pliers 2483-T
14 Engage the front part of the pipe in the opening. on the closing panel.
Put the feed pipe under the clips on the right-hand siderail. Insert the rubber protector. Tighten the strap
fixing screws .......................................................................... 8 mm box spanner
15 Fit the finishing panels on the side rail. Tighten the screws (plain washers under the heads).
16 Place the front part of the feed pipe against the closing panels, then behind the front axle arm bracket against the
sidemember and in the front crossmember under the engine. Then insert the pipe through the opening on the
left-hand side of the lower part of the crossmember.
17 Place in position the rubber coupling sleeve to the petrol pump on the front end of the feed pipe. Fit the pipe in
the rubber sleeve using talc to facilitate the work. Connect the sleeve to the petrol pump.
18 Place the feed pipe in the fixing straps on the front closing panel of the sidemember, the front crossmember under
the engine and insert the rubber protectors. Tighten the strap fixing screws .......................... 8 mm box spanner
19 Fit the side protection panel and the right-hand front wing. Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T,
see Pl. 168).
Fill the petrol tank and prime the petrol pump using the hand control ................................ Jacking bracket 2505-T
8-12-14 mm box
spanners
DS 19 OPERATION No. 174-3 Repair of a flexible feed pipe or a suspension return pipe. Op. DS 174-3 123
TOOLS
NOTE - This repair can be carried out by fitting a sleeve on the pipe system (petrol feed or suspension return) or
by replacing one of the unions (return).
If two sleeves have to be fitted on the same pipe, they must be about 800 mm apart in order to retain the
flexibility of the pipe assembly.
The flexible pipes and Rilsan unions are sold by our Spare Parts Department.
Petrol system, pipe dia. 6 x 8, length 1 metre No. DS 391-151
Suspension return, pipe dia. 8 x 10, length 1 metre No. DS 391-152
Returns from the height correctors (since January 1957),
pipe dia. 3 x 4, length 470 mm No. DM 211-14a
length900mm No. DM 211-14
‘T” union for front right-hand suspension cylinder return No. DS 391-148
‘Y’ union for rear right-hand suspension cylinder return No. DS 391-149
T’ union for securing return rubber pipe to petrol tank No. DS 391-146
NOTE - The unions are sold complete with 60 mm pipe on each outlet. Also obtain a bottle (60 cm3) Rilsan
glue, sold by Société Boyriven, 37 bis, rue de Villiers, Neuilly-sur-Seine (Seine). Tel. MAI 36-11.
1 After trimming the pipes, remove the polish from the ends of the pipes for a length of approximately 90 mm or
remove the polish from the union outlets using No. 600 abrasive paper.
2 Carefully remove all grease from the rubbed down ends, with trichlorethylene, also on the sleeve.
3 Heat the Rilsan paste in a bath and bring it to a temperature of 60° C. Do not heat beyond this temperature.
This operation is essential to reduce the hardening period.
4 IMPORTANT NOTE - Rilsan paste attacks the skin and must not be touched with the fingers.
Rilsan paste destroys the bristles of nylon or Rilsan brushes; use a wooden stick or spatula.
a) Smear the ground ends of the pipes and the inside of the unions with paste.
b) Let the parts dry for a few minutes.
c) Insert the ends of the pipes or the union outlets in the sleeves.
d) Leave the assembly for 3 to 4 hours to dry before using the repaired pipe.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS DS 175-1: Work on the petrol tank. Op. DS 175-1 124
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a petrol tank. in order to avoid leakage from the rubber pipe between the feed pipe to the pump and the petrol tank, fit two
Ligarex clips as indicated in Pl. 29 fig. 3. Tighten the clips moderately in order to avoid deformation of the nylon pipe.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A PETROL TANK
Removal.
1 Drain the tank by the right and left-hand plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 mm box spanners
2 Lift and remove the rear squab. Remove the rear seat. Remove the petrol tank cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
3 Disconnect the flexible air vent hose from the tank. Close the orifices of the hose and tank.
4 Remove the rear closing panel under the right-hand sidemember.
Remove the fixing strap of the rear flexible pipe of the feed pipe from the tank. Close the orifices of the pipe
and tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
5 Remove the right-hand rear wing. Remove the right-hand rear side protection panel. Carefully clean the area
where work is to be carried out round the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the tank.
Remove the front collar from the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the tank.
Disconnect the flexible pipe from the tank. Close the orifice of the tank and the pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
14 mm box spanner
6 Disconnect the battery negative cable. Disconnect the leads from the petrol gauge tank unit.
7 Turn back the clips securing the transverse packings of the tank and remove the packings.
8 Unscrew the fixing screws of the tank fixing straps and disengage the straps and the rear rubber packings.
Remove the tank.
9 To strip the tank :
Remove the petrol gauge tank unit.
Remove the rubber sound deadening blocks.
Remove the tank protection packings.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 175-1 Work on the petrol tank. Op. DS 175-1 125
TOOLS
Refitting.
10 To assemble the tank
a) Place the petrol gauge tank unit in position, inserting a rubber joint.
Tighten the fixing screws (fibre washers under the heads).
Fit and tighten the drain plugs, inserting copper joints ........................................... 12-21 mm box spanners
b) Fit the glue (Bostick) the rubber sound deadening blocks in position at the front and rear of the tank (one
block about 100 mm from the left-hand end of the tank, one block in the centre and one block about 150 mm
from the right-hand end).
Glue the rubber bands, under the tank (Bostick).
11 Put the tank in position, insert the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the tank on the petrol tank filler
neck channel.
12 Glue the tank protection packings in position under the fixing straps (Bostick). Place the fixing straps in
position, insert the rear rubber packings, tighten the strap fixing screws.
13 Place the transverse packings of the tank in position, turn down the retaining clips on the packings.
14 Place the Ligarex clip on the front part of the flexible pipe, between the filler pipe and tank (pliers 2483-T,
see Pl. 17, fig. 2).
Fit the side protection panel. Fit the wing ..................................................... Pliers 2483-
8 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
14 mm box s
15 Connect the rear end of the flexible pipe of the petrol pump feed pipe at about 370 mm from the rear end of the
pipe. Insert the feed pipe in the tank and connect the flexible pipe to the filler neck.
IMPORTANT NOTE - In order to avoid leakage from the rubber connection to the tank, make sure that the joints
between the rubber pipe and the tank and between the rubber pipe and the nylon hose are tight by using two
Ligarex clips, fitted as indicated on Pl. 29, fig. 3. Tighten the clips moderately, in order to avoid deformation of
the nylon pipe (pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2) ................................................ Pliers 2483-T
16 Connect the flexible air vent hose to the tank. Fit a Ligarex clip (pliers 2483-T) .......................... Pliers 2483-T
17 Fit the clip to the rear flexible pipe of the petrol pump feed pipe. Tighten the fixing screws (spring washer
under the head).
Fit the sidemember closing panel. Tighten the fixing screws (plain washers under the heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
18 Fit the petrol tank cover plate. Tighten the fixing screws (plain washers under the heads).
Glue the sidemember trimming on the petrol tank cover plate (Glutafix T, sold by Etablissements Beissier,
125, rue de Reuilly, Paris 12e).
Fit the rear squab and seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A FILLER PIPE
Removal.
19 Remove the right-hand rear wing and the side protection panel. Glean the working area carefully ........... 8- 14 mm box spanners
20 Remove the rear clip of the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the petrol tank. Remove the rear clip of the
flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the air pipe of the tank.
21 Remove the clip of the filler pipe from the wheel arch panel ........................................ 8 mm box spanner
22 Remove the collar joint between the filler pipe and the wheel arch connecting panel.
NOTE - It is unnecessary to remove the filler cap from the pipe.
23 Disconnect the flexible pipe between the air pipe and the filler pipe from the pipe.
Disconnect the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the tank from the pipe.
Remove the pipe towards the front.
Refitting.
24 Put the filler pipe in position and engage in the flexible connection pipe of the tank.
Engage the flexible air pipe on the filler pipe channel.
Put the collar joint in position between the filler pipe and the wheel arch connecting panel.
25 Fit the fixing collar of the filler pipe on the wheel arch. Tighten the fixing nuts (plain and spring washers) .... 8 mm box spanner
26 Fit a Ligarex clip on the flexible pipe between the filler pipe and the tank and on the flexible pipe between the
filler pipe and the tank air pipe (pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pliers 2483-T
27 Fit the side protection panel (plain and spring washers under the fixing nuts). Fit the wing ................ 8-14 mm box spanners
REPLACEMENT OF AN AIR PIPE AND AN AIR VENT PIPE

Removal.
28 Lift and remove the rear squab. Remove the rear seat.
29 Remove the petrol tank cover plate.

Disconnect the flexible tank connecting pipe from the air pipe .................................... 12 mm box spanner
TOOLS
30 Remove the right-hand rear wing and the side protection panel. Clean the working area carefully . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 mm box spanners
31 Remove the tank air pipe and air vent pipe fixing collars on the wheel arch.
Turn back the clips retaining the air vent pipe on the wheel arch. Remove the pipe and the rubber protection
rings from the pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
32 Remove the fixing screws of the rear vent pipe cup and remove the rear cup and gasket. Remove the gasket from
the front cup.
33 Disconnect the flexible pipe between the air pipe and the filler pipe of the tank from the air pipe. Remove the
air pipe and air vent pipe assembly from the rear of the car.
NOTE - On cars produced before February 1958, the air pipe and the air vent pipe (metallic) are assembled with a
rubber sleeve.
Assembly.
34 Engage the front end of the air pipe in the hole in the rear closing panel of the right-hand sidemember.
Make sure that the rubber guide rings are in position.
Connect the air pipe to the flexible pipe to the tank. Fit a Ligarex clip (pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2) .... Pliers 2483-T
35 Connect the rear end of the air pipe to the flexible connection pipe of the filler pipe of the tank. Fit a Ligarex clip
(pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pliers 2483-T
36 Fit the air pipe fixing clips on the wheel arch panel. Tighten the nuts (plain and spring washers) ............ 8 mm box spanner
37 Place the rear cups of the air vent pipe in position and insert the rubber joints.
Tighten the nut moderately on the fixing screw (plain washer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
38 Fit the tank fixing collar, tighten the nut (plain and spring washer).
Fit the rubber protectors for the air vent pipe, turn down the retaining clips .......................... 8 mm box spanner
39 Fit the side protection panel, insert the rubber protectors for the air vent pipe. Tighten the screws and nuts
fixing the panel (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14mm box spanners
Glue the siderail trimming on the cover plate (Glutafix T, sold by Etablissements Beissier, 125, rue de Reuilly,
Paris 12e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
41 Replace the rear seat and squab.

TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A PETROL GAUGE TANK UNIT

Removal.
42 Lift and remove the rear squab. Remove the rear seat.
43 Remove the petrol tank cover plate ............................................................. 12 mm box spanner
44 Disconnect the negative battery cable, disconnect the leads from the tank unit terminals.
45 Remove the tank unit fixing screws. Remove the tank unit complete with float. Remove the rubber joint between
the tank unit and the petrol gauge.
Refitting.
46 Place the rubber joint for the tank unit on the petrol tank.
Insert the tank unit float into the tank and place the tank unit in position. Tighten the fixing screws (fibre
joints under the heads).
47 Connect the leads to the tank unit terminals. Connect the battery cable (switch on the ignition) and make sure
that the petrol gauge functions.
Glue the siderail trimming on the cover plate (Glutafix T, sold by Etablissements Beissier, 125, rue de Reuilly,
Paris, 12e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
49 Replace the rear seat and squab.

DS 19 DS 180-1 Work on the exhaust system. Op. DS 180-1 129
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF AN EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Removal.
1 Release the pressure in suspension system. Unscrew the bleed screw of the pressure control valve and place the
manual height control lever in the low position.
2 Remove the air filter-silencer assembly and pipe between the filter and carburettor ....................... 12-17 mm box spanners
3 Remove the suspension sphere from the front right-hand suspension cylinder (strap wrench 2223-T, see Pl. 93,
fig. 1).
Close the openings of the suspension sphere and the suspension cylinder (see Pl. 94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Strap wrench 2223-T
4 Remove the exhaust manifold fixing screws. Remove the screen ..................................... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
5 Remove the flange coupling the downpipe to the expansion chamber .................................. 12 mm box spanner
6 Unscrew the manifold fixing nuts. Remove the manifold screen retaining clips .......................... 12 mm box spanner
7 Remove the exhaust manifold. Remove the gaskets.
Refitting.
8 Place the manifold in position and insert the copper and asbestos gaskets.
9 Fit the manifold screen retaining clips. The longest upper clip is fitted at the front.
Tighten the fixing nuts of the manifold and the manifold screen retaining clips (spring washers under the heads). 12 mm box spanner
10 Unscrew the fixing nuts of the collar securing the expansion chamber ................................. 12 mm box spanner
11 Put the flange, coupling the expansion chamber to the exhaust manifold in position. Tighten the nuts (spring
washers under the heads).
Tighten the nuts fixing the collar, securing the expansion chamber ................................ 12 mm box spanner
12 Put the manifold screen in position. Tighten the fixing screws and nuts (plain washer) .................... 12 mm box spanner
13 Fit the suspension sphere on the right-hand front suspension cylinder.
14 Fit the air filter-silencer assembly and pipe between the filter and carburettor (spring washers under the nuts
fixing the air filter-silencer) ............................................................... 12-17 mm box spanners
15 Start the engine. Tighten the pressure control valve bleed screw. Put the suspension system under pressure.
Check the joint between the suspension sphere and suspension cylinder for leakage.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF AN EXPANSION CHAMBER
Removal.
16 Remove the nuts of the collar fixing the expansion chamber on its support and remove the collar ............ 12 mm box spanner
17 Remove the nuts of the fixing screws of the half collar assemblies fixing the expansion chamber and silencer to
the manifold.
Remove the expansion chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Refitting.
18 Offer up the expansion chamber. Place the half collar assemblies in position, fixing the expansion chamber and
silencer to the manifold, the head of the screws on the right-hand countersunk side.
Screw on the nuts, without tightening (spring washers).
19 Fit the collar fixing the expansion chamber to the support. Screw on the nuts, without tightening (plain washers).
20 Tighten the nuts of the half collar assembly and the nuts of the collar fixing the pipe to the support .......... 12 mm box spanner
REPLACEMENT OF AN EXHAUST SILENCER

Removal.
21 Put the front of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Remove the spare wheel and the air
deflection panel ......................................................................... Jacking bracket 2505-T
12 mm box spanner
22 Remove the half collars fixing the silencer to the expansion chamber .................................. 12 mm box spanner
23 Disconnect the silencer outlet pipes from the exhaust pipes ......................................... 12 mm box spanner
24 Disconnect the silencer from the flexible support .................................................. 12-14 mm box spanners
25 Remove the silencer from the joint between the pipes.
Refitting.
26 Offer up the silencer. Connect the outlet pipe and insert the joints .................................... 12 mm box spanner
27 Fit the silencer on the flexible support .......................................................... 12-14 mm box spanners
28 Fit the half collars fixing the silencer to the expansion chamber, the head of the screws on the right-hand
countersunk side. Tighten the fixing nuts (spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
29 Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168). Fit the air deflection panel, tighten the fixing
screws (plain and spring washers). Fit the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacking bracket 2505-T
12 mm box spanner
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF THE EXHAUST OUTLET PIPES

Removal.
30 Put the car on stands or on a lift (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) ................................. Jacking bracket 2505-T
31 Remove the fixing screws of the rubber straps under the body and remove the steel plates. During this operation,
support the rear of the exhaust pipes ......................................................... 12 mm box spanner
32 Disconnect the exhaust outlet from the silencer and remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
33 To strip the pipes remove the rubber buffers, the half collar assemblies, the rear collars and the front flange . . . . 12 mm box spanner
On cars produced before February 1958, untighten the collar and remove the outlet pipe fishtail. Disconnect
the rubber straps, the half collars and the front flange.
Refitting.
34 To assemble the pipes
a) Engage the front flange on the pipes.
b) Make sure that the steel distance pieces are in the rubber straps. Fit the fixing collars, screw on the fixing
nuts of the collars, without tightening them (spring washers).
Fit the rubber buffers ..................................................................... 12 mm box spanner
35 Engage the exhaust outlet pipes on the silencer. Insert the joints.
Support the rear of the pipes and tighten the flange fixing screws ................................... 12 mm box spanner
36 Fit and tighten the fixing screws of the rubber straps under the body, make sure that the distance pieces are in
position: insert the steel plates (spring washers under the heads of the screws).
37 Tighten the nuts of the rear collar fixing screws (cars produced since February 1958).
Fit the outlet pipe fishtail, tighten the collar (cars produced before February 1958) ..................... 12 mm box spanner
38 Check the clearance between the exhaust pipes and the body.
39 Lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) .................................... Jacking bracket 2505-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 211-0 Ignition adjustments. Op. DS 211-0 132
PARTICULAR POINTS
Adjustment of ignition advance.

In order to carry out this operation it is necessary to set the ignition control in the midway position. After adjustment, do not forget to
remove the rod from the flywheel.
Adjustment of the contact breaker.
Adjust the synchronisation of the breaker.

The angle should be equal to 90 ± I and working on the contact gap (0.3 to 05 mm). When the adjustment is obtained, make sure that the
average of the two gaps is 04 mm.
Bench Test of a contact breaker.

The centrifugal advance should be between 3˚ 30’ and 7˚ 30’ at 1,000 r.p.m. and 10˚ 30’ and 15˚ 30’ at 1,500 r.p.m. On an adjustable
contact breaker, one should obtain sparks of 12 mm at 500 r.p.m. and 5 mm at 2,000 r.p.m.
TOOLS
ADJUSTMENT OF IGNITION ADVANCE
1 Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the engaged position by pushing forward and then locking in that
position by pushing towards the top. The clutch is then in the engaged position.
2 Insert a 6 mm diameter locating pin into the special hole in the clutch bellhousing (left side).
NOTE - This hole is partly covered by the dynamo.
3 Turn the engine slowly using the starting handle, until the pin falls into the recess in the flywheel. In this
position, the engine is at the firing point (10˚ on flywheel).
4 Fit the lead from a test lamp on the condenser terminal (red terminal, blue cable) of the lower coil, the lamp
bracket connected to earth.
5 Switch on the ignition. Turn the ignition control until the distributor is in the midway position, to do this:
a) Put the control in the ‘retard” position.
b) By counting the clicks, set the lever to the middle position of its effective movement.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 211-0 : Ignition adjustments. Op. DS 211-0 133
TOOLS
6 Untighten the screw fixing the distributor. Find the point at which the contact breaker points open, at this exact
moment the lamp should light. Tighten the fixing screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
NOTE - This operation is made easier by removing the coil and bracket assembly.
(Let the assembly rest on the suspension sphere).
7 Switch off the ignition, remove the test lamp.
IMPORTANT - Remove the locating pin. Move the auxiliary clutch control lever in the original disengaged position.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTACT BREAKER (with two breakers).
To adjust the synchronisation of the breaker (bench test).
8 Make sure that the contact points are in good condition. Adjust the gap to 0.4 mm. Use a set of very clean feeler
gauges, so that no trace of grease is deposited on the contact points.
9 Mount the contact breaker on a bench tester comprising a graduated scale and a pointer..
Connect a 6 volt test lamp between the positive terminal of a battery and one of the breakers. The negative
terminal of the battery connected to the earth of the bench tester.
10 Turn the contact breaker by its drive in a clockwise direction until the lamp lights, then continue turning until
the moment that the light goes out. Turn the graduated scale to bring zero on the scale in line with the
pointer.
11 Connect the test lamp on the second breaker and turn the drive in the same direction as before, never turn
backwards. Note the angle indicated by the pointer at the moment the light goes out. This angle should be
between 89˚ and 91˚
12 If the angle is less than 890,proceed as follows

a) Reduce the contact gap of the breaker which is connected to the test lamp. Do not reduce the gap below 0.3 mm.
b) If necessary, increase the contact gap of the other breaker. Do not exceed 0.5 mm.
c) If these operations are insufficient, replace the cam.
13 If the angle is greater than 91˚, proceed as follows

a) Increase the contact gap of the breaker which is connected to the test lamp. Do not exceed 0.5 mm.
b) Reduce the contact gap of the other breaker. Do not reduce the gap below 0.3 mm.
c) If the operations are insufficient, replace the cam.
TOOLS
14 Final adjustment having been obtained, make sure that the average of the two gaps is equal to 0.4 mm.
Examples : 0.35 and 0.45 mm.
0.30 and 0.50 mm.
Avoid settings such as 0.30 and 0.45 mm.
To Adjust the synchronisation of the breakers (test bench 2209-T, see Pl. 32).
15 To mount the contact breaker on the bench tester

a) Put the contact breaker in position.
b) Fit the test lamp (23) on the contact breaker. Connect the crocodile clip of the lamp feed (A) to the positive
terminal of a 6 volt battery and connect the crocodile clip of the earth wire (B) to the negative terminal of the
battery.
c) Fit the pointer (24) on the contact breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test bench 2209-T
16 To adjust the synchronisation

Turn the contact breaker in the direction of the arrow. The lamps should go out alternately each time the
pointer passes through 90 ± 1˚. If not, reset the gaps as indicated in paragraphs 12, 13 and 14.
To bench test a contact breaker (see Pl. 32A, fig. 1).
17 Bench test the contact breaker as normal contact breaker, dealing successively with each contact.
The centrifugal advance should be between 3˚ 30’ and 7˚ 30’ at 1000 r.p.m. contact breaker and between
10˚ 30’ and 15˚ 30’ at 1500 r.p.m. contact breaker.
On an adjustable contact breaker and with a production type coil, sparks of 12 mm minimum should be
obtained (some misfires will be accepted) at 500 r.p.m. and 5 mm minimum at 2000 r.p.m. contact breaker.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTACT BREAKER (with one breaker) DUCELLIER 3944-A or SEV N4-YG.
18 Make sure that the contact points are in good condition. Adjust the gap to 0.4 mm. Use a set of very clean
feeler gauges, so that no trace of grease is deposited on the contact points.
To bench test a contact breaker (see Pl. 32A, fig. 2).
19 The centrifugal advance should be between 4.5˚ and 7.5˚ at 1000 r.p.m. contact breaker and between 7.5˚ and 9.5˚
at 1500 r.p.m. contact breaker.
On an adjustable contact breaker and with a production type coil, sparks of 12 mm minimum should be
obtained (some misfires will be accepted) at 500 r.p.m. and 5 mm minimum at 2000 r. p. m. contact breaker.
NOTE - This contact breaker is not fitted with a suction control.
TOOLS
CLEANING THE SPARKING PLUGS
IMPORTANT NOTE - Incomplete cleaning of the plugs after sand blasting can cause rapid engine wear. It is
necessary to eliminate all traces of sand after this operation.
20 Eliminate all lead and oil deposits on the insulators and electrodes by using a hardwood spatula to the exclusion
of all metallic objects.
21 Clean the plug in petrol and then blow with compressed air.
22 Sparking plug sand blasting machine. Supply the fixture with compressed air at 85 p.s.i. (6 kg/cm2) maximum.
Use an air jet with a maximum pressure of 56 p. s. i. (4 kg/cm2) in order to remove the sand in between the
insulator and the body.
23 Remove the sand from the base of the insulator by scraping with a hardwood spatula.
24 Maintenance of a sand blasting machine.

a) Use the sand sold by the manufacturer of the machine.
b) Store the sand in a dry place.
c) Renew the sand in the machine after cleaning approximately 100 plugs.
25 Adjust the electrode gaps to 0.60 mm.

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 211-1 Work on the contact breaker. Op. DS 211-1 136
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a contact breaker (with two breakers).
Removal.
Drain the radiator and remove the inlet manifold (it may be necessary to remove the two upper rear studs).
Refitting.
15 Set the firing point. Do not forget to remove the rod from the flywheel.
23 Refill the radiator, heater control vane open, bleed the system. Check the hot-water circulation.
24 Adjust the slow running (see Op. DS 142-U).
Replacement of a variable ignition control.

Refitting.
Set the firing point (see Op. DS 211-0) after setting the control in the midway position. Do not forget to remove
the rod from the flywheel.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CONTACT BREAKER (with two breakers).
Removal.
1 Drain the water from the radiator and cylinder block. (Retain this water which contains anti-freeze).
Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1) ......................................... 21 mm spanner
Stop MR-4158
2 Disconnect the battery negative terminal ........................................................ 12 mm spanner
3 Remove the tube between the carburettor and air filter-silencer.
4 Disconnect the sparking plug leads.
5 Remove the ignition coils and bracket assembly ................................................... 8 mm spanner
6 Disconnect the rubber heating pipe from the inlet manifold.

TOOLS
8 Disconnect the accelerator control from the butterfly control ........................................ 7 mm spanner
9 To remove the carburettor.

a) Remove the spring (13) by pulling towards the top of the support tube (14) (see Pl. 28).
Unhook the spring from the clutch engagement control.
b) Remove the screws fixing the accelerated idling control on the carburettor cover.
Remove the screw on the plate fixing the accelerated idling control pipe to the hot spot cover plate on the
inlet manifold.
c) Remove the carburettor (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1623-T
10 Disengage the accelerator control from its spindle on the scuttle and turn it to the left.
11 Remove the oil dipstick.
12 Remove the inlet manifold .................................................................... 12 mm box spanner
NOTE - It is necessary to remove the two rear upper studs of the manifold.
13 Remove the screw fixing the contact breaker.

Disconnect the primary leads from the contact breaker.
Disengage the contact breaker, then disconnect the earth lead.
Take out the contact breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
Refitting.
14 Remove the contact breaker cover.

a) Offer up the contact breaker, connect the earth lead.
b) Lower the contact breaker into the housing, turning the shaft in order to make sure that the dog on the contact
breaker engages correctly in the dog of the driving shaft.
c) Put the screw fixing the contact breaker in position. Do not tighten.
15 To set the firing point

a) Release the pressure in the clutch cylinder by operating the auxiliary clutch control.
b) Introduce a 6 mm diameter rod in the hole provided in the bellhousing, left side. (This hole is partly obscured
by the dynamo). Turn the engine slowly in the running direction, up to the point where the rod enters the
recess in the flywheel. The engine is now set at the firing point.
IMPORTANT - Remove the rod from the flywheel.

TOOLS
c) Set the manual ignition control in the midway position. (To do this, it is necessary to count the number of clicks).
d) Connect the negative terminal on the battery.
Connect the primary leads on the contact breaker.
Connect a test lamp on the red terminal of the lower coil. Switch on the ignition.
e) Turn the body of the contact breaker until the contacts break, the lamp will light at the moment of breaking.
f) Tighten the screw fixing the contact breaker in position.
g) Switch off the ignition. Disconnect the test lamp. Fit the cover on the contact breaker.
16 Fit the inlet manifold (renew the gaskets each time it is removed).
Smear the two rear upper studs with Hermetic and refit them.
Fit the carburettor. (plain and spring washers) (spanner 1623-T, see Pl. 16, fig. 2) ..................... 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 1623-T
17 Fit the accelerated idling control. Insert a plain washer between the slow running control and the carburettor,
then a second plain washer and a spring washer under the head of the screw. Hook on the spring (13) by
fitting the support (14} (see Pl. 18).
18 Engage the accelerator control on its spindle on the scuttle, connect the control to the carburettor, tighten the
nuts and locknuts.
Connect the choke control
Fit the rubber heating tube to the inlet manifold, the petrol feed pipe to the carburettor.
Hook on the clutch engagement control spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 mm box spanners
19 Connect the pipe between the carburettor and air filter-silencer.
20 Refit the ignition coils and bracket assembly on the scuttle ......................................... 8 mm spanner
21 Connect the sparking plug leads.
22 Refit the oil dipstick.
23 Refill the radiator. During this operation, open the vane of the heater and the water system.
Check that the heater pipe to the inlet manifold is warm.

TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CONTACT BREAKER (with one breaker).
25 If any difficulty is experienced, proceed as indicated in ID 19 Repair Manual, operation ID 211-1.
REPLACEMENT OF A VARIABLE IGNITION CONTROL.
Removal.
26 Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1). ........................................... Stop MR-4158
27 Unscrew the fixing screw of the cable, on the movable plate of the contact breaker and unscrew the cable sheath
fixing screw on the contact breaker fixing plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
28 Remove the glove box. Hold the body of the mechanism (behind the dashboard) and unscrew the hollow screw
found behind the control (inside the car) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 mm spanners
29 Remove the control assembly from the body of the mechanism, through the opening for the glove box.
Refitting.
30 Engage the mechanism and cable assembly through the opening for the glove box. Fit the cable and sheath
assembly through the hole in the scuttle panel; make sure that the rubber grommet is fitted.
31 Fit a shake-proof washer between the body of the mechanism and the inside of the instrument panel and fit the
control in the body of the mechanism, inserting a chromium plated washer between the dashboard and the
hexagon of the hollow screw.
Hold the body of the mechanism and tighten the hollow screw of the control assembly ................. 14-17 mm spanners
32 Fit the glove box (cup washers under the heads of the screws).
33 Connect the cable to the movable plate of the contact breaker and connect the cable sheath on the contact breaker
fixing plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
34 Set the firing point (see Op. DS 211-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 211 - 3 Overhauling a contact breaker. Op. DS 211-3 140
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A CONTACT BREAKER (with two breakers).
1 Remove the cover. Remove the upper condenser (I) and the lower condenser (2) with their bracket.
2 Remove the upper moving contact (3) with its spring (4) and the lower moving contact (5) with its spring (6).
Do not mislay the insulators (7) and (8). Remove the insulating sleeves (9).
3 Remove the fixed contact carriers (10) and (11). Remove the contact carrier plate (12).
4 Remove the circlip (13) retaining the cam (14), the thrust washer (15) and remove the cam.
5 Remove the centrifugal advance weights (21).
6 Remove the spring (16) retaining the pin (17) of the driving dog (18). Remove the driving dog and the adjusting
washer (19). Remove the shaft (20) from the contact breaker.
7 Clean the parts with trichlorethylene and blow off with compressed air.
8 Make sure that the base of the contact breaker is drilled. If not, drill a 3 mm diameter hole in the base of the body.

NOTE - If the surface of the contact points are badly pitted, it is necessary to renew the contacts.
9 Fit the shaft (20) previously oiled, into the body of the contact breaker. Fit the adjusting washer (19) and the
driving dog (18) on the shaft.
Press in the pin (17).
NOTE - The direction of fitting the driving dog is immaterial.

Check the end play which should be approximately 0.1 mm; if not, replace the adjusting washer (19) in order
to obtain this clearance.
Fit the retaining pin (17) and the spring (16). Make sure that the direction of winding the spring is left-hand,
in order to avoid oil leakage (see fig. 4).
10 Oil the centrifugal balance weight spindles (22) and fit the advance weights (21) on the spindles. Fit the cam
(14) on the shaft (20) previously oiled and the spindles in the centrifugal balance weights (21).
Fit the thrust washer (is) and the circlip (13).
11 Put the contact carrier plate (12) in position. Insert a spring washer under the heads of the screws.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 211-3 Overhauling a contact breaker. Op. DS 211-3 141
TOOLS
12 Put the fixed contact carriers (10) and (11) in position. Insert a plain washer and a spring washer under the heads
of the screws and tighten provisionally.
13 Put the insulating sleeves (9) in position and the moving contacts (3) and (5) with their springs (4) and (6).
Insert under the current feed for the lower moving contacts (5), the insulator (7) with the edges turned over.
14 It is possible to check the condensers before assembly on the contact breaker. Use a resistance /capacity meter to
check the resistance, the capacity and the insulation of the condenser.
Offer up the lower condenser (2) and fix it with the current feed.
Insert a shake-proof washer under the head of the screw.
Insert under the current feed for the upper moving contact (3), the insulators (8) without the edges turned over.
15 Offer up the upper condenser (1) and fix with the current feed.
Insert a shake-proof washer under the head of the screw.
Fix the earthing supports of the condensers on the body of the contact breaker.
Insert a shake-proof washer under the heads of the screws.
16 Adjust the contacts and bench test the contact breaker (see Op. DS 211-0).
17 Fit the contact breaker cover, insert serrated washers under the heads of the screws.
OVERHAULING A CONTACT BREAKER (with one breaker).

DUCELLIER 3944A or SEV N4-YG.
If any difficulty is experienced with this work, proceed as shown in the ID 19 Repair Manual, operation ID 211-3.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 212-0 Checking an ignition coil. Op. DS 212-0 142
TOOLS
CHECKING A COIL (see Pl. 33).
1 To mount the coil on a test bench:

Connect the positive terminal of the coil to the positive terminal of a 6 volt battery and the negative terminal
to a DS 19 contact breaker (contact gaps set to 0. 4 mm) fitted with condensers in good condition.
2 Connect 1. The secondary outlet “a” to the insulated terminal of the first spark gap (A) which is set during the test.
2. The secondary outlet “b” to the insulated terminal of the second spark gap (B) set to 1 mm throughout
the test.
3 Operational conditions
- At 2000 r. p. m. contact breaker, the minimum length of spark (between the points of the spark gap (A)
should be 5 mm.
- At 60 r.p.m. contact breaker, this length should be 11 mm cold and 9 mm hot (after 30 minutes running).
NOTE - Do not attempt to obtain a longer spark by increasing the terminal gap of the spark gap (A), because this
will cause internal sparking of the coil and rapid deterioration.
4 Test the two outlets “a” and “b” of the coil successively.
IMPORTANT NOTE - One can proceed as indicated above. It is, however, preferable to use the bench designed
by our Service Department and sold by Etablissements de Sarello, 7 bis Villa Berthier, Paris, 17e) (see Pl. 34).
5 To check the continuity of the primary winding

Supply the test bench from a 6 volt battery.
Connect the primary wires on to the primary terminal (A) of the coil. Switch on the main switch (B)
(top left-hand) and put the two-way switch (C) in feed position for the light (D) (pull downwards).
Test : The filament of the lamp should glow without bright fluctuations, likewise, by moving the primary
terminals of the coil.
6 To check the operation (see Pl. 34)

a) Secondary outlet No. 1.
Connect the secondary outlets (E) of the coil to the two spark gaps. Start the motor by means of the motor
switch (F) (top right-hand) and by immediately pressing on the button of the starter switch (G) (lower right-
hand).
Put the two-way switch (C) in the position to supply the contact breaker (towards the top). There should be
practically no misfires in the sparks with the spark gap set at 8 mm. Put the two-way switch in the neutral
position.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 212-0 Checking an ignition coil. Op. DS 212-0 143
TOOLS
b) Secondary outlet No. 2.

Reverse the secondary wires to the spark gaps.
Put the two-way switch (C) in position to supply the contact breaker (towards the top). There should be
practically no misfires in the sparks with the spark gap set at 8 mm.
Leave running for a quarter of an hour. After this time, there should be no misfires.
Put the two-way switch in the neutral position.
c) Secondary outlet No. 1 (after a quarter of an hour warming up).

Reverse the secondary wires to the spark gaps.
Put the two-way switch (C) in position to supply the contact breaker (towards the top).
The results should be identical to those indicated above.
Put the two-way switch in the neutral position.
Stop the apparatus, disconnect the wires.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 2131-0 Adjustments of pulleys and belts. Op. DS 231-0 144
PARTICULAR POINTS
Adjust the tension of the belts (see Pl. 35).
The leverage for tensioning the high pressure pump belt is 24 ft./lb. (3m. kg.) and the dynamo belt 29 ft./lb. (4m. kg.).
TOOLS
ALIGNMENT OF PULLEYS (see Pl. 36).
NOTE - In order to carry out this operation, it is necessary to remove the high pressure pump (see Op. DS 391-1)
and the water pump belts (see Op. DS 231-4).
1 Use the fixture 1683—T ..................................................................... Fixture 1683-T
Fit the gauge pin bracket (B) in place of the high pressure pump on the boss on the clutch bellhousing, using the
face corresponding to the type of assembly (1 or 2 pulleys) towards the front.
2 Place the rod (A) with the ball end engaged as far as possible in the rear groove of the pulley, the rod resting on one
or both of the gauge pins (C) in the zones “f or “g” for the water pump pulley and for the driving pulley.
3 To adjust the alignment of the driving pulley or the water pump pulley
a) Using a set of feeler gauges, measure the gap between the gauge pin and the rod.
b) The rod resting at “f”, reduce the thickness of the pulley adjusting washer by three times the amount of the gap “d”
measured at “g”. The pulley is in alignment when the gap is between 0 and .003” (0 and 0. 08 mm).
c) The rod resting at “g”, add to the thickness of the washer, twice the amount of the gap “d” measured at “f”. The
pulley is in alignment when the gap is between 0 and . 007” (0 and 0. 12 mm).
4 To adjust the alignment of the dynamo pulley (Cars produced since May 1959.)
a) Using a set of feeler gauges, measure the gap between the gauge pin and the rod.
b) The rod resting at “h”, reduce the thickness of the pulley adjusting washer by five times the amount of the gap “d”
measured at “i”.
The pulley is in alignment when the gap is between (0 and 0. 1 mm)
c) The rod resting at “i”, add to the thickness of the washer, four times the amount of the gap “d” measured at ‘‘h’’.
The pulley is in alignment when the gap is between (0 and 0. 1 mm).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-0 : Adjustments of pulleys and belts. Op. DS 231-0 145
TOOLS
5 Remove the pulley being adjusted. Remove the adjusting washer, measure its thickness and select a washer of
suitable thickness from among those sold by our Spare Parts Department.
6 Fit the washer and the pulley.
Check the alignment (see paragraphs 3 or 4, above).
7 Remove the gauge pin bracket (B).
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BELT TENSION (see Pl. 35).
8 Tensioning the high pressure pump belt or belts

a) Unscrew the nut fixing the tie-rod to the pump. Slightly unscrew the pump bearing spindle nut (spanner 2280-T,
see Pl. 72, fig. 5) ....................................................................... 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 2280-T
b) Tension the belts, using a lever (lever MR-4208, see fig. 2) resting on the clutch cylinder with one end and
on the body of the pump with the other part. Exert a pull of l6 lbs (7.5 kg) on the end of the lever (spring
balance 2472-T), which corresponds to a tension of 22 ft/lbs (3 m.kg) ............................. Lever MR-4208
Spring balance 2472-T
c) With the belts under tension, tighten the pump bearing spindle nut (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5), and
tighten the nut fixing the tie-rod to the pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 2280-T
9 Tensioning the water pump and dynamo belts
a) Unscrew the nut fixing the dynamo to its tie-rod. Slightly unscrew the screw fixing the dynamo to the clutch
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
b) Tension the belts, using a lever (lever MR-4208, see fig. 2), resting on the boss between the two dynamo fixing
plates, with one end and on the body of the dynamo with the other part. Exert a pull of 22 lbs (10 kg) on the end
of the lever (spring balance 2472-T) which corresponds to a tension of 28 ft/lbs (4 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lever MR-4208
Spring balance 2472-T
c) With the belts under tension, tighten the screw fixing the dynamo and tighten the nut fixing the dynamo to its 12 mm box spanner
tie-rod 14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-1: Replacement of a water pump and low pressure pump. Op. DS 231-1 146
PARTICULAR POINTS
8 Since October 1957, the pumps are fitted with a new impeller (marked with No. DS 231-7 on the outer face). These pumps should befitted with a new
type cover, which has a groove provided for securing the water outlet hose.
9 Measure the distance “d” on the pump and fit spacing washer under the pulley (when fitting the above on a new pump) in order to obtain the same
dimensions at “d” (see Pl. 37).
13 Adjust the tension of the belts: High-pressure pump = 22 ft/lb (3 m.kg), Dynamo 28 ft/lb (4 m.kg) (see Pl. 35).
14 Tighten the fan fixing screws to 72 ft/lb (1 m.kg) maximum.
16 Refill the radiator (open the heater vane and bleed the system).
17 Start the engine, check the adjustment of clutch drag (see Op. DS 314-0) and make sure that the hot water circulates.
TOOLS
REMOVAL (see Pl. 37).
1 Drain the radiator and pipes, save the water which contains anti-freeze.
2 Disconnect the radiator tie-bar without disconnecting the feed pipe to the high pressure pump .............. 8-12 mm box spanners
3 Remove the fan 12 mm box spanner
4 Disconnect the adjusting rods of the dynamo and high pressure pump from the water pump. Slacken the water
pump belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
5 Disconnect the feed and return pipes from the low pressure pump, (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) ....... Spanner 2220-T
6 Disconnect the water pump feed pipe.
7 Disconnect the water pump with its cover (4). Remove the pump ..................................... 12 mm box spanner
8 Scrape the joint face.
NOTE - Since October 1957, the water pumps are fitted with a new type impellor and new cover which has a water
passage of different section than that of the old type cover. The new pumps (fitted with an impellor worked with
No. DS 231-7 on the outer face (c) must be fitted with the new cover having a groove on the water outlet.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-1: Replacement of a water pump and low pressure pump. Op. DS 231-1 147
TOOLS
ASSEMBLY (see Pl. 37).
9 To position the pulley on the new pump

a) Place the old pump on a surface plate and measure the distance “d” between the bearing face “a” on the cover
and the boss face “b” of the pulley receiving the fan.
b) Fit the pulley on the new pump and carry out the same procedure as above.
c) Fit the distance washer (3) under the pulley, in order to obtain a dimension “d” equal to that obtained in line a).
d) Carry out the new assembly of the pulley by fitting the key (1), the plain washer (2) and the lockwasher. Tighten
the nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 mm box spanner
10 Smear the face of the cover (4) and the pump with Hermetic. Stick the joint on the cover.
11 Offer up the pump. Tighten the nuts and fixing screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
12 Connect the feed and return pipe unions to the low pressure pump (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) ....... Spanner 2220-T
13 Put the belts in position. Connect the dynamo and high pressure pump adjusting rods to the water pump (spring
washers). Adjust the tension of the belts (see Op. DS 231-0).
14 Fit the fan. Tighten the nuts to 7.2 ft/lbs (1 m.kg) maximum ......................................... 12 mm box spanner
15 Fit the radiator tie-bar ....................................................................... 8-12 mm box spanners
16 Connect the water pump feed pipe. Refill the radiator with water. Open the heater control vane and bleed the system.
17 Start the engine. Check the clutch drag and adjust if necessary (see Op. DS 314-0).
Check that the heater pipe to the carburettor is hot.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-3 : Overhauling a water pump and low pressure pump.. Op. DS 231-3 148
TOOLS
PARTICULAR POINTS
Dismantling.
7 In order to make sure of perfect sealing after a complete pump overhaul, it is necessary to lap the thrust washers and the thrust face of the
joint. In order to avoid impregnating the porous bronze bush, it must be removed.
Proceed with great care during this operation.
Assembly.
12 Do not refit the greaser, seal the hole by means of a screw.
16 Fit the bearing by means of a press. Support it by the end of the shaft and not by the impeller or the body of the pump.
17 Tighten the bearing nut to 22 ft/lb. (3 m.kg) and split pin.
18 Tighten the screws fixing the pump to the body to 12 to J3-~ ft/lb (1 7 to 1 9 m.kg). Turn the shaft during the tightening of the screws.
Checking for leakage (see Pl. 40).
The pump should be immersed in hydraulic fluid and the sealing checked under a compressed air pressure of 14 psi. (1 kg/cm2).
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A PUMP (on cars produced before December 1957).
1 Fix the pump on a stand (stand MR-3676-180, fitted with the dowel pin (A) see Pl. 41, fig. 1) .............. Stand MR-3676-180
2 Remove the pulley fixing nut, remove the distance washer (2), the pulley, its key (1) and the adjusting washers (3). 16 mm box spanner
3 Disengage from the groove, the metal locking the nut (5), remove the nut (5) retaining the ball bearing
(spanner 1634-T, see Pl. 41, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1634—T
4 Remove the ball bearing (6) (extractor 1684-T, see Pl. 41, fig. 3).
Remove the steel cup (7), the half retaining rings (8) and the spring (9) .............................. Extractor 1684-T
5 Remove the pump body fixing screws. Remove the pump body (10). Remove the thrust washer (11),
the seal ring (12) and the cup (13) from the body of the pump. Remove the pump pinions (14) and (15)
from the pump and the key (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-3 : Overhauling of a water pump and low pressure pump. Op. DS 231-3 149
TOOLS
6 Remove the pump from the stand. Remove the spindle and impellor assembly (17) from the water pump body.
Remove the thrust washer (18), the ring seal (19) and the cup (20) from the pump body. Remove the spring
(21), the cyclam joint (22) and the spindle thrust washer (23).
Remove the greaser and the overflow unions (24) and (25).
IMPORTANT REMARK - In order to make sure of perfect sealing after a complete pump overhaul, it is necessary
to lap the thrust washers (26) and (27) and the thrust face on the pump of the joint (22). The lapping of the
washers is carried out with extremely fine emery powder. In order to avoid impregnating the porous bronze
bush (28), it must be removed.
This delicate operation demands great care in order to avoid damage to the pump body.
7 Lapping the thrust washers
Before doing anything else, the pump body must be very carefully cleaned, in order to eliminate every trace of
grease or oil.
Use alcohol only. Blow with compressed air especially in the bores, the greaser hole and the oil-way between
the pump body and grease retainer.
Two conditions are possible
a) If the thrust washer (27) is in good condition and only’ requires grinding, remove the bronze bush, using the
threaded extractor 2291-T (see Pl. 39, fig. 3). Screw the thread in the bush, then turn the pump body and . . . Extractor 2291-T
press out the assembly on a press with a round bar Drift = 14 dia.
Length = 150 mm.
b) If the thrust washer (27) is to be replaced, it is necessary to dismantle the bush and washer assembly with heat
(see paragraph 1 below).
1. For the water pump body
Heat the body of the water pump to 2000C (4000F) approximately.
Use a furnace for preference or failing this, form a tunnel with fire bricks, then heat the fire bricks
with a blow pipe. When the bricks are hot, put the pump body in the tunnel.
An indication that the correct temperature is attained is when a wood shaving projecting from the pump
body begins to blacken.
Avoid direct heat which will deform the parts.
Push out the bush and thrust washer in a press. Let the parts cool off. (The bush and washers are to be
replaced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel :
Large dia. = 18.5
2. For the low pressure pump body Small dia. = 14.9
Do not remove the thrust washer, unless it is necessary (deep scratches). Heat the body of the pump in Length = 150 mm
the same manner as for the water pump body. When the correct temperature is reached, tap lightly on the
pump body, bearing side, with a piece of wood, the thrust washer should drop out.
8 Carefully clean the parts..
TOOLS
9 To prepare the pump body
a) If the body of the water pump has no groove at ‘e’ (see fig. 5), cut one with a chisel.
Remove the burrs.
Do not damage the joint face.
b) To fit the thrust washers (26) and (27) (if required).

Heat the pump body (see paragraph 7b).
Fit the thrust washers with a press (see Pl. 38, fig. 1, for positioning) (mandrel 2292-T). Maintain the pressure
for approximately 30 seconds, the time necessary for the thrust washer to heat and expand and the body of the
pump to cool and contract, in order to avoid this washer lifting when the mandrel is withdrawn, which would
cause leakage.
Leave the parts to cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anvil and mandrel
2292- T
c) To lap the thrust washers and joint cups.
1. Low pressure pump body (use a lapping spindle 2289-T, see Pl. 38, fig. 2)
Fit the guide bush (A) in place of the bearing.
Tighten the nut (B).
Fit on the spindle (C), the spring (9), the thrust washer (11), a ring seal (12), a cup joint (13).
Put the ring seal in position in the cup by compressing until it rests on the thrust washer.
Put a small quantity of very fine polishing paste on the seating of the cup joint and lap the thrust washer.
Do not exert pressure on the lapping spindle.
Make sure that there are no burrs round the screw holes, which will cause leakage. If necessary, remove
the burrs with a scraper.
2. Water pump body (use lapping spindle 2289-T, see Pl. 39, fig. 2).
Fix the body of the pump on the guide bush (A).
Hold the bush in a vice. Tighten the vice moderately.
Fit on the spindle (B), a spring (21), a thrust washer (18), a ring seal (19), a cup joint (20) and carry
out the same procedure as in the previous paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lapping spindle 2289-T
d) Lap the thrust face of the seal on the body of the water pump (lapping spindle 2289-T, see Pl. 39, fig. 1). This
operation is necessary in order to avoid leakage.
The abrasive paper washers should be moistened with water or alcohol.
TOOLS
Fit an abrasive paper washer on the lapping spindle (choose the grain number according to the condition of
the surface).
During the lapping, raise the lapping spindle frequently to avoid scratching the seating.
Always finish off the lapping with a washer of No. 600 abrasive paper.
Remove the lapping spindle and guide bush ................................................... Lapping spindle 2289-T
e) Clean the parts very carefully using alcohol only. Blow with compressed air.
f) To fit the bronze bush (28) in the body of the water pump.
This bush should be soaked in SAE 20 oil for a minimum of ten minutes before fitting.
Offer up the bush vertically, the pump body resting on the table of a press (fixture 2288-T, mandrel (D), see
Pl. 38, fig. 3).
Put the bush in position in a press. Remove the mandrel (D) and replace by the mandrel (E) and bore the
bush with the mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixture 2288-T
10 Measure the distance “f” from the joint face and the bearing face of the seal, for example f = 39. 3 mm.
This distance should be 38. 3 ± 0. 2 mm. Consequently, in order that the seal has the same pressure, it is
necessary to add a washer 39. 3 - 38. 3 being 1 mm thick behind the thrust washer (23). Fit the washer of a
size determined above, then the thrust washer (23) on the shaft (17), the chamber towards the impellor.
Put the bush MR-3470-20 (see Pl. 41, fig. 5) on the shaft.
Put the seal (22) in position. Ease the sliding of the joint by moistening with hydraulic fluid.
Remove the bush MR-3470-20 ............................................................. Bush MR-3470-20
11 Oil the bronze bush (28) (with SAE 20 oil).

Oil the seal (22) with castor oil. Fit on the shaft (17), a spring (21), a thrust washer (18), a ring seal (19),
(use the cone MR-3384-l0, see Pl. 94, fig. 1), the cap joint (20). Compress the above until they touch the
thrust washer (18). Engage the shaft thus prepared in the water pump body Fix the shaft using the bush
MR-4251 (see Pl. 40, fig. 3) and the half retaining rings (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cone MR-3384-10
Bush MR-4251
12 Fit the overflow unions (24) and (25).
Do not refit the greaser on the low pressure pump body. Seal the orifice with a screw. Check for leakage
(see paragraphs 40 and onwards, this operation).
Fix the assembly on the stand MR-3676-180 (see Pl. 41, fig. 1) ................................... Stand MR-3676-180
13 Fit the key (16), the inner pinion (15), and the outer wheel (14) previously oiled with hydraulic fluid. Offer up
the body of the low pressure pump (10). Turn the assembly over in order to bring the water and hydraulic
fluid drain pipes (24) and (25) one opposite the other, with the clearance holes lining up with the tapped holes
in the water pump body.
Disengage the low pressure pump body (10), without moving the pinions.
TOOLS
14 Fit the paper joint with the narrow part to the side nearest the inlet union (union is located near the drain pipes
(24) and (25)). Fit the body of the low pressure pump. Tighten the screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
15 Fit the cup (13), a new ring seal (12), (use the cone MR-3384-10, see Pl. 94, fig. 1), the thrust washer (11) and
the spring (9).
Compress the spring using the mandrel MR-3676-190 (see Pl. 41, fig. 6). Fit the half retaining rings (8) in
the groove of the spindle, the ground face towards the bearing.
Fit the bush MR-4251 (see Pl. 40, fig. 3). Fit the nut, check the sealing of the thrust washers (see paragraphs 43
and onwards, this operation) ............................................................... Mandrel MR-3676-190
Cone MR—3384-10
Bush MR-4251
16 Remove the bush. Unscrew the pump body screws.
Fit the bearing (6) (previously greased) using a press.
IMPORTANT NOTE - During this operation, support it by the end of the spindle (not by the impellor) and the
pump body, in order to avoid either displacement of the impellor or damage to the pump by the key (16) of
the pinion (15) (stand MR-3676-180, see Pl. 41, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand MR-3676-180
17 Tighten the nut (5) to 20 - 22 ft/lbs (2.7 to 3 m.kg) (spanner 1634-T, see Pl. 41, fig. 2) and lock by tapping the
metal into the groove provided on the body of the low pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1634-T
18 Tighten the screws fixing the pump to the body to 12 - 13~ ft/lbs (1.7 to 1.9 m.kg). Turn the spindle during the
tightening of the screws, to make sure there is no binding due to uneven tightening of the screws.
19 Fit the adjusting washers (3), the key (1).
Fit the pulley on the shaft.
Fit the distance washer (2), the lockwasher. Tighten the nut to 18 - 22 ft/lbs (2.5 to 3 m.kg). Do not turn up the
lockwasher, the operation of aligning the pulley is carried out finally when assembled on the engine (see
Op. DS 231-0) .......................................................................... 16 mm box spanner
20 Remove the pump from the stand.
OVERHAULING A PUMP (on cars produced since December 1957).
21 Fix the pump on a stand (stand MR-3676-180, fitted with the dowel pin (B), see Pl. 41, fig. 1). Remove the
overflow pipes (24) and (25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand MR-3676-180
22 Remove the pulley fixing nut, the distance washer (2), the pulley, the key (1) and the adjusting washers (3) . . . . 16 mm box spanner
23 Remove the split pin locking the nut (5) and remove the nut (5) retaining the bearing (6) (spanner 1646-T,
TOOLS
24 Remove the bearing (extractor 1684-T, see Pl. 41, fig. 3).
Remove the steel cup (7), the half retaining rings (8) and the spring (9) .............................. Extractor 1684-T
25 Remove the screws fixing the low pressure pump body (10) to the water pump body.
Remove the low pressure pump body (10) and the joint from the water pump body.
Remove the thrust washer (11), the ring seal (12), the ring seal cup (13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
26 Remove the pump from the stand. Remove the pinion (15) and the wheel (14).
Press on the pump spindle (17) impellor side and remove the key (16) from the shaft.
Remove the pump shaft and impellor assembly from the body of the water pump.
Remove the ring seal cup (20), the ring seal (19), the thrust washer (18) and the spring (21) from the pump shaft.
Remove the cyclam bush (22) and the thrust washer (23) from the impellor .......................... 12 mm box spanner
IMPORTANT REMARK - In order to make sure of perfect sealing after a complete pump overhaul, it is necessary
to lap the cups (13) and (20) on their thrust washers (26) and (27) and the thrust face on the pump of the seal (22)
(see paragraph 7, this operation).
27 To prepare the pump body (see paragraph 9, this operation).
28 Oil the bronze bush (28) (SAE 20 oil) and the bush (22) (castor oil).
29 Fit on the shaft (17): a spring (21), the long tag end engaged in the hole in the impellor, a thrust washer (18),
a ring seal (19) (cone MR-3384-l0, see Pl. 94, fig. 1) and the ring seal cup (20) having been lapped with the
thrust washer (27). Compress the ring seal cup (20) and engage the tag end of the spring (21) in the groove
of the cup (20).
30 Fit the shaft thus prepared in the body of the water pump. Hold the shaft by means of the bush MR-4251 (see Pl. 40,
fig. 3), and the half retaining rings (8). Fit the overflow unions (24) and (25) ......................... Bush MR-4251
31 Check for leakage (see paragraphs 40 and onwards, this operation).
32 Remove the shaft, from the pump body and blow the parts with compressed air. Fit the new shaft in the water
pump body and put the assembly on a stand (stand MR-3676-180, fitted with the dowel pin (B), see Pl. 41, fig. 1).
TOOLS
33 Put in position the key (16), the pinion (15) and the wheel (14) previously smeared with hydraulic fluid.
Offer up the low pressure pump body (10), turn the assembly over in order to bring the overflow pipes (24)
and (25) one opposite the other, with the clearance holes lining up with the tapped holes in the water pump body.
Disengage the low pressure pump body (10), without moving the pinions and fit the paper joint in position. Fit
the low pressure pump body, tighten the fixing screws .......................................... 12 mm box spanner
34 Fit the cup (13), the ring seal (12) (use the cone MR-3384-l0, see Pl. 94, fig. 1), the thrust washer (11), the
spring (9), the long tag towards the top and the other end engaged in the groove in the cup (13).
Compress the spring (9) (tube MR-3676-190, see Pl. 41, fig. 6) and put the half retaining rings (8) in position in
the groove of the shaft with the ground face towards the bearing and the tag end of the spring engaged in the
small space between the two half retaining rings.
35 To check the thrust washer for leakage.

a) Fit the bush MR-4251 (see Pl. 40, fig. 3), the distance washer (2) on the pump shaft and tighten the nut
moderately ............................................................................. Bush MR-4251
b) Check the thrust washers for leakage (see paragraphs 43 and onwards, this operation).
c) Remove the nut, the washer (2), the bush MR-4251. Tighten the pump body fixing screws.
36 Fit the bearing (6) previously greased, using a press.
IMPORTANT REMARK - During this operation, support it by the end of the spindle (not by the impellor) and the
pump body in order to avoid either displacement of the impellor or damage to the pump by the key (16) of the
pinion (15) (stand MR-3676-180, see Pl. 41, fig. 1) ............................................. Stand MR-3676-180
37 Tighten the nut (5) locking the bearing (6) to 22 ft/lbs (3 m.kg) (spanner 1646-T, see Pl. 41, fig. 4), and fit the split
pin. Tighten the pump body fixing screws (turn the spindle (17) during the tightening of the screws to make sure
there is no binding, due to uneven tightening of the screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1646-T
12 mm box spanner
38 Fit the pulley adjusting washers (3), the key (1), the pulley, the distance washer (2) and lockwasher. Tighten the
nut to 18 - 22 ft/lbs (2. 5 to 3m. kg). Do not turn up the lockwasher, the operation of aligning the pulley is
carried out finally when assembled on the engine (see Op. DS 231-0).
39 Remove the pump from the stand.

TOOLS
CHECKING THE BUSH FOR LEAKS (see Pl. 40, fig. 1).
40 To carry out this test, it is necessary to obtain a supply of compressed air at a pressure of 14 p.s.i.. (1 kg/cm2).
Use an acetylene cylinder connected on a compressed air pipe.
Close the hole “a” of the pump with a plug. Connect the drain pipe union (25) to the outlet of a pressure
regulator, using a rubber pipe. Set the pressure to 14 p.s.i. (1 kg/cm2).
41 Completely immerse the pump in hydraulic fluid. There should be no air bubbles visible.
If air bubbles are seen escaping at “b”, the thrust washer (27) is leaking, it is therefore necessary to repeat the
lapping operation.
If air bubbles are seen escaping at “c”, the seal (22) is leaking and should be reseated.
42 Disengage the pump. Disconnect the pipe from the pressure regulator.
Remove the plug.
Remove the bush MR-4251.
CHECKING THE THRUST WASHERS FOR LEAKS (see Pl. 40, fig. 2).
43 Fit the pipe (29), part number DS 314-91 or DS 314-87 on the outlet union “d” of the pump.
Fit a plug and a sealing washer on the feed union.
Connect the pipe (29) to the outlet of a pressure regulator, using a rubber pipe. Set the pressure to 14 p.s.i.
(1 kg/cm2).
44 Completely immerse the pump in hydraulic fluid.

There should be no air bubbles visible.
If air bubbles are seen escaping at “e”, the thrust washer (26) is leaking, it is therefore necessary to repeat the
lapping operation.
If air bubbles are seen escaping though the hole “a” or through the hole for the union (25) (see fig. 1), the thrust
washer (27) is leaking, it is therefore necessary to repeat the lapping operation.
45 Disengage the pump. Disconnect the pipe from the pressure regulator. Remove the pipe (29) and the plug.
46 Clean the pump with alcohol. Blow with compressed air.

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 231-4 : Work on the pulleys and belts. Op. DS 231-4 156
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of the water pump belts.
The belts are sold as a paired set of two by our Spare Parts Department. It is necessary to replace the two belts even if one is in good
condition. Adjust the tension of the belts to 28 ft/lb (4 m.kg) (see Op. DS 231-0).
Replacement of the high pressure pump belts.
Removal.
4 Remove the belts from the dynamo and water pump.
5-6 Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the declutched position and disconnect the control rod from the clutch fork, in order to remove the
belts. In the case of abnormal wear of the belts, they should be replaced, then adjust the driving pulley.
The belts are sold as a paired set of two by our Spare Parts Department. It is necessary to replace the two belts even if one is in good
condition.
8 Adjust the tension of the high-pressure pump belts to 22 ft/lb (3 m.kg) and that of the water pump belts to 28 ft/lb (4 m.kg) (see Op. 231-0).
11 Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the normal running position, after having connected the control rod to the clutch fork.
Replacement of the pulley driving the dynamo, water pump and high pressure pump.
Removal.
13 Mark the position of the steering assembly in its bearings and the position of the pinion in relation to the wheel, before removing the
steering.
Refitting.
18 Align the pulley (see Op. DS 231-0).
20 Put the belts in position; adjust the tension (see Op. DS 231-0).
21 Fit the steering, note the markings made when removing (paragraph 13 above).
Replacement of a driving shaft.
Removal.
23 Mark the position of the steering assembly in its bearings and the position of the pinion in relation to the wheel, before removing the
steering.
Refitting.
28 Tighten the nut retaining the driving shaft bearing to 18 ft/lb (2.5 m.kg) and split pin.
31 Adjust the tension of the high-pressure pump belts to 22 ft/lb (3 m.kg) and that of the dynamo to 28 ft/lb (4 m.kg) (see Op. DS 231-0).
32 Fit the steering, note the markings made when removing.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF THE WATER PUMP BELTS
Removal.
1 Loosen the screws fixing the dynamo and tie-rod. Move the dynamo as far as possible towards the engine.
Disengage the 1st belt by passing it between the blades of the fan. Bend one fan blade slightly.
Special care should be taken in very cold weather, the fan is more fragile when cold. Disengage the 2nd belt by
passing it first into the front groove of the pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
Assembly.
NOTE - Our Spare Parts Department sell these belts in sets of two. The belts are paired and their dimensions are
identical, for this reason: it is necessary to renew both belts even if one is in good condition.
2 Put the belts in position by passing them between the fan blades.
3 Adjust the tension of the belts (see Op. DS 231-0).

Tighten the screw of the dynamo tie-rod. Tighten the screw fixing the dynamo ........................ 12mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
REPLACEMENT OF THE HIGH PRESSURE PUMP BELTS
4 Remove the dynamo and water pump belts (see paragraph 1, this operation).
5 Put the auxiliary clutch control in the disengaged position (push towards the front, then upwards, in order to lock it
in this position).
6 Loosen the front nut (1) of the clutch fork control rod (4). Disconnect the rod from the fork.
Do not loosen the rear nuts (2) and (3) to avoid having to re-adjust the clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
7 Loosen the nut of the high pressure pump fixing spindle (spanner 2Z80-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5). Loosen the nut of the
tie-rod fixing screw on the high pressure pump and on the water pump.
Remove the belt or belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2280-T
12 mm box spanner
NOTE 1. In the case of abnormal belt wear, it may be necessary to change it and to adjust the driving pulley (see
paragraphs 12 and onwards, this operation).
NOTE 2. Our Spare Parts Department sell the belts in sets of two. The belts are paired and their dimensions are
identical, for this reason it is necessary to renew both belts even if one is in good condition (cars produced since
July 1956).
TOOLS
8 Put the belt or belts on the driving pulley, then on the high pressure pump pulley. Pass the belts between the
clutch fork and the clutch housing. Tension the belts (see Op. DS 231-0).
9 Connect the control rod to the clutch fork. Tighten the front nut (1) ................................... 12 mm box spanner
12 mm spanner
10 Fit the dynamo and water pump belts (see paragraphs 2 and 3, this operation).
11 Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the normal running position (pull downwards and towards the rear).
REPLACEMENT OF THE PULLEY DRIVING THE DYNAMO AND HIGH PRESSURE PUMP

12 Disconnect and remove the battery.
13 Remove the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraph 10).
14 Loosen the dynamo fixing screw. Remove the nut fixing the dynamo tie-rod and disengage the tie-rod from the
dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
15 Remove the belts from the driving pulley.
16 Remove the pulley fixing screw (67), the spring washer and the distance washer.
Disengage the pulley towards the left-hand side of the car. Remove the key (68) and the adjusting washer (69). 14 mm spanner

17 Put the adjusting washer (69) in position, the pulley and the washer. Tighten the fixing screw (67) . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
19 Remove the screw (67), the washer and the pulley. Fit the key (68). Fit the pulley, put the belts in position and
tighten the fixing screw (67) (spring washer under the head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
20 Put the belts in position on the pulleys. Tension the belts (see Op. DS 231-0). Tighten the dynamo fixing screw
and tighten the nut fixing the tie-rod on the dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
21 Fit the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraphs 43 and 45). 14 mm ring spanner
Fit and connect the battery ................................................................. 12 mm spanner

TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A DRIVESHAFT
22 Remove the battery, the battery tray, the spare wheel and the left-hand front wing ....................... 12-14mm box spanners
24 Remove the pulley from the driveshaft (see paragraph 12 and onwards, this operation) .................... 12 mm box spanner
14 mm ring spanner
25 Remove the nut (70) locking the bearing (71) after removing the split pin (spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5) Spanner 1640-T
26 Remove the assembly of the driveshaft bearing (71), and the thrust washer (72) (extractor MR-3404-20, see Pl. 17,
fig. 3). Remove the bearing (71) and the thrust washer (72) from the shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor MR-3404-20
27 Fit the thrust washer (72) and the bearing (71) previously greased.
28 Fit the assembly prepared above, in the bore in the bellhousing. Tighten the bearing locking nut (70) to 18 ft/lbs
(2.5 m.kg) and split pin (spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5).
(If necessary, drill a hole opposite a groove) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1640-T
30 Fit the pulley (put the belt in position), the washer and tighten the pulley fixing screw (67) (spring washer
under the head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
31 Put the belt in position on the water pump and dynamo pulleys and tension moderately (see Op. DS 231-0). Tighten
the dynamo fixing screw and the nut fixing the tie-rod on the dynamo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
14 mm ring spanner
32 Fit the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraphs 43 to 45).
33 Fit the battery tray. Fit and connect the battery. Fit the left-hand front wing and the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 232-1 : Work on the radiator and fan. Op. DS 232-1 160
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a fan.
Refitting.
3 Tighten the fan fixing screw to 72 ft/lb (1 m.kg). Do not exceed this tightening torsion.
Replacement of a radiator.
Refitting.
21 a) The longest distance piece (on the radiator fixing plate) should be fitted on the right-hand side.
26 Refill with water, the vane of the heater control open (bleed).
Checking a thermostat.
34 The valve should commence to open between 72 and 76˚ C.
35 In water at a temperature of 90˚ C, the valve should be completely open in less than 20 seconds.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A FAN
Removal.
1 Remove the screws and nuts fixing the radiator tie-bar. Disengage the tie-bar towards the high pressure pump. . . 8-12 mm box spanners
2 Remove the fan fixing screws and disengage towards the top ........................................ 12 mm box spanner
Refitting.
3 Offer up the fan, inserting it by the upper part of the fan cowl. Fit the fixing screws and tighten to 7.2 ft/lbs (1 m.kg).
Do not exceed this tightening torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
4 Put the radiator tie-rod in position. Fit and tighten the fixing screws and nuts (plain and spring washers) ...... 8-12 mm box spanners
REPLACEMENT OF A FAN COWL
Removal.
5 Disconnect and remove the battery ............................................................ 12 mm spanner

DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 232-1 Work on the radiator and fan. Op. DS 232-1 161
TOOLS
6 Remove the fan (see paragraphs 1 and 2, this operation).
7 Remove the fan cowl fixing screws and remove it ................................................ 12 mm box spanner
Refitting.
8 Offer up the fan cowl, fit the fixing screws, without tightening (plain and spring washers under the heads).
9 Fit the fan (see paragraph 3, this operation).
10 Put the radiator tie-rod in position, offer up the fixing screws (plain and spring washers).
11 Tighten the fan cowl fixing screws and the screws and nuts fixing the radiator tie-bar.
Make sure that the fan blades do not touch the fan cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 mm box spanners
12 Fit and connect the battery .................................................................... 12 mm spanner
REPLACEMENT OF A RADIATOR
Removal.
13 Drain the radiator (filler cap removed). Retain this water which contains anti-freeze.
14 Remove the spare wheel.
15 Disconnect the rubber connections, the upper from the radiator and the lower from the steel tube.
16 Disconnect the radiator tie-bar from the fan cowl and the water pump ................................. 8-12 mm box spanners
17 Remove the radiator fixing screws.

Unscrew the screws fixing the plate on the pressure regulator and pivot this plate towards the front.
Remove the expansion chamber bracket. Remove the distance pieces. Remove the radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
18 Remove the fan cowl from the radiator and remove the flexible pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Assembly.
19 Fit the flexible pipe on the radiator, tighten the clip. Fit the fan cowl, offer up the fixing screws without tightening
(plain and spring washers).
20 Make sure that the rubber distance pieces are in position in the brackets on the crossmember. Offer up the radiator
and connect the rubber connections to the radiator and to the steel tube.
TOOLS
21 To fit the radiator
a) Put the radiator in position, connect the rubber connections and fit the distance pieces in position on the radiator
fixing plates (the longest distance piece on the right-hand side).
b) Fit the radiator fixing screws without tightening and position the fixing plate on the pressure regulator.
c) Centralise the radiator and fan cowl, the blades of the fan must not touch the cowl.
d) Put the expansion chamber bracket in position. Insert the fixing plate of the wiring harness tube between the
bracket and the nut (cars produced before January 1956).
e) Tighten the radiator fixing screws and those of the fan cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14mm spanners
12-14mm box spanners
22 tighten the screw fixing the plate on the pressure regulator .......................................... 12-mm box spanner
23 put the radiator tie-rod in position. Tighten the fixing screws and nuts (plain and spring washers) ............ 8-12 mm box spanners
24 Fit and tighten the clips on the rubber connections.
25 fit the clip fixing the expansion chamber on its bracket. Tighten the nuts (plain and spring washers) ......... 12 mm box spanner
26 Refill the radiator with water (open the heater control vane and bleed the system). Start the engine and check that
the heater pipe to the carburettor is warm.
27 Fit the spare wheel.
REPLACEMENT OF A THERMOSTAT
Removal.
28 Drain the radiator; retain this water which contains anti-freeze.
29 Disengage the water return pipe from the pump cover.
30 Disengage the clip fixing the thermostat in the rubber pipe. Disengage the thermostat. If need be, use a screwdriver
to unstick the rubber pipe.
Assembly.
31 Fit the thermostat in the rubber pipe, engage it so that the turned edge of the thermostat is in contact with the
shoulder of the rubber pipe. Tighten the clip fixing the thermostat.
32 Connect the rubber pipe to the pump cover. Fit and tighten the clip.
33 Refill the radiator (see paragraph 26, this operation).

TOOLS
CHECKING A THERMOSTAT
34 Immerse the thermostat in hot water. When the water reaches a temperature between 72 and 760C, the valve
should commence to open.
35 When the thermostat is shaken in water at a temperature of 90 0C, the valve should be fully open in less than
20 seconds.
NOTE - The thermostat cannot be repaired. If it does not satisfy the tests described above, it must be replaced.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST FROST
36 The cooling system contains 19 pints (11 litres) of liquid. This mixture should contain 14 pints (8 litres) of water
and 5* pints (3 litres) anti-freeze.
Our Service Department issue technical notes indicating the anti-freeze materials approved by our laboratory.
It is also necessary to add to this mixture, an anti-rust product, the only inhibitor recommended by our
laboratory is the Chausson inhibitor (used in accordance with the instructions supplied).
It is advised that you check each year at the approach of cold weather, that the cooling system of your car
contains the prescribed dosage of anti-freeze and anti-rust.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 312-1 Replacement of a clutch. Op. DS 312-1 164
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Remove the gearbox (see Op. DS 330-1).
2 Disconnect the clutch from the engine flywheel and remove ......................................... 12 mm box spanner
3 Check the condition of the crankshaft spigot bearing. Also check the thrust race, the clutch operation, its shaft
and tighten the fixing screw.
REFITTING.
4 To connect the clutch to the engine flywheel

a) Make sure that the thrust faces on the clutch and flywheel are clean.
b) Connect the clutch to the flywheel. Use the mandrel (mandrel 171Z-T, see Pl. 44, fig. 4) or a clutch shaft in
order to centralise the disc.
During the tightening of the fixing screws, make sure that the mandrel slides normally, indicating that the
disc has been properly centralised. Tighten the screws to 14.5 + 1.9 ft/lbs (2 + 0.250 m.kg) (spring washers
under the heads). -0 -0
Remove the mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel 1712-T
12 mm box spanner
5 Replace the gearbox (see Op. DS 330-1).
6 Adjust the clutch drag (see Op. DS 314-0).

DS 19 OPERATION No. US 312-3 :, Overhauling a clutch assembly. Op. DS 312-3 165
PARTICULAR POINTS
Dismantling.
1 Mark the position of the clutch driving plate on the toggle carrier plate.
Assembly.
5 Compensate for the loss of thickness of the clutch driving plate, after rectification, by fitting steel washers under the spring equal in thickness
to the amount removed from the driving plate (original thickness 13.0 — 0.3 mm. Do not reduce the thickness below 12 mm)
0
6 Spring characteristics.
6 springs, marked white: length 29’ 7 mm under a load of 64 + 4.5 kg.
0
3 springs, marked green: length 29 7 mm, under a load of 52 + 4 kg.
0
8 When refitting the toggle carrier plate, see that the marks made when dismantling correspond. Do not forget to fit the washers, determined in
paragraph 5, under the springs.
9 Adjust the clutch on the fixture placing the clutch in the engaged position. Use the fixture (see Pl. 43, fig. 2).
Obtain the dimension (a) 37 mm, between the toggles and the driving plate and dimension (b) 17.8 mm, between the toggle carrier plate and
the driving plate.
TOOLS
1 Mark the position of the clutch driving plate (1) on the toggle carrier plate (2). Clear the metal locking the nuts (3)
from the slots of the screws (4). Remove the toggles (5) by unscrewing the adjusting nuts (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
2 Disengage the clutch driving plate (1), the springs (6) and the spring cups (7).
3 Disengage the toggles (5) and the toggle springs (8).
4 Clean the parts.
5 Grind the clutch driving plate (1) on a lathe (it is preferable to carry out this operation by grinding but if this is
not possible, it can be carried out with a facing tool).
DS 19 OPERATION No. US 312-3 :, Overhauling a clutch assembly. Op. DS 312-3 166
TOOLS
NOTE - Each rectification of the clutch driving plate surface causes loss of pressure on the clutch disc. To
compensate for this loss of pressure, fit steel washers to the springs, equal in thickness to the amount removed
from the clutch driving plate.
In order to obtain the thickness of these washers, take the dimension “c”, see fig. 3, which was originally
0
13– mm.
0.3
If the dimension “c” is less than 12 mm, the driving plate cannot be rectified and must be replaced.
6 Test the springs (use the fixture 2420-T, see Pl. 6):
+4. 5
6 springs, marked white : length 29.7 mm under a load of 64 kg.
0
+3.5
3 springs, marked green: length 29.7 mm under a load of 52 kg.
0
NOTE - If the testing fixture is not available, it is advisable to replace the springs at each overhaul . . . . . . . . . . Fixture 2420-T
7 Hook the springs (8) on the toggle carrier plate (2).
8 Put the clutch springs (6) on the bosses of the clutch driving plate (I), placing a spring marked white between two
springs marked green in the group of three between two toggles. Place on each spring, the cup (7), insert if
necessary, between the spring and the cup, the distance washers indicated in paragraph 5.
Offer up the carrier plate (2) on the cups corresponding to the marks made when dismantling, put the toggles (5)
under the springs (8). Put the screws (4) in position. Compress the assembly, put the washers (9) on the toggle
screws. Tighten the nuts (3).
9 To adjust the mechanism.
Put the clutch assembly on a fixture (use fixture 1701-T, see Pl. 43). Tighten the nuts (3) in order to bring the
toggles (5) into contact with the underside of the central pivoting lug (C) of the fixture (see Pl. 43, fig. 3).
In these conditions (clutch in the engaged position), the dimensions obtained should be “a” = 37 mm between
the toggles and the plate and “b’ = 17. 8 mm between the plate and the toggle carrier plate (see Pl. 43, fig. 2).
Operate the clutch and adjust the toggles. Lock the nuts by driving the metal. of the nuts into the slot of the
screw (4) using a chisel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
NOTE - If the fixture 1701-T is not available, the simplified fixture MR-3457-100 (see Pl. 44) can be used. In order Fixture 1701-T
to check the positioning of the toggles, operate the clutch with the aid of the press, before locking the nuts. Finger, ring and clamp
1704-T
On this assembly, the dimension ‘c” between the top of the toggles and the face plate is 57 mm Fixture MR-3457-l00
IMPORTANT - The clutch can only be adjusted in the engaged position. Using the fixtures shown on Pl. 43 and
44 automatically puts the clutch in this position.
The dimensions indicated can only be checked on these fixtures. When the clutch is released from the fixture,
the toggles rest on an uneven surface and it is impossible to obtain a correct dimension.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 314-0 : Checking and adjustments on the clutch control. Op. DS 314-0 167
PARTICULAR POINTS
Checking the clutch cylinder for leakage (test bench 2290-T).

The clutch cylinder should be free from leakage under a pressure of 1,070 p.s.i. (75 kg/cm2).
Checking the clutch (test bench 2290-T).

6 Put the manual control in the “engaged” position.
8 With a tension of 72 ft/lb (1 m.kg) exerted on the starting handle with a torsion spanner the clutch should disengage when a pressure of 425
p.s.i. (30 kg/cm2) is applied in the clutch cylinder.
Checking the clutch pressure (test bench 2290-T).

9 Build up the pressure in the clutch cylinder to 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2) then let it drop very slowly.
Raise the pressure again to the exact moment when the clutch slips with a tension of 7 2ft/lb (1 m.kg) being applied on the starting handle.
The difference between this pressure and that in paragraph 8, should not be greater than 98 p.s.i. (7 kg/cm2).
Check the hydraulic gear selector pressure (test bench 2290-T).

This test should be carried out with a warm engine, the springs of the clutch engagement control and the accelerated idling control
unhooked. Apply the parking brake.
12 Connect the clutch cylinder feed pipe to a pressure gauge 0-1,500 p.s.i. (0-100 kg/cm2) the second opening of the test bench pump connected
to a pressure gauge 0-3,000 p.s.i. (0-200 kg/cm2). Using the test bench pump, raise the pressure in the clutch cylinder to 995 p.s.i. (70
kg/cm2).
13 Put the manual clutch control in the normal running position.
With the engine running at 550 r.p.m. (revolution counter) engage first gear, the pressure should be 420 p.s.i. (29 kg/cm2) minimum.
14 Stop the engine. The pressure should increase to 530 to 690 p.s.i. (37 to 48 kg/cm2); the needle of the pressure gauge should swing between
these two figures.
15 Start the engine. The pressure should drop to 420 p.s.i. (29 kg/cm2) minimum.
IMPORTANT - During each operation the pressure in the clutch cylinder should not drop below 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2).
Adjustment of the clutch drag (revolution counter).
This check should be carried out with the engine warm, the car on a level surface the springs of the clutch engagement control and the
accelerated idling control unhooked, the clutch clearance being set (1 to 2 mm).
19 By accelerating very slowly, movement should commence between 700 and 750 r.p.m. If movement commences at a speed less than 700
r.p.m. tighten the adjusting screw. Untighten the adjusting screw if movement commences at a greater speed than 750 r.p.m. The end of
the screw should be at a distance of 17 to 25 mm from the end of the body.
Adjust the clutch clearance.
Pre-adjustment.
21 This adjustment should be carried out with the engine stopped, and the hydraulic system under pressure. Move the clutch fork towards the
rear, have the starting handle turned by an assistant.
22 Start the engine. By pressing on the starting handle extension, it should be driven back.
Move the clutch fork towards the front (by fractions of turns on the adjusting nuts). The pre-adjustment is obtained when, by pressing on the
starting handle extension, it turns some degrees and stabilises itself, without being driven back.
Adjustment.
23 Unscrew the front adjusting nut of the fork one to two turns, to obtain a clearance of I to 2 mm, then tighten the rear nut and the locknut.
Adjustment of the clutch engagement control.
Accelerator control with 2 rods (until March 1956).
24 With the engine stopped, press the accelerator pedal right down, clearance “d” of I to 2 mm between the pin and the hook of the spring, with
the pin resting at the lower part of the slot.
If not, adjust the length of the spring by moving its end in the trunnion (see Pl. 46).
Accelerator control with 1 rod.
25 a) (Until December 1956) (Spring outside diameter 13. 2 mm).
With the engine stopped press the accelerator pedal right down, the hook of the spring should be without tension or without clearance on the
pin with the pin resting on the lower part of the slot. If necessary, adjust the length of the spring by moving its end in the trunnion.
b) (Since December 1956) (Spring outside diameter 15. 5 to 16. 1 mm).
This spring can be fitted in place of the old spring. Proceed as follows:—
Hook the spring on the pin, the pin being in the lower part of the slot, the other end engaged in the trunnion.
Press the accelerator pedal right down, push the lever until it stops (towards the engine) the hook of the spring resting on the pin.
Measure the distance “1” from the trunnion to the end of the spring, pull on the spring so that the end is at a distance “l” + 6 mm from the
trunnion and tighten the screw of the trunnion (see Pl. 47).
c) (Since July 1959) (Spring with adjusting screw).
Proceed as indicated in line (b) above, pull on the spring in order to increase the distance “l” by 2 mm, the adjusting screw being in the
middle position.
Complete the adjustment on the road.
Checking the adjustments (on the road).
Change from 1st gear to 2nd gear at 20 m.p.h. and release the accelerator pedal. Clutch engagement should occur without delay and without
jerk.
Running in 4th gear at 56 m.p.h., maintain the accelerator pedal in this position and change to 3rd gear. Clutch engagement should occur
without delay or without a jerk.
Check a non-return valve and low pressure system (see Pl. 76).
27 Insert the union and pressure gauge assembly (2294-T) in the return of the low-pressure pump.
28 With the engine idling, bleed the hydraulic gear selector. Stop the engine. Check the pressure. It should be between 8 and 14 p.s.i. (0.600 and
I kg/cm2).
29 Stop the engine, the pressure should not drop.
No alteration is possible on this part.
TOOLS
CHECKING A CLUTCH CYLINDER FOR LEAKAGE (see Pl. 49).
1 In order to carry out this operation, prepare a long pipe by connecting the pipes (A) and (B) (see Pl. 173) and
prepare the test bench as indicated on Pl. 171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Bench 2290-T
2 Release the pressure in the clutch system by operating the auxiliary clutch control.
3 Disconnect the pressure feed pipe from the clutch cylinder.
Connect the pipe (B) on the clutch cylinder, place the test bench by the side of the car and connect the end of
the pipe (A) to the pump orifice “a” (bend the pipe if necessary).
4 Tighten the bleed screw “b” of the test bench and operate the pump in order to build up pressure. Unscrew the
bleed screw “b” in order to bleed the system. Carry out this operation three times, then build up the pressure
to 1070 p.s.i. (75 kg/cm2). The pressure gauge (MI) should indicate no drop in pressure, if so, the joint or
piston assembly is defective.
CHECKING THE CLUTCH (see Pl. 49).

NOTE - This operation is carried out only
When the engine frequently stalls when braking, even if the slow running and clutch are properly adjusted.
When the gears “crash” when engaging.
5 In order to carry out this operation, prepare a long pipe by connecting the pipes (A) and (B) (see Pl. 173) and
prepare the test bench as indicated on Pl. 171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Bench 2290-T
6 Release the pressure in the clutch system by operating the auxiliary clutch control.
7 Disconnect the pressure feed pipe from the clutch cylinder.
Connect the pipe (B) on the clutch cylinder, place the test bench by the side of the car and connect the end
of the pipe (A) to the pump orifice “a” (bend the pipe if necessary). Tighten the bleed screw “b”.
8 To check the clutch pressure.
Put the starting handle in position, fitted with a socket 14 mm across flats and a torsion spanner (torsion spanner
2471-T, see Pl. 7, fig. 2).
Exert a pressure of 10.8 ft/lbs (1.5 m.kg) on the starting handle in order to turn the engine.
While maintaining this pressure, have the pump operated by an assistant, so as to gradually raise the pressure
in the clutch cylinder.
Note carefully the pressure at which the clutch is disengaged, (the moment when the handle can be turned
without turning the engine). With a pressure of 7.2ft/lbs (1 m.kg), this pressure should be less or at the most
equal to 425 p.s.i. (30 kg/cm2).
TOOLS
NOTE - If this pressure is greater than 425 p. 6.1. (30 kg/cm2), it is probably caused by piston seizure (in this
case, it is necessary to replace the piston and cylinder assembly) or a mechanical cause
Thrust race slides badly.
Fork out of alignment in relation to the thrust race.
Screw fixing the fork unscrewed (in order to retighten this screw without any dismantling, use the spanner
1705-T, see Pl. 64, fig. 3).
Bent or seized clutch fork.
Incorrect toggle adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsion spanner 2471-T
14 mm socket
9 To check the pressure of the clutch. Spanner 1705-T
Operate the pump in order to build up the pressure to 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2).
Release the pressure slowly by unscrewing the bleed screw “b” of the test bench.
Slowly turn the starting handle, noting the reading on the scale of the torsion spanner. Note the pressure
indicated on the pressure gauge (MI) at the precise moment that the clutch slips with a tension of 7. 2 ft/lbs (1
m.kg) being applied on the starting handle. The difference between this pressure and that in paragraph 8
should not be greater than 98 p.s.i. (7 kg/cm2). Untighten the bleed screw “b” of the test bench.
CHECKING THE PRESSURE OF THE HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR
This check should be carried out with a warm engine, choke closed, ignition control in the midway position, clutch
engagement control spring disconnected from the accelerator control and the accelerated idling unhooked.
Apply the parking brake.
10 Using the pipe (A) or the assembly of the pipes (A) and (B), connect the end of the clutch cylinder feed pipe to the
pressure gauge (MI) of the test bench.
11 Prepare the test bench as indicated on Pl. 172 and connect the clutch cylinder to the pump of the test bench using
the pipes (A) and (B) prepared in paragraph 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test bench 2290-T
12 Tighten the bleed screw “b” of the test bench and operate the pump in order to raise the pressure in the clutch
cylinder to approximately 995 p.s.i. (70 kg/cm2).
13 Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the normal running position.
With the engine idling (550 r.p.m. checked with a revolution counter, see paragraph 17 below). Engage first
gear. The pressure indicated on the pressure gauge (MI) should be 420 p. s. 1. (29 kg/cm2) minimum.
14 Stop the engine. The pressure (MI) should increase to 530 to 690 p.s.i. (37 to 48 kg/cm2).This pressure is not
constant; the needle of the pressure gauge should swing between these two figures (37 to 48 kg/cm2).
If the movement of the needle of the pressure gauge is not steady, this points to the bad grooving of the 38 mm
diameter piston, or the automatic clutch control valve (19) (see Pl. 70, fig. 1).
TOOLS
15 Start the engine and note the pressure gauge (M1) : the needle should drop to a pressure of 420 p.s.i. (29 kg/cm2)
minimum.
If the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge is lower than 420 p.s.i. (29 kg/cm2), the hole of the 38 mm
diameter piston is partially blocked (when this hole is totally blocked, the pressure falls to zero). It is then
necessary to remove the front face of the hydraulic gear selector.
16 To remove the front face of the hydraulic gear selector, disconnect the flange of the low pressure pipe assembly.
Using a syringe, inject alcohol (only) into the hole in the 38 mm diameter piston and in the low pressure inlet
and return holes. Blow with compressed air and make sure that no rubber particles remain in the groove in
the bore receiving the 38 mm diameter piston.
IMPORTANT - During this operation, frequent checks of the pressure in the clutch control cylinder should be
made (indicated on the pressure gauge M2). The latter should not drop below 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2).
ADJUSTMENT OF CLUTCH DRAG

17 In order to carry out this operation, the use of a revolution counter is indispensable.
Use a mechanical revolution counter 2434-T, driven by the high pressure pump pulley or an electric revolution
counter 2436-T, connected to the yellow terminal of the top ignition coil, (in the case of a contact breaker with
2 breakers) or on the outlet terminal of the coil (in the case of 1 breaker).
If one uses a mechanical revolution counter and in order to avoid errors in reading due, on the one part to belt
slip on the high pressure pump or, on the other part, to uneven running of the engine during the test, unscrew
the pressure control valve bleed screw or put the manual height control in the low position.
The electric revolution counters should be periodically checked (periods vary according to use and quality of
material).
The electric revolution counters should comply with the following conditions
- Large diameter dial graduated from 0 to 1500 r.p.m. (maximum).
- Operate on a contact breaker with two cams and four cams.
- Needle steady during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical revolution
counter 2434-T
Electric revolution
NOTE - This adjustment should be carried out after checking and adjusting the clutch clearance (see paragraphs counter 2436-T
20 to 23, this operation), also the engine should be hot, choke control closed and the ignition control in the
midway position.
18 Put the car on a level surface.

Disconnect the spring (19) between the accelerator control and the clutch engagement control lever (21) from
the accelerator control (see Pl. 47).
Disconnect the plate (14) from the accelerated idling control (cars produced since March 1956) (see Pl. 28).
TOOLS
19 Adjustment of the clutch drag (see Pl. 45).
Accelerate very slowly. The clutch drag should occur between 700 and 750 r.p.m. If not, proceed as follows
a) Stop the engine. Remove the plug (10), loosen the body (11) acting as a locknut and turn the adjusting screw
(12). If the speed of engagement is below 700 r.p.m., screw up the screw and unscrew it if the speed of
engagement is above 750 r.p.m.
b) Tighten the body (11) at the same time holding the screw (12). The position of the head of the adjusting screw
should give a dimension “c” between 17 and 25 mm from the base of the body (11).
c) If the distance “c” is greater than 25 mm, the following may be the cause
- The spring of the control piston (38 mm dia.) is seized or by leakage (too great a clearance between the
piston and cylinder), or the hole in the 38 mm diameter piston is partially blocked.
d) If the distance “c” is less than 17 mm, this can be due to the spring of the control piston (38 mm dia.) being
weak.
e) If the adjustment is unstable, check the operation of the clutch control valve.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CLUTCH CLEARANCE

Pre-adjustment (see Pl. 45, fig. 1).
20 Put the hydraulic system under pressure, then stop the engine (it will be necessary to run it each time the pressure
falls).
21 Put the starting handle in position and have it turned by an assistant. Untighten the nut (1), unscrew the nuts (2)
and (3). Stop when the engine begins to be turned by the handle. Start the engine. Remove the starting handle
leaving the extension in position. Push the starting handle extension into engagement with the starting dog, it
will be repelled by the dog rotating.
22 Unscrew the nut (1) and retighten the nut (2), move the nuts a fraction of a turn each time. The pre-adjustment
is completed when, without exerting any effort on the starting handle extension, this being pushed into
engagement with the starter dog, it is stabilised without ratcheting over the dog on the primary shaft . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
Adjustment.
23 Slacken the nut (1) by 1 to 2 turns, so as to obtain a clearance between the nut and the fork of 1 to 2 mm. Tighten
the nut (2) and tighten the locknut (3).
ADJUSTMENT OF THE CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT CONTROL
24 Accelerator control with 2 rods (see Pl. 46, fig. 1).
Stop the engine, press the accelerator right down.
There should now be a clearance at “d” of 1 to 2 mm between the pin (6) and the hook of the spring, with the pin
resting on the lower part of the slot.
If necessary, adjust the length of the Spring by moving its end in the trunnion (7).
TOOLS
25 Accelerator control with 1 rod (see Pl. 46, fig. 2).
Stop the engine, press the accelerator pedal right down. The hook of the spring should be fitted without strain
or without clearance on the pin (6) with the pin resting at the lower part of the slot “a”. If necessary, adjust the
length of the spring by moving its end in the trunnion (7). Make sure that the spring does not touch the nut (8).
26 New clutch re-engagement control spring (since December 1956, see Pl. 47).
This spring has a diameter of 15.5 to 16.1 mm (for identification).
The earlier spring has a diameter of 13.2 mm. The new spring can be fitted in place of the old spring, if the
adjustments given below are carried out.
With the pin (18) resting on the lower part of the slot “a”, hook the spring (19) on the pin.
Engage the end of the spring in the hold “b” of the trunnion, the screw (20) being sufficiently unscrewed to
allow it to slide freely.
With the engine stopped, have the accelerator pedal pressed right down, by an assistant. Push the lever (21) in
the direction “F” until it stops. The hook of the spring should fit without restraint on the pin (18), measure the
distance “l”.
a) Hold the lever (21), pull on the spring so that the end is at a distance of 1 + 6 mm from the trunnion. Tighten
the screw (20).
b) (Cars produced since July 1959) : Pull on the spring in order to increase the distance “1” by 2 mm (1 + 2 mm),
the adjusting screw being in the middle position. Complete the adjustment on the road.
NOTE - It is sometimes necessary to make the adjustments (idling, clutch drag, clutch clearance and clutch
engagement) again after a few dozen miles.
To carry out the clutch engagement adjustment on the road
1. On a level road, change from 1st gear to 2nd gear at 20 m.p.h. (30 km/h) and completely release the
accelerator pedal. Clutch engagement should occur without a jerk.
2. On a level road, running at 56 m. p. h. (90 km/h) in 4th gear, maintain the accelerator pedal in this position
and change to 3rd gear. Clutch engagement should occur without a jerk.
If a jerk occurs, tighten the clutch engagement control spring. If there is delay, lengthen the spring.
CHECKING A NON-RETURN VALVE (see Pl. 76).

27 Disconnect the return pipe union from the low pressure pump (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig.4) and insert the
union and pressure gauge assembly (sold under number 2294-T, see Pl. 76), between the low pressure pump Spanner 2220-T or
and the return pipe 14 mm spanner
Union and gauge 2294-T
28 With the engine idling, bleed the hydraulic gear selector. Stop the engine. Check the pressure. It should be between
8 and 14 p.s. i. (0. 600 and 1 kg/cm2).
29 The pressure should not drop. If so, the valve is defective. No alteration is possible on this part and it should be
replaced by a part which will comply with the above conditions.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 314-1 Work on the clutch controls. Op. DS 314-1 174
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a clutch cylinder.

When assembling, pass the control rod through the belts. Adjust the tension of the belts to 21 1/2 ft/lb (3 m.kg) (see Op. DS 231-0 and Pl. 35).
Adjust the clutch clearance (see Op. DS 314-0).
Replacement of a clutch cylinder joint.

Dismantling.
17 Wrap the cylinder and piston assembly, in a cloth and blow out the piston with compressed air (circlips removed).
18 Clean the parts with alcohol only.
Assembly.
21 Check the piston cylinder assembly for leakage (see Op. DS 314-3).
Replacement of a clutch engagement control.

30 Clean the parts in alcohol only.
31 Adjust the engagement control (see Op. DS 314-0).
Replacement of a clutch fork.

Removal.
It is necessary to remove the gearbox (see Op. DS 330-1).
Assembly.
42 It is essential to fit a clutch fork spindle fixing screw fitted with a locknut.
Replacement of a thrust race.

It is necessary to remove the gearbox in order to carry out this operation.
Replacement of a thrust race nut.

Removal.
It is necessary to remove the gearbox and disconnect the clutch bellhousing from the gearbox casing. Mark the differential bearing distance
pieces and adjusting shims. Disengage the bearing outer cups laterally.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 314-1 : Work on the clutch controls. Op. DS 314-1 175
Assembly.
61 When mounting the casings, fit the differential bearing distance pieces and adjusting shims in their respective positions, marked when
dismantling. If the parts are not marked it is necessary to adjust the differential bearings (see Op. DS 330-3).
The longest bearing is fitted on the left-hand side.
Replacement of an oil seal (Cyclam).
In order to carry out this operation, it is necessary to remove the gearbox and disconnect the clutch bellhousing from the gearbox casing
(see Op. 66 this operation).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH CYLINDER
1 Release the pressure in the clutch cylinder by means of the auxiliary clutch control.
2 Disconnect the tie-rod on the high pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
3 Loosen the pump spindle fixing nut, remove the belt, work the pump towards the outside (spanner 2280-T,
see Pl. 72, fig. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2280-T
4 Disconnect the pressure feed pipe from the clutch cylinder (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
5 Remove the front nut (1) on the clutch fork control rod (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
6 Remove the screws fixing the clutch cylinder and remove the control rod and cylinder assembly.
7 Remove the control rod and dust cover from the clutch cylinder.
8 Clean the parts with alcohol.
9 Put the control rod (4) and the rubber dust cover in position on the clutch cylinder.
10 Fit the clutch cylinder. Tighten the screws (spring washers) (Note - The screw on the high pressure pump side is
longer and secures the cylinder and clutch housing).
Pass the control rod through the high pressure pump belts. Put it in position on the clutch fork. Fit the spigot
nut (1).
TOOLS
11 Connect the pressure feed pipe to the clutch cylinder (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4). The pipe
must be fitted without any strain, set it if necessary. Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
12 Fit the driving belt on the pump pulley and connect the tie-rod to the pump. Tension the belt or belts moderately
(see Op. DS 231-0) and lock the nut. Tighten the pump spindle fixing nut (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5). 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 2280-T
13 Put the system under pressure, check the unions for leaks. Bleed the hydraulic gear selector unit.
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH CYLINDER JOINT
Dismantling (see Pl. 48, fig. 1).
15 Remove the dust cover and control rod assembly from the cylinder. Remove the control rod from the dust cover.
16 Using circlip pliers, remove the circlip (1) retaining the piston (2) from the cylinder.
17 Wrap the cylinder and piston assembly in a cloth and blow out the piston with compressed air. Remove the ring
seal (3) using a small brass wire hook. (Do not use steel wire, in order to avoid scratches on the cylinder or
damage to the sides of the groove).
18 Clean the parts thoroughly using alcohol only to the exclusion of all other products. Blow with compressed air.
Assembly (see Pl. 48, fig. 1).
19 Insert the mandrel MR-3045-60 (see Pl. 48, fig. 2 and 3) in the cylinder, moisten the joint with hydraulic fluid.
Offer up the joint in the bore of the cylinder. Obtain the positioning of the joint by pushing with the piston.
Remove the piston. Remove the mandrel using a screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel MR-3045-60
Screw 6 dia. x 100 pitch
Length = 60
20 Oil the bore of the cylinder and the piston with hydraulic fluid. Insert the piston (2) and push it to the bottom of
the cylinder. Put the circlip (1) retaining the piston in the groove of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circlip pliers.
21 Check the cylinder for leaks (see Op. DS 314-3).
22 Put the cylinder dust cover on the control rod and put the dust cover and control rod assembly on the cylinder.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT CONTROL
Removal (see Pl. 46, fig. 2).
23 Release the pressure.

24 Remove the coils and bracket assembly ...................................................... 8 mm box spanner
25 Disconnect the pressure inlet union from the pressure distribution block (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72,
fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
2221 - T
26 Disconnect the union plates from the hydraulic gear selector and from the clutch engagement control. Disconnect
the seal plates from the studs. Remove the seal plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 mm spanners
27 Unhook the clutch engagement control spring (1) from the accelerator connecting rod (2).
28 Remove the clutch engagement control (3) and its bracket ........................................... 8 mm box spanner
29 Remove the bracket (4) from the clutch engagement control. Note : only remove the two screws (5) which project
beyond the others.
IMPORTANT NOTE - In order not to lose adjustment, do not remove the control spring unless replacing the
clutch engagement control.
30 Clean all the parts in alcohol (do not use any other product).
Replace the seals of the seal plates.
31 Fit the bracket (4) on the clutch engagement control (3). Fit a spring washer under the heads of the screws.
32 Fit the clutch engagement control and bracket assembly on the steering column tunnel (spring washers) ...... 8 mm box spanner
33 Put in position the seal plates making certain that the oil holes correspond with the oil holes in the joints.
34 Put the union plates in position and the feed pipe in the bore of the pressure distribution block. Tighten this
union (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72 fig. 4) ............................................. Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
35 Tighten the nuts of the union plate fixing studs (fit spring washers under the nuts) ........................ 8-10 mm spanners
8-10mm box spanners
36 Hook the clutch engagement control spring (1) on the accelerator connecting rod (2).
37 Adjust the clutch engagement control (see Op. DS 314-0).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH FORK
39 Unscrew the nuts (2) and (3) and disengage the rod (4) from the fork (see Pl. 45, fig. 1).
40 Remove the clutch thrust retaining spring (73). Remove the thrust race.
41 a) Cars produced before June 1959.

Remove the locknut and the screw (75) retaining the clutch fork spindle (77). Remove the spindle (77), the
spring and the fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
b) Cars produced since June 1959 (see fig. 3).
Remove the two circlips locking the spindle (77) and remove the spindle, the spring and the fork.

42 a) Cars produced before June 1959.
Insert the spindle (77) previously oiled in the bore and offer up the fork together with its return spring. Tighten
the screw (75) (plain washer under the head) retaining the spindle (77) and tighten the locknut . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
b) Cars produced since June 1959
Engage the spindle (77), the fork and the spring. Fit the two spindle retaining circlips.
43 Put the thrust race in position, then fix to the fork using the spring (73).
44 Fit the rubber sealing plate on the clutch fork opening.
45 Offer up the gearbox and connect to the engine (see Op. DS 330-1).
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH THRUST RACE

48 Remove the clutch thrust retaining spring (73). Remove the thrust race from its hub (76) (see Pl. 52).
49 Put the thrust race in position, then fix to the clutch fork using the spring (73).
50 Offer up the gearbox and connect to the engine (see Op. DS 330-1).
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A CLUTCH THRUST RACE HUB
52 Remove the clutch thrust retaining spring (73). Remove the thrust race.
53 Remove the mechanical handbrake cable.
54 Remove the brake unit assemblies and front supports. It may be necessary to remove a brake shoe ........... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
55 Drain the gearbox .......................................................................... 21 mm box spanner
56 To remove the differential shaft, bearing and brake disc assembly (see Pl. 54).
a) Remove the screw (1) fixing the support arm (2).
Disengage the support arm (2) and remove the four bearing fixing screws (3).
Disengage the assembly from the gearbox. Remove the adjusting washer (4), and the distance washer (5). Mark
these parts in order to avoid having to re-adjust the differential bearings when reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
b) Remove the other shaft, bearing and brake disc assembly in the same manner.
c) Protect the brake discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber protector
57 Disconnect the clutch bellhousing from the gearbox casing.

Remove the differential bearing races from the clutch housing.
NOTE - The differential shaft is not in the same plane as the joint between the housings. The bearing races must
therefore only be removed sideways.
Hold the differential against the gearbox casing and remove the clutch bellhousing. Remove the differential. 12-17 mm spanners
58 Remove the fixing screws from the thrust bearing hub (76) (see Pl. 52). Remove the thrust bearing hub and the
paper joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Refitting.
59 Fit the thrust bearing hub (76), insert a paper joint smeared with Hermetic. Tighten the fixing screws and nuts
(spring washers under the heads of the lower screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 314-1: Work on the clutch controls. Op. DS 314-1 180
TOOLS
60 To connect the clutch housing to the gearbox housing :
a) Place the differential and crown wheel assembly, complete with bearings in the clutch housing.
b) Secure the clutch housing to the gearbox. Smear the joint faces with Hermetic fluid or linseed oil. Tighten the
screws and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 mm spanners
61 To fit the differential shaft, bearing and brake disc assemblies (see Pl. 54) :
a) Place the adjusting washers (4) and the distance washers (5)in their correct positions (marked in paragraph 56 a)).
NOTE - If the parts are not marked, the differential must be adjusted (see Op. DS 330-3, paragraph 43 and onwards).
b) Place the paper gasket on the bearing and fit the bearing in position, the oil drain duct towards the bottom (the
longest bearing fitted on the left).
Make sure that the distance piece (92) is fitted. Tighten the bearing fixing screw (3).
c) Insert the screws (1) (without tightening them), securing the support arms (2) (plain washers under the heads).
On the support arms, fit the support fixture 1799-T (see Pl. 51) and tighten the fixture fixing screws.
Tighten the support arm fixing screws (1) .................................................... 14 mm spanner
14 mm box spanner
62 Fit the brake unit and rear support assemblies .................................................... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
63 Fit the mechanical brake connecting cable.
64 Fit the thrust race, then secure the clutch withdrawal fork using the springs (73) (see Pl. 58).
65 Offer up the gearbox and connect to the engine (see Op. DS 330-1). Fill the gearbox 31/2 pints (2 litres) (SAE 90
EP oil).
REPLACEMENT OF A SEALING RING (Cyclam).

67 Disconnect the clutch housing from the gearbox housing (see paragraph 57, this operation).
68 Remove the sealing ring (13) from the mainshaft (22).

69 Place the sealing ring (13) in position on the mainshaft (22).
70 Connect the clutch housing to the gearbox housing (see paragraph 60, this operation). a).
TOOLS
71 Fit the differential shaft, bearing and brake disc assemblies (see paragraph 61,. this operation).
72 Fit the brake unit and rear support assemblies .................................................... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
73 Fit the mechanical brake connecting cable.
74 Offer up the gearbox and connect to the engine (see Op. DS 330-1). Fill the gearbox 3{ pints (2 litres)
(SAE 90 EP oil).
REPLACEMENT OF A PIPE ASSEMBLY BETWEEN A PRESSURE DISTRIBUTOR

AND HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR, CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT CONTROL AND
CLUTCH CYLINDER.
Removal.
75 Release the pressure ......................................................................... 8 mm spanner
76 Remove the flexible pipe between the petrol pump and the carburettor. Remove the oil dipstick and remove the
coils and bracket assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
77 Disconnect the pipe from the clutch cylinder (swing the high pressure pump towards the outside of the car).
Disconnect the pipe from the pressure distributor (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
78 Disconnect the front flange from the hydraulic gear selector and the rear flange from the clutch engagement control. 8 or 10 mm box
spanners
79 Remove the pipe assembly from the car, commencing with the rear part.
NOTE - On cars produced since February 1959, the pipe assembly is in two parts, with a union situated above
the oil dipstick.
Refitting.
80 Offer up the pipe assembly, commencing with the front part (if necessary, swing the dynamo towards the outside
of the car). The pipe assembly should pass (from the clutch cylinder) against the front of the engine and
follow along the left-hand side, behind the oil dipstick tube, between the contact breaker and the hydraulic
gear selector, then above the speedometer cable up to the pressure distributor.
IMPORTANT REMARK - During this operation, avoid if possible, the bending of the pipes. In no case should
the radius of the bend be less than 30 mm.
TOOLS
81 Connect the flanges to the hydraulic gear selector and to the clutch engagement control. Insert the seal plates
(renew the ring seals). Fit the nuts without tightening (spring washers). Connect the pipes to the pressure
distributor and the clutch cylinder.
Tighten the flange fixing nuts and tighten the pipe unions (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4), during
this operation, make sure that the pipes are not under strain and are not in contact with any unit of the car . . . . 8 or 10 mm spanners
Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
82 Refit and tension the high pressure pump and dynamo belts (see Op. DS 231-0).
83 Fit the coils and bracket assembly. Fit the oil dipstick and the flexible pipe between the pump and the carburettor 8 mm box spanner
84 Start the engine, put the systems under pressure and check the unions for leakage ....................... 8 mm spanner
85 Bleed the hydraulic gear selector.
REPLACEMENT OF A NON-RETURN VALVE
Removal.
86 Release the pressure. Remove the left-hand suspension sphere (strap wrench 2223-T, see Pl. 93, fig. 1) ...... Strap wrench 2223-T
8 mm spanner
87 Disconnect the low pressure pipe assembly from the hydraulic gear selector. Remove the seal plates ......... 8 or 10 mm box
spanners
88 Remove the non-return valve from its bracket on the body. Disengage the valve and flexible pipes, disconnect the
flexible pipes from the valve (do not mislay the rubber bushes fitted under the clips).
Be careful not to spill the fluid.
Refitting.
89 Connect the flexible pipes to the non-return valve. The body of the valve (large diameter) is fitted to the pipe
connecting to the hydraulic gear selector. Fit a rubber bush under each clip.
Tighten the clips (pliers 2483-T, see Pl. 17, fig. 2). Put the valve in position on its bracket on the body . . . . . Pliers 2483-T
90 Fit the seal plate of the low pressure pipe assembly on the hydraulic gear selector, making sure that the ring
seals correspond with the oil holes. Connect the low pressure pipe assembly to the hydraulic gear selector.
Tighten the nuts (spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm box
spanners
91 Fit the left-hand suspension sphere, tighten by hand,
92 Start the engine. Put the systems under pressure. Check the unions for leakage .......................... 8 mm spanner
93 Operate the auxiliary clutch control lever several times in order to bleed the hydraulic gear selector.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 314-3 : Work on the clutch control units. Op. DS 314-3 183
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A CLUTCH SYSTEM
See Op. DS 314-1, paragraphs 15 and onwards.
CHECKING FOR LEAKAGE (see Pl. 49).
In order to carry out this operation, the test bench should be prepared as indicated on Pl. 171. Connect the clutch
cylinder to the pump orifice “a”, using the pipe (H). Tighten the bleed screw “b” and operate the pump to obtain
a pressure of 1070 p.s.i. (75 kg/cm2). The pressure gauge (MI) should not indicate a drop in pressure, if so, the
joint or assembly is defective .............................................................. Test bench 2290-T
2 Release the pressure by unscrewing the pump bleed screw “b”.
Remove the pipe (H).
OVERHAULING A CLUTCH ENGAGEMENT CONTROL
3 Remove the connecting screws (6) from the body (7) and from the bearing block (8).
Disengage the bearing block from the body. Do not lose the ball (9).
4 Remove the upper plug (10). Remove the lower plug (11). Disengage the spring (12), the piston (13) and the ball
(14). Remove the seal (15), (16) and (17) ........................................ 8-14-17 mm box
spanners
5 Clean the parts in alcohol to the exclusion of all other products, do not use trichlorethylene and blow with
compressed air.
6 Make sure that the lever (18) is tight on the spindle, if not, replace the clutch engagement control. Make sure that
the lever (19) is tight on the spindle, if not, weld at one point.
7 To remake the seating of the ball (14). Insert a ball that is in good condition in the bore of the body and make an
impression by striking the ball with a drift and a mallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drift = 6 dia.
Length = 100
NOTE - Never carry out this procedure on the ball (9), the flow through the clutch engagement control being con-
trolled by the notches on the seating, spreading the metal by hammering destroys the notches and will modify
the flow; in this case, replace the clutch engagement control.
8 Put in the body of the clutch engagement control : a new ball (14), the piston (13) (see illustration for position).
A light cleaning up of the piston with No. 600 abrasive paper moistened with alcohol is permitted, if there are
any signs of slight seizure. Make sure that there is no obstruction in the hole. Fit the spring (12), the plug (11),
together with a ring seal (17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 mm box spanner
9 Put in the body, the ring seal (15), then the ball (9). Fit the bearing block (8) in the body (see illustration for
position).
During this operation, see that the ball (9) rests in position on its seating.
Fit the screws (6) (spring washer), hold the lever (18) on the ball (9). Fit the plug (10) together with its seal (16)
This is a square sectioned seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 mm box spanners
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-1 : Work on the gearbox. Op. DS 330-1 184
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a gearbox.
Removal.
3 Release the pressure and bleed the front brakes.
7 Mark the position of the steering wheel in relation to the pinion and the position of the steering in its bearings, before removal.
16 Do not mislay the adjusting shims fitted between the front support crossmember and the sidemembers.
Refitting.
19 Make sure that the dowel pins are in position in the crankcase before connecting the gearbox to the engine.
20 Align the driving pulley (see Op. DS 231-0).
22 Before tightening the fixing screws of the flexible coupling (bibax) (tightening torsion 18 ft lb (25 m.kg), make sure that the dowel pins are in
position in their housing in the flexible couplings.
23 Fit the shims found when dismantling, between the front support crossmember and the sidemembers. Make sure that the distance between the
brake disc and the sidemember on the left side, is greater by 70 ± 2 mm than the same distance measured on the right-hand side.
24 Adjust the height of the brake units. The lining should stand slightly proud of the disc at the front by approximately 1 mm.
27 To fit the steering: note the markings made during dismantling.
28 To adjust the angular position of the steering. The groove of the pinion should be in contact with the gauge pin of the adjusting fixture.
36 Refill the gearbox: 3I~ pints (2 litres) SAE 90 EP oil.
Refill the radiator, vane of the heater control open (bleed).
39 Bleed the front brakes (see Op. DS 453-0).
Replacement of a 1st speed selector lever.

Removal.
Remove the gearbox cover.
In order to remove the lever, carefully observe the instructions given in paragraph 49.
Refitting.
In order to refit the lever, carefully observe the instructions given in paragraph 50.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-1 Work on the gearbox. Op. DS 330-1 185
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A GEARBOX
Removal.
1 Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1).
Drain the water cooling system (save this water which contains anti-freeze).
Put the front of the car on stands, supporting the car under the jacking points (jacking bracket 2505-T, ..... Stop MR-4158
see Pl. 168). Jacking bracket 2505-T
21 mm spanner
2 Remove the spare wheel, the spare wheel support, the air deflection panel, the heater hoses, the front wings,
the brake cooling ducts and the steering relay protection shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12-14mm box
spanners
3 To release the pressure (see Pl. 50).
Loosen the bleed screw (107) on the pressure control valve (108).
Connect a rubber pipe on the bleed screw of the front left-hand brake. This screw is situated on the hydraulic
control, on the carburettor. Raise the attaching plate holding the return spring of the slow running control lever
(see Pl. 28, fig. 2).
Put the end of the pipe in the fluid reservoir.
Unscrew the bleed screw (30) (spanner 2141-T, see Pl. 143, fig. 4).
Press on the brake pedal until the fluid no longer flows .......................................... Spanner 2141-T
8 mm spanner
4 Disconnect and remove the battery.
Disengage the battery tie-rods from the bracket, rest the tie-rod and starter solenoid on the sidemember.
Remove the battery bracket, disconnect the bonnet lock control cable from the control rods on the scuttle and
remove the bracket and cable assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
5 Remove the expansion chamber with its bracket (L.H. drive cars) .................................... 12-14mm box spanners
6 Disconnect the high pressure pump feed pipe from the reservoir.
Disconnect the rubber inlet and outlet pipes from the radiator.
Remove the radiator tie- rod. Remove the screws fixing the radiator on the crossmember. Remove the radiator.
Remove the headlamp harness tube, the cable and the earth lead (cars produced before February 1957) . . . . . 8-12-14 mm box
spanners
7 Remove the steering (see Pl. 125). Mark (with a spot of paint) at “b”, the angular and transverse position of the
steering in relation to the bearing caps.
Mark also the position of the steering column in relation to the pinion (mark with a centre punch or a spot of
paint opposite the slot at “a”).
TOOLS
Disconnect the steering levers from the relay.
Hold the steering column (setting gauge 1993-T, see Pl. 125).
Disconnect the steering feed pipe assembly (5), from the pinion housing. Remove the bearing caps and remove
the steering. Seal the steering pipe assembly with a plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 mm spanners
10 mm ring spanner
8 Unscrew the swivel union nut of the high pressure pump (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) and the nut of the Setting gauge 1993-T
high pressure pump tie-rod.
Remove the belts. Remove the pressure control valve (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4 or 14 mm spanner).
Seal the return pipe to the reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
Spanner 2280-T
Spanner 2220-T or
14 mm spanner
9 Disconnect the wires to the dynamo from the regulator. Disconnect the tie-rod. Untighten the front screw. Remove
the rear screw. Remove the two belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10-12mm box
Spanners
14 mm spanner
10 Remove the driving pulley (109) (do not mislay the key and the adjusting washer). Hold the shaft in position using 14 mm ring spanner
a clamp held by the pulley fixing screw, in order to avoid the shaft being pulled through the ball-race when
removing the gearbox (see Pl. 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
11 Disconnect the 5 pipe assembly from the gearbox. Disconnect the speedometer cable 10 mm ring spanner
12 Disconnect the clutch cylinder feed pipe (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4).
Disconnect : the brake feed pipe from the 3-way union (41) (see Pl. 25), the union (111) of the accelerated idling
control pipe, from its fixing plate on the rear brake unit support and the brake feed pipe union (112). Pass the
feed pipe over the idling pipe (see Pl. 141) .................................................... Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
13 Disconnect the accelerator control from the carburettor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
14 Remove the wheels. Disconnect the flexible coupling (bibax) from the gearbox driving plate ............... 12 mm socket extension
15 Disconnect the mechanical brake control. Press on the right-hand brake control lever (3) and unhook the control
cable of the left-hand lever (9) (see Pl. 153).
16 Pass a rubber sheathed chain sling (chain sling 1697-T, see Pl. 51) under the water pump. Support the engine
(engine stand 1797-T, see Pl. 51).
Remove the front engine support crossmember (do not mislay the shims fitted between the crossmember and
the sidemember).
Raise the engine gearbox assembly so that the gearbox will clear the front crossmember. (Note : do not damage Chain sling 1697-T
the accelerator controls) Supportfixture1797~T
14 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-1 : Work on the gearbox. Op. DS330-1 187
TOOLS
17 Put the support fixture 1779-T on the gearbox (see Pl. 51).
Hold the gearbox with a lifting tackle in order to avoid damage to the shaft or clutch plate when disconnecting
the gearbox from the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support fixture 1799-T
18 Remove the screws fixing the clutch bellhousing (spanner 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T, see
Pl. 72, fig. 1). Disengage the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1677-T
Spanner 2431-T
Refitting.
19 Put the support fixture 1799-T on the gearbox (see Pl. 51).
Make sure that the dowel pins are in position on the engine.
Offer up the gearbox, make sure that it is in alignment with the engine. Engage the splines of the mainshaft
in the splines of the clutch plate by turning the mainshaft with a starting handle.
If necessary, turn the driving shaft in order to facilitate the entry of the splines in the camshaft.
Fit the screws fixing the gearbox (spanner 1677-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 4 and spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1). Spanner 1677-T
Spanner 2431-T
Support fixture 1799-T
20 Fit and align the driving pulley and fit the belts (see Op. DS 231-4).
21 Connect the feed pipe to the clutch control cylinder without strain, tighten the nut moderately to 4.3 to 5.7 ft/lbs
(0.6 to 0.8 m.kg), the pipe should pass in front of the brake pipe (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4). Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
12 mm box spanner
22 Remove the support fixture 1799-T, from the gearbox.
Fit the starter motor alignment fixing screws, tighten lightly and lock the locknuts. Lower the engine slightly.
Fit the flexible couplings. Make sure that the dowel pins are in position in their housings in the coupling.
Tighten the screws to 18 ft/lbs (2.5 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12mm socket extension
12 mm spanner
23 Offer up the crossmember on the gearbox brackets (see Pl. 50).
Engage the brake unit adjusting rods (113) in the yokes (114). Pay attention to the positioning. Fix the
crossmember on the brackets, tighten the screws and turn down the lockplates. Lower the engine gearbox
assembly until the crossmember rests on the sidemember.
Remove the chain sling.
Fit the shims found when dismantling between the crossmember and the sidemembers and tighten the screws to
25 1/4 ft/lbs (3. 5 m. kg) (plain and spring washers). The distance between the brake disc and the sidemember on
the left side should be greater by 70 ± 2 mm than the same distance measured on the right side . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
TOOLS
24 To adjust the height of the brake units (see Pl. 141), work on the length of the adjusting rods (113) (see Pl. 50) so
that the linings stand slightly proud of the disc at the front by approximately 1 mm (see fig. 1).
Tighten the adjusting nut (101) on the brake connecting cable (110) until the right and left control levers (103)
are at the limit of separation of their eccentric stops (104).
Lock the locknut (101).
Hook on the mechanical brake cable (102).
To do this : push with a screwdriver on the short lever (115) and fix the cable.
Connect the cables of the dynamo to the terminals of the regulator.
Refit the brake cooling ducts.
Make sure the ducts do not foul the discs. If necessary, reposition the ducts in the slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14mm box spanners
12-21mm spanners
10mm ring spanner
25 Connect the 5 pipe assembly to the gearbox
26 Pass the idling control pipe under the brake feed pipe.
Connect the union (112) to the brake unit. Connect the union (111) and put the fixing plate on the rear support
of the unit (see Pl. 141).
Connect the brake feed pipe union on the 3-way union (41) (see Pl. 25). Tighten the nut to 4.3 to 5.75 ft/lbs
(0.6 to 0.8 m.kg) (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
27 To fit the steering (see Pl. 125)
a) Position the steering pinion to correspond with the marks made when dismantling (centre punch or paint marks
opposite the slot on the column at a’).
b) Engage the steering pinion in the steering column. Put the steering assembly in the bearings in accordance with
the paint marks made when dismantling at “b.
Fit the fixing screws of the bearing cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
28 To adjust the angular position of the steering (see Pl. 125):

a) Fit the fixture 1955-T as indicated on Pl. 125 .................................................. Fixture 1955-T
b) Turn the steering assembly in its bearings so that the groove “c” touches the centre gauge pin (D) of the fixture.
c) Tighten the fixing screws (4) of the bearing cap and remove the fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
d) Connect the steering relay levers on the relay shafts, the nuts towards the outside. Tighten the nuts (8)
to 18 ft/lbs (2.5 m.kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16mm box spanners
e) Connect the pipe assembly (5) to the pinion housing. Fit the seal plates so that the holes for the fluid correspond
to those in the union plates 10 mm ring spanner
TOOLS
29 To fit the radiator
a) Place the rubber blocks in the cups on the crossmember.
b) Offer up the radiator and put the distance pieces in position on the plates on the radiator, the longer on the
right-hand side.
c) Fit the expansion chamber bracket. Fit the screws fixing the radiator and the bracket.
d) Centralise the radiator so that the blades of the fan do not touch the cowling. Position the plate fixing the
pressure regulator.
e) Tighten the fixing screws of the expansion chamber, radiator and pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
30 Put the cable harness tube in position (cars produced before February 1957). Provisionally fix the wire and the
earthing wire together with the left-hand plate of the tube on the gearbox cover.
31 Put the pressure control valve in position. Connect the pipe between the pump and the pressure control valve,
to the pressure control valve (spanner 2220-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4 or 14 mm spanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2220-T or
14 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
32 Fit the battery support. Fit the collars fixing the fluid reservoir. Pass the feed pipe for the high pressure pump
through the rubber grommet in the radiator tie-rod, then in the rubber collar on the water pipe and through
the rubber grommet on the battery support, then to the reservoir unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 mm box spanners
33 Fit the expansion chamber. Fit the clip fixing the exhaust downpipe. Make sure that there is a clearance of 5 mm
between the radiator and bracket.
34 Fit the battery. Fit the protection plate. Connect the cables to the terminals of the battery and starter motor.
Tighten the screw fixing the earth lead and the cable harness tube on the gearbox cover (cars produced
before 1957). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
8-14mm box spanners
35 Couple up the accelerator control to the carburettor ............................................... 7 mm box spanner
36 Refill the gearbox 3~ pints (2 litres) (SAE 90 EP oil).
Refill the radiator. Open the vane of the heater control and unscrew the bleed screw (46) (see Pl. 125) in order
to eliminate the air.
37 Unscrew the bleed screw of the pressure control valve. Start the engine and tighten the bleed screw in order to
put the systems under pressure ............................................................. 8 mm spanner
38 Fit the wheels. Tighten the screws to 108 to 144 ft/lbs (15 to 20 m.kg).
Note : do not spill fluid on the brake shoes.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-1 Work on the gearbox. Op. DS 330-1 190
TOOLS
40 Adjust the clutch clearance (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 20 to 23).

NOTE - It is sometimes necessary to make this adjustment again after a few dozen miles ................. 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
41 Fit the steering relay protection shields. Fit the wings. Fit the air ducts. Fit the air deflection panel. Fit the
spare wheel support. Connect the bonnet lock control cable. Check the closing of the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14mm box spanners
42 Fit the spare wheel and lower the car to the ground (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) .................. Jacking bracket 2505-T
REPLACEMENT OF A FIRST SPEED SELECTOR LEVER
43 Remove the spare wheel, the spare wheel support, the front wings and the air deflection panel .............. 12-14mm box spanners
14 mm spanner
44 Drain the radiator (retain this water which contains anti-freeze). Release the pressure.
45 Remove the battery and its support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner

8 mm box spanner
46 Remove the clips fixing the pressure control valve.
Remove the radiator.
Support the gearbox by using the stand 1797-T (see Pl. 51) or a wooden wedge between the casing and . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
crossmember. Stand 1797-T
47 Disconnect the steering levers from the relay shafts. Remove the front crossmember. Remove the steering (see
Op. DS 100-1, paragraph 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 mm box spanners
48 Remove the gearbox cover thrust block.

Remove the brake connecting cable. Remove the pipe connecting the high pressure pump to the regulator
(spanner 2220-T and 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4 and 5), let the regulator rest on the engine protection panel. . . . 12-14mm box spanners
Spanner 2280-T
Spanner 2220-T
49 Disconnect the gear control pipe assembly from the gearbox pipe assemblies. Unscrew the nuts from the screws
fixing the pipe assembly on the bracket to remove the pipe assembly bracket, disengage it towards the front.
On early models, it is necessary to remove the studs fixing the pipe assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 mm box spanners
50 Remove the screws and studs fixing the gearbox cover. Disengage the cover vertically in order to avoid dropping
the shoes of the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
TOOLS
51 To remove the 1st speed selector lever
a) Unscrew the lever spindle (23) until the lever is free from its trunnion, the fork being in contact with the 1st
speed pinion on the bevel pinion shaft. (The head of the spindle becomes forced against the front edge of the
gearbox support arm which twists it slightly. It is unnecessary to remove the spindle).
Hold the end of the lever with the left-hand.
b) Using a small iron wire hook, held with the right-hand, grip the spindle of the fork (24) and turn the fork
towards the top, at the same time holding the lever with the left-hand in a horizontal position. (The lever is 3/4
free from the fork spindle). Let go the lever. Hold the hook with the right-hand. Hold the fork and lever by the
fork spindle boss with the left-hand. Disengage the hook. Move the assembly towards the front by easing the
end of the lever, using a hook held in the right-hand. When the fork boss of the lever passes the spindle (23),
disengage the lever.
Refitting.
52 To fit the 1st speed selector lever

a) Using a hook held in the right-hand, raise the spindle on the fork towards the top (the pinion being positioned
towards the front). Using the middle finger of the left-hand, hold the trunnion, disengage the hook.
b) Offer up the lever horizontally in the box, the boss for the fork spindle towards the rear, the long part of the
boss towards the top. Hold the lever in this position between the thumb and index finger of the left-hand and
try to engage the lever on the trunnion. Engage the lever approximately 8 mm.
c) Hold the end of the lever using a hook held in the right-hand and ease the assembly back until it rests on the
pinion. It is sometimes necessary to push the pinion back with a screwdriver. Turn the assembly to its normal
position by raising the lever with a hook.
d) Engage the lever on its spindle. Screw the spindle holding the lever in order to avoid binding.
Tighten the spindle (23) .................................................................... 21 mm spanner
53 Put the pinions in neutral position. Put the cover in position : the fork of the 3rd and 4th speed being fitted with
its shoes (stick with grease to avoid dropping the shoes), lower the cover vertically; make sure that the forks
engage in the grooves of the sliding gears and the 1st speed lever in the groove of the fork. Fix the cover by
its 2 positioning screws, then by the other. screws and studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
54 Fit the pipe assembly bracket by engaging the studs in the slots of the rear pipe assembly flange. Tighten the
nuts of the pipe assembly fixing studs (plain and spring washers). Connect the pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 mm box spanners
TOOLS
55 Fit the connecting pipe between the pump and the pressure regulator (spanner 2220-T and 2280-T, see Pl. 72,
fig. 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2220-T and
Spanner 2280-T
56 Fit the brake connecting cable and adjust (see Op. DS 454-0).
Fit the thrust block bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
57 Fit the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraphs 43 to 45). Note the markings made when dismantling.
Fit the front crossmember. Connect the steering levers to the relay shafts. Position and tighten the screws.
Fixing the gearbox support arms to the crossmember. Remove the stand 1797-T or disengage the wooden wedge. 14-16 mm box
spanners
58 Fit the radiator. Fix the pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14mm box spanners
59 Fit the battery bracket and the battery. Fix the earth lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
8-14mm box spanners
60 Refill the radiator. Start the engine, bleed the water system.
Put the systems under pressure. Make successive movement through all the gears. Check the unions for
leakage. Stop the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
61 Fit the air deflection panel. Fit the wings and spare wheel support. Fit the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-2 Preparing the gearbox for stripping down. Op. DS 330-2 193
TOOLS
STRIPPING
1 To remove the front crossmember bracket.

a) Remove the lower nuts from the tie-rod front brackets of the brake units ............................. 21 mm spanner
21 mm box spanner
b) Remove the screws fixing the crossmember of the gearbox brackets and remove the crossmember ........ 14 mm box spanner
2 Remove the dynamo tie-bar. Remove the dynamo and the belts ..................................... 12-14 mm spanners
3 To remove the high pressure pump

a) Remove the tie- rod from the pump and remove the belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
b) Cars produced before October 1958:
Remove the high pressure pump fixing spindle nut and remove the assembly of the pump pressure regulator
connecting pipe and spindle.
Remove the pump (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) ........................................... Spanner 2280-T
c) Cars produced since October 1958:
Remove the high pressure pump fixing 4indle (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) and remove the assembly
of the high pressure pump and connecting pipe between the pump and pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2280-T
14 mm spanner
4 Disconnect the control rod (4) from the clutch fork. Remove the clutch cylinder (see Pl. 45) ................ 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
5 Remove the flange, fitted in order to hold the fan, dynamo and pump driving shaft during removal.
Remove the ring nut (70) (see Pl. 58) and remove the assembly of the shaft and bearing (71) towards the front
(spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
Spanner 1640-T
6 Remove the brake unit and rear support assembly. It may be necessary to remove a brake shoe 14-19 mm box spanners
7 Remove the pointed screw from the starter motor housing ........................................... 12 mm box spanner
8 Drain the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
REFITTING
9 Fit the shaft and bearing assembly. Tighten the ring nut to 18 ft/lbs (2.5 m.kg) (spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5)
and fit a split pin. Drill a 2. 5 mm diameter hole if there is not one opposite a recess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1640-T
10 Fit the front fixing of the dynamo without tightening, (spring washers under the heads).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-2 : Preparing the gearbox for stripping down. Op. DS 330-2 194
TOOLS
11 Fit the brake unit and rear support assemblies. Tighten the screws fixing the supports ................... 14-19 mm box spanners
12 Fit the front brake connecting cable. Fit the sheath stops and connect the cable to the control levers .......... 12mm box spanner
13 Fit the pulley on the driving shaft. Adjust the position of the pulley (see Op. DS 231-0) ................... 14 mm box spanner
14 Fit the belts on the driving pulley.
15 Fit the clutch cylinder, connect the control rod to the clutch fork.
16 To fit the high pressure pump.

a) Cars produced since October 1958.
Offer up the assembly of the high pressure pump and connecting pipe between the pump and pressure regulator.
Fit the fixing bolt and offer up the fixing nut (plain and spring washers) (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) . Spanner 2280-T
b) Cars produced before October 1958.
Offer up the high pressure pump and the assembly of the spindle and connecting pipe between the pump and
pressure regulator fitted with new ring seals. Fit the spindle fixing nut (spanner 2280-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 5) . . . . Spanner 2280-T
c) Fix the connecting pipe clamp on the gearbox 14 mm box spanner
d) Fix the tie-rod on the high pressure pump (plain and spring washers under the nuts).
e) Put the belts in position.
17 Fit the dynamo (plain and spring washers under the fixing screws). Put the belts in position. Fit the tie-rod
(plain and spring washers under the nuts).
18 To fit the front crossmember bracket.

a) Offer up the crossmember. Tighten the fixing screws of the crossmember on the gearbox support arms. Turn
over the lockwashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
b) Fit and tighten the lower nuts of the tie-rod front brackets of the brake units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
21 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-3 : Overhauling a gearbox. Op. DS 330-3 195
PARTICULAR POINTS
Dismantling.
After having disconnected the clutch housing from the gearbox casing, remove the outer differential bearing races sideways, the centre of the
differential is not on the line of the joint between the clutch bellhousing and the gearbox casing.
The needle bearing assemblies of the intermediate train are not of the same length, mark before dismantling.
To remove the assembly of the retaining washer and thrust washer, heat the thrust washer to 2000 C (using a blow pipe fitted with a 150 to
200 litre nozzle). Only carry out this operation if the washer assembly is to be renewed (scratches or loose).
Assembly.
23 To prepare the clutch housing

The rear-end of the clutch thrust guide stud should be set at a distance “b” = 97 ± 1 mm from the face of the joint with the engine. (see Pl.
58, fig. 2).
Do not refit the oil tube, if one existed when dismantling.
Adjust the position of the driving pulley (see Op. DS 231-0).
24 To prepare the gearbox cover:

Calibrate the fork return springs: Length 68 mm, under load of 245 to 26 kg.
25 To prepare the differential:

Lateral clearance of planet wheels = 0.30 mm maximum.
Lateral clearance of satellites = 0.30 mm maximum.
Tighten the screws fixing the crown wheel to 47 to 50 ft/lb (6.5 to 7 m.kg). Do not fit lockplates under the screw heads, fit an iron locking
wire through the heads of the screws in a manner to stop unscrewing.
26 To prepare the differential shafts

(a)Rectify the brake discs (shaft mounted between centres) by grinding or using a facing tool. Avoid removing in order to rectify the second
face.
(b) Maximum run-out at the greatest diameter = 0.17 mm. Difference in thickness at any point on the disc 003 maximum. Do not reduce the
original thickness of the disc (original thickness 12 ± 0.1 mm) by more than 1 mm.
27 To prepare the shaft and housing assemblies.

The differential shaft and housing is shorter on the right-hand side.
(a) Tighten the slotted nut locking the bearing to 72 ft/lb (10 m.kg) (spanner 1771- T).
(c) Fit the housing assembly (fitted with the bearing and oil seal) and support arm on the differential shaft, using a press.
(d) Tighten the nut on differential shaft to 72 ft/lb (10 m.kg) (spanner I 770-T).
28 To prepare the mainshaft.

Note the descriptions given in the text. There are different types of assemblies.
(a) Clearance of the third-speed pinion locking segments 0.02 to 0.06 mm.
(c) Movement of the synchro bush 0.20 to 0.65 mm.
(d ) Clearance of the rear bearing circlip = 0.02 to 0.06 mm.
(e and f) Clearance between the front bearing and the thrust face on the cap = 0.
29 To prepare the bevel pinion shaft.
(c) Clearance between the front bearing and the thrust face of the cap = 0.
32 To assemble the reverse gear layshaft.
The ground face of the thrust bearing, against the pinion. Lateral clearance of the assembly 0.05 to 0.20 mm.
Make sure that the screw, fitted with hermetic, is in the shaft (at the front).
33 To assemble the bevel pinion.
On cars produced before October 1957, it is necessary to fit the mainshaft before fitting the bevel pinion. Fit an adjusting shim of any
thickness, then the front bearing and the nut.
34 To assemble the mainshaft.
Tighten the starting handle dog to 72 to 87 ft/lb (10 to 12 m.kg). Tighten the bevel pinion shaft nut to 144 ft/lb (20 m.kg) (do not fit a nut with
a small collar).
36 To adjust the bevel pinion shaft.
The dimension which should be obtained at the end of the adjustment, between the centre-line of the differential and the rear face of the bevel
pinion, is engraved on this face, this will vary with each crown wheel and pinion.
Use the adjusting fixture 2044- T.
38 To adjust the engagement of the gears.
Measure the dimension c (see Pl. 55, fig. 7) and select an adjusting washer of a thickness equal to this dimension, reduce the value of
between 0.10 and 0.30 mm for the cylinder controlling the 3rd and 4th speed or the value of between 0.30 and 0.65 mm, for the cylinder
controlling the 1st speed.
42 To adjust the mainshaft rear sealing joint.
The distance to be obtained after assembly, between the adjusting washer and the joint face on the hub of the support block is 16.2 ± 1 mm.
43 To fit and adjust the differential.
Adjust the clearance of the bearings using the support 1766-T and the clearance between the teeth using the fixture 2039-T.
In order to reduce the clearance between the teeth by 0.1 mm it is necessary to increase the thickness of the adjusting washers of the right-
hand differential housing by 0.2 mm.
Clearance between teeth 0.19 to 0.24 mm.
44 On assembly of the differential shaft and housing assemblies, again check the clearance between the teeth.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-3 Overhauling a gearbox. Op. DS 3303 197
46 To fit the rear pipe assembly.

The tightening flange of the control cylinders being placed on the 4th speed cylinder, the clearance between the flange and the other
cylinders (fitted with their retaining plates for cars produced before March 1957) should be between 0 and 03 mm.
Tighten the fixing screws evenly to 12 to 14 ft/lb (1.7 to 1.9 m.kg).
48 To fit the front pipe assembly.

The flange should fit equally on the control cylinders to 03 mm precisely.
TOOLS
1 Fit the gearbox on a stand (stand MR-3053-130, see Pl. 62).

Remove the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand MR-3053-130
14 mm box spanner
2 To remove the shaft bearing housing assembly and brake disc (see Pl. 54).
a) Remove the screws (1) fixing the bracket (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
b) Remove the bracket and take out the four screws (3) fixing the bearing housing. Remove the assembly from
the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm spanner
c) Remove the adjusting washer (4) and the spacing washer (5).
In the same way remove the other shaft bearing housing assembly and brake disc.
Protect the brake discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber protectors
3 Disconnect the clutch bellhousing from the gearbox casing.

Take out the bearing races (6) from the bellhousing.
Hold the differential against the gearbox casing.
Remove the clutch bellhousing. Take out the differential ......................................... 12-17 mm spanners
12-17mm box spanners
NOTE - The centre of the differential is not on the line of the joint between the clutch housing and the gearbox
casing; for this reason, the bearing races can only be taken out sideways.
4 Remove the top bearing cover plate (7) and the lower bearing cover plate (8). Retain the adjusting shims (9) and (10). 14 mm box spanner
5 Put the two gears in mesh. Remove the starting handle dog (11) and the nut (12) locking the bearings (spanner
1734-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1734-T
6 Remove the rear oil seal (13) from the mainshaft (this can be removed by hand). Remove the washer (14) and the
distance tube (15) (since January 1957) or the circlip retaining the oil seals (1st arrangement).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-3 Overhauling a gearbox. Op. DS 3303 198
TOOLS
7 Remove the circlip (16) retaining the rear mainshaft bearing (17) (use circlip pliers). Remove the distance piece
(18), the bearing (17) and the 1st speed pinion (19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circlip pliers
8 Loosen the housing of the front bearing (21) by striking the end of the shaft (22) with a mallet. Extract the assembly
of the bearing and housing by means of small levers (cars produced before October 1957) or extract the
shouldered bearing (21) (extractor body 1750-T, split collet and ring 1738-T, see Pl. 64, fig. 1) (cars
produced after October 1957) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor 1750-T
Split collet and ring
1738-T
9 Remove the spindle (23) of the 1st speed selector fork (24) (see Pl. 57) and push the fork towards the rear ........ 21 mm box spanner
10 Put the synchromeshes in 2nd and 4th gear positions. Remove the mainshaft assembly and pinions through the top
of the gearbox casing.
11 To remove the reverse gear layshaft (see Pl. 54, fig. 2):
a) Remove the screw (27) locking the spindle (untighten the locknut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
b) Drive out the steel plug (28) closing the hole for the spindle in the front face of the gearbox casing.
c) Draw out the spindle (29) by means of a 7 mm dia. x 100 pitch screw with several threads screwed into the
spindle. Remove the assembly of the reverse gear layshaft and ball thrust race (30), the adjusting shims (31), the
needle bearing assemblies (32) and their distance piece (33).
12 Drive out the bevel pinion (25) by striking the end with a bronze drift. Do not mislay the rollers from the
bearing (26). Remove the bevel pinion (25) from the box.
NOTE - On early models, it is necessary to drive out the bevel pinion before removing the mainshaft.
13 Move the bevel pinion shaft front bearing assembly (35), some millimetres out of the gearbox casing, in order
to remove the pinions comprising the intermediate train and the 1st speed selector fork.
14 With a drift, drive out the front bevel pinion shaft bearing and the outer race of the rear bevel pinion shaft bearing (26).
15 Remove the speedometer pinion, the filler and drain plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
16 To strip the mainshaft (see Pl. 53, fig. 1)
a) Disengage the 4th speed loose pinion (36), the 2nd speed synchromesh assembly (37).
NOTE - Do not pull the synchromesh by the collar, otherwise the driving pins (38) will escape from the pinion and
will fall out. Do not mislay the synchromesh adjusting shims (39) found between the synchromesh and the
pinion.
b) Disengage the 2nd speed loose pinion (40), the washer (41) retaining the half segments (42), the 3rd speed loose
pinion (43). Remove the needle bearing assemblies from the loose pinions. (Note : these needle bearing
assemblies are not of the same dimensions).
TOOLS
17 To strip the intermediate train (see Pl. 53, fig. 2).
Disconnect the 2nd speed intermediate pinion (44), the 3rd and 4th speed intermediate pinion (45).
Take out the driving pins (46).
18 To dismantle the differential (see Pl. 54, fig 1).
Uncouple the crown wheel from the differential housing.
Disengage the planet wheel (47), the spindles for the satellite wheels, the satellite wheels (48) and their thrust
washers (49), the other planet wheel (47).
Remove the taper roller bearings from the differential housing and from the crown wheel (extractor 1750-T,
split collet and ring 1753-T and thrust block 1742-T, see Pl. 61, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 mm box spanner
Extractor 1750-T
Split collet and ring
1753-T
Thrust block 1742- T
19 To strip the differential shafts (see Pl. 54, fig. 1):
a) Unscrew the screw (50) retaining the nut (51), locking the bearing (52) on the shaft. Remove the nut (spanner
1770-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 4).
Drive out the shaft assembly and disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1770-T
b) Remove the screw (53) retaining the nut (54) locking the bearing (52) in the housing. Remove the nut (spanner
1771-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1771-T
c) Remove the oil (55) by means of a screwdriver.
Drive out the bearing (52) from the housing.
d) To remove the assembly of the retaining washer and thrust washer. Heat the thrust washer (83) (2000C
approximately) with a blow pipe fitted with a 150 to 250 litre nozzle. Assist the removal of the thrust washer
with a screwdriver if necessary, (use this method only if the washer is to be renewed).
20 To strip the cover plate (see Pl. 55)
a) To remove the selector control cylinders (cars produced before March 1957, see fig. 2 and 6).
Remove the fixing clamps (56).
Remove the plates (57) and the adjusting packings (58).
Remove the cylinder and pipe assemblies.
Remove the adjusting washers (59) from the cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
b) To remove the selector control cylinders (cars produced since March 1957, see fig. 1):
Remove the cylinder fixing clamps (20), (end piece 1773-T, see Pl. 64, fig. 6).
Remove the clamp adjusting washers (99).
Remove the cylinder and pipe assemblies.
Remove the adjusting washers (59) from the cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End piece 1773-T
c) Take out the screws fixing the forks so that they slide freely on the shaft. Check that all the shafts are in the
neutral position.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330-3 Overhauling a gearbox. Op. DS 330-3 200
d) Remove the spring cup (60) from the 4th speed selector shaft (61) (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1). TOOLS
Slide the shaft (61) towards the front until the front cup (62) is on the small diameter of the shaft in the area “a”.
Fit the spring compressor (as shown on Pl. 56. fig. 1), the nose pieces engaged between the end coils of the
spring. Compress the spring. Remove the cup (62).
Remove the shaft (61) and the tongue (63). Remove the spring. Disengage the selector fork (64) and its thrust
pad. Carry out the same operation for the other selector shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
Knock out the expanding washers (65). Remove the locking plungers (66) 1798-T
7-8 mm spanners
21 Replacement of the control cylinder ring seals
a) Mark each piston and the corresponding cylinder.
The pistons can easily be removed with compressed air. Cover the cylinders with a clean cloth to prevent
the pistons being thrown out.
b) Remove the ring seals from the cylinders, using a brass wire hook.
c) Clean the cylinders and pistons by immersing them in clean alcohol to the exclusion of all other products. Blow
them with compressed air.
In the case of scratches on the pistons, a light rubbing with No. 600 abrasive paper dipped in alcohol is permitted.
d) Place the mandrel successively in each cylinder (mandrels MR-3676-120 or MR-3676-130, see Pl. 64, fig. 4).
Offer up the ring seal smeared with hydraulic fluid and put it in position in the groove of the cylinder, using Mandrels MR-3676-120
a reversed piston (see Pl. 64, fig. 5). Remove the mandrel with a 6 dia. x 100 pitch screw and MR-3676-130
e) Oil the cylinder and pistons with hydraulic fluid. Engage the bottom of the pistons in the corresponding
cylinders.
22 To strip the clutch bellhousing (see Pl. 58)
a) To remove the driving shaft:
Remove the nut (70) locking the bearing (71) (spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5). Drive out the shaft and
bearing assembly towards the front. Take out the bearing (71) and the oil retaining washer (72).
Remove the dynamo fixing screw.
Remove the springs (73) retaining the thrust race. Remove the thrust race and support assembly.
Remove the thrust guide screw (74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1640-T
b) To remove the clutch fork :- 14 mm box spanner
Cars produced before June 1959.
Remove the locking screw (75), drive out the spindle (77). Remove the return spring and the pipe from the oiler 8 mm spanner
(if one is fitted) 8 mm box spanner
Cars produced since June 1959 (see fig. 3).
Remove the two circlips retaining the spindle (77).
c) Remove the thrust race hub support (76) (see Pl. 52).
d) Remove the starter switch screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Clean the parts. except the driveshaft bearing, if this is to be used again.
TOOLS
Assembly.
23 To assemble the clutch housing (see Pl. 58)
a) Fit the thrust race support hub (76) (spring washers under the heads of the screws, previously smeared with
Hermetic, see Pl. 52). Insert a joint smeared with Hermetic. Fit the thrust guide screw (74) with its locknut
(shake-proof washer under the nut).
Adjust the position of the screw, so that its end is set at a dimension “b” 97 ± 1 mm from the face of the joint
with the engine.
Tighten the locknut.
To fit the clutch fork :
Engage the previously oiled shaft in the right-hand bore, offer up the fork fitted with its return springs.
Cars produced before June 1959.
Tighten the screw (75) locking the shaft (plain washer under the head) and tighten the locknut.
Cars produced since June 1959 (see fig. 3).
Fit the two circlips retaining the spindle (77).
Put the thrust bearing in position, fix it in position by means of the retaining springs (73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12mm box spanner
14 mm ring spanner
NOTE - Do not refit the oil tube if one was found when dismantling.
b) To fit the pulley driving shaft:
Put in position, the bearing (71) previously greased in the bore of the bellhousing. Tighten the nut (70)
(spanner 1640-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 5), split pin. Fit the oil retaining washer (72) on the shaft and insert the
assembly in the bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1640-T
c) Adjust the alignment of the pulley (see Op. DS 231-0).
24 To assemble the cover plate (see Pl. 55):
a) To check the selector fork return springs: under a load of 54 to 56 lbs (24.5 to 26kg), the length should be 68 mm.
(Fixture for calibrating the springs 2420-T, see Pl. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixture for calibration
2420-T
b) To fit the selector forks :
Fit the 1st and 2nd speed selector shaft (77) through the rear of the cover plate. Fit the return spring without
the cups, then selector fork (78) (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1).
Insert the selector shaft locking plunger (66).
Fit the reverse selector shaft (79), its return spring and the selector fork (80).
Insert the 3rd and 4th speed selector shaft (61), its return spring, fit the selector shaft plungers (66), the
rocker (63), the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork (64).
Tighten the locking screws on the selector forks. Lock the screws with iron wire, fitted so as to prevent any 7-8 mm spanners
rotation in the direction of unscrewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
1793-T
25 To prepare the differential (see Pl. 54, fig. 1):
a) Fit the taper roller bearing (mandrel 1768-T, see Pl. 61, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel 1768-T
TOOLS
b) Fit the planet gear (47) in the box. Insert a fibre washer, the oil groove towards the planet wheel, and a satellite
wheel (48), a thrust washer (49) (the locking tab in the slot in the box) a spindle.
Determine the thickness of the thrust washer for this satellite so that there is no stiffness when turning the
planet wheel. The longitudinal clearance on the planet wheel is 0.30 mm.
Carry out the same operation for the other satellite wheel.
c) Fit the second planet wheel. Fit the crown wheel. The spindles for the satellite wheels are locked by the set-
screw (81).
Tighten the screws to 47 to 50 ft/lbs (6. 5 to 7 m. kg). Make sure that there is no stiffness when turning the
planet wheel and that the longitudinal clearance on the planet wheel is 0. 30 mm; if not, try another planet
wheel.
d) Dismantle the box. Mark the parts, oil and refit. Tighten the crown wheel fixing screws to 47 to 50 ft/lbs (6.5
to 7 m. kg). Fit an iron locking wire through the holes in the heads of the screws so as to prevent any rotation
in the direction of unscrewing. (Do not fit lockplates).
26 To prepare the differential shafts (see Pl. 54)

a) To rectify the brake discs.
Mount the shaft between centres, the disc at the tailstock end, drive the shaft by means of a lathe carrier or dog.
Rectify the disc face, using a facing tool or better still, a grinding wheel.
If the lathe permits, rectify the other face of the disc, without removing, if not, screw a stud in a hole for
fixing the bibax and reverse the assembly between the lathe centres.
Rectify the other face.
b) To check the disc faces. They should conform to the following conditions
- maximum “run-out” at the greatest diameter; 0.17 mm measured at two points diametrically opposite;
- difference in thickness at any point on the disc; 0.03 mm maximum.
NOTE - 1. Do not reduce the original thickness of the disc by more than 1 mm (0.5 mm on each face), the original
thickness of the disc is 12 ± 0.1 mm.
2. It is preferable to use a disc after rectification, rather than fitting a new disc.
c) To fit the brake discs
Put the oil retaining washer (82) on the shaft, see Pl. 54, for position. Offer up the distance piece (83).
Put the mandrel 1767-T in position (see Pl. 63, fig. 1). Cap the oil sealing washer with the centring bush
and fit the distance piece in a press. Put a block under the disc in order to avoid damage to the dowel pins
on the bibax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel 1767-T
27 To prepare the shaft and bearing assembly (see Pl. 54)

NOTE - The differential shaft and housing is shorter on the right-hand side.
TOOLS
a) Put the bearing (52) in the housing. Tighten the ring nut (54) to 72 ft/lbs (10 m.kg) (spanner 1771-T, see Pl. 63,
fig. 2). Lock the nut with the pointed screw (53) ............................................... Spanner 1771-T
12 mm box spanner
b) Put the oil seal (55) in position, (mandrel 1772-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 2). Ease the fit of the joint in the bush and the
housing with petrol, use no other product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandrel 1772-T
NOTE - During the manipulation of the joint, be careful not to damage the face of the oil seal. One scratch made
even with a finger nail is sufficient to cause leakage.
c) Offer up the housing thus prepared, together with the bracket (2) on the differential shaft. Put it in position,
in a press (use a tube) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube :
Internal dia. = 30 mm
External dia. = 39 mm
Length = 200 mm
d) Tighten the nut (51) locking the bearing to 72 ft/lbs (10 m.kg) (spanner 1770-T, see Pl. 63, fig. 4) Spanner 1770-T
e) Tighten the screw (50) locking the nut.
Carry out the same operations for the other housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 mm box spanner
28 To prepare the mainshaft (see Pl. 53, fig. 1):

IMPORTANT REMARK (see Pl. 53A, fig. 1) - Since production commenced on DS 19 cars, we have fitted two
types of 3rd and 4th speed pinions (pinion on mainshaft and intermediate train). The two types of assemblies
should be carefully noted. The parts which they comprise form an assembly and should never be mixed.
1st type assembly (cars produced before July 1957) : helix angle of pinions 31˚ 50’.
2nd type assembly (cars produced since July 1957) : helix angle of pinions 33˚ 30’.
Identification of pinions
Type of gearbox 3rd Speed pinion 4th Speed pinion Intermediate train
Cars produced before July

1957 No. D 333-8 No. D 333-17 No. D 333-16
(3rd speed pinion with
31˚ 50’ helix angle) (no mark) (no mark) (no mark)
Cars produced since July

1957 No.D5333-8 No.D5333-17 No. D5333-16
(3rd speed pinion with
33˚ 30’ helix angle) 3 centre punch marks at groove at b number “33”
a or groove at c (washer between rods and pinion) stamped on face d
TOOLS
Our Spare Parts Department only sell parts for the second type assembly. If one of the two pinions (3rd speed
pinion on the mainshaft or double pinion of the intermediate train) is to be renewed, it is necessary to renew the
other pinion of this assembly.
One can replace a 4th speed pinion, 1st type, by a 2nd type pinion, without other modification.
a) Fit on the shaft, the 3rd speed sliding pinion (43), fitted with its needle bearing cages. Select from the half
segments (42) those with a slight tightness or a clearance between 0.02 and 0.06 mm in the groove of the shaft.
Fit the half segment retaining washer (41).
b) Fit the 2nd speed sliding pinion (40) fitted with its needle bearing cages, the synchro bush, the synchro hub
carrying the driving pins.
IMPORTANT REMARK - There are two types of 2nd speed driving pinions.
1st type assembly (cars produced before June 1958) : taper 7˚
2nd type assembly (cars produced since June 1958) : taper 7˚ 30’.
The two types of assemblies should be carefully observed (see Pl. 53A, fig. 2). These parts should not be mixed.
One can indiscriminately fit the parts of the two assemblies shown on Pl. 53 A, fig. 2 or 3.
c) To adjust the movement of the synchro bush
Hold the synchro hub against the 2nd speed loose pinion (shoulder of the shaft) by hand. The bush of the
synchro in contact with the cone of the 2nd speed loose pinion (40), using a set of feelers, measure the
clearance “c” existing between the rear face of the synchro bush and the front face of the reverse speed pinion.
Select from shims sold by our Spare Parts Department, to give a clearance at “c” of between 0.20 and 0.65 mm.
d) Fit the shim, the synchro hub, the pinion (19), the bearing (17). Select a shim (18) which will allow the circlip
(16) to just enter the groove in the shaft or permits a clearance of between 0.02 and 0.06 mm.
e) (Cars produced before October 1957.) To adjust the clearance of the front bearing
Remove the circlip, the shims, the bearing and the pinion (19). Move the synchro in the 2nd speed position. Fit
the front bearing in its cage.
Fit a paper joint. Tighten the cap on the housing in order to compress the joint. Remove the cap.
With the joint in position on the cap, put a straight edge with a dial gauge (straight edge MR-3377, see Pl. 56,
fig. 2 and dial gauge 2437-T) on the joint, the point of the dial gauge in contact with the thrust face of the
bearing. Set the dial gauge at “0” (the straight edge flat on the joint).
Mark the position of the totalising needle. The dial gauge being thus set, put the straight edge on the outer cage
of the bearing, the point of the dial gauge resting on the outer face of the steel housing.
Check the difference with the first measurement. Reduce this difference by 0.05 mm in order to compensate for
the compressing of the joint.
This difference represents the thickness of the shims placed between the cap and the bearing.
Do not mix the shims thus determined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straight edge MR-3377
Dial gauge 2437-T
TOOLS
f) (Cars produced since October 1957, see Pl. 52.) To adjust the clearance of the front bearing.
Fit a paper joint and tighten the cap (7) on the housing, in order to compress the joint. Remove the cap.
Fit a straight edge with a dial gauge (dial gauge 2437-T, straight edge MR-3377, see Pl. 56, fig. 2).
Place this assembly on a surface plate. Push the dial gauge point in approximately 7 mm and set the dial gauge
face of the large needle at “0”. Mark the position of the totalising needle.
Example : between 7 and 8.
With the joint in position on the cap, place the straight edge with the dial gauge on the joint, the point of the
dial gauge in contact with the face which rests against the bearing.
Bring the needles of the dial gauge to the position they occupied previously (large needle at “0” and totalising
needle between 7 and 8) by pulling on the spindle of the dial gauge.
Release the spindle of the dial gauge slowly, counting the number of turns and fractions of turns described by
the large needle, until the point of the dial gauge spindle rests on the thrust face of the bearing. Example : the
large needle has turned 5.63 turns.
With a micrometer, measure the thickness of the shoulder of the bearing, for example: 5.48 mm. Subtract this
thickness from the dimension found previously. The difference between these two dimensions represents the
thickness of the shims to be placed between the cap and the bearing.
In the example chosen : 5.63 - 5.48 = 0.15 mm.
Do not mix the shims thus determined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial gauge 2437-T
Straight edge MR-3377
29 To adjust the bevel pinion shaft (see Op. 53, fig. 2):
a) Put the driving pins (46) in position in the 2nd speed intermediate pinion (44).
b) Put the 2nd speed intermediate pinion (44) on the bevel pinion (25). Offer up the 3rd and 4th speed intermediate
pinion (45) and fit as far as possible on the driving pins (use a press, if necessary). Use a tube ........... Tube :
Inside dia. = 26
Length = 50
IMPORTANT REMARK - During this operation, check for the formation of any burrs on the driving pins
and that the pinion assemblies slide freely on the shaft in several positions. If, on removal of the bevel pinion
the circlip (84) retaining the rollers of the bearing (26) has come out of the groove in the shaft and made a
groove on the journals of the 1st speed sliding pinion (85), it is necessary to remove the burrs with abrasive
paper, or a stone. In effect, the journals should be perfectly smooth.
Refit the bearing (26) in the following manner
Put the rollers in the outer cup of the bearing.
The bevel pinion should be maintained in a vertical position while fitting the outer cup and roller assembly.
Put the roller retaining clip (84) in position. Use circlip pliers in order not to scratch the journals of the 1st
speed loose pinion (85).
NOTE - The bevel pinions supplied by our Spare Parts Department are sold with the bearing fitted . . . . . . . . . . . Segment pliers
TOOLS
c) To adjust the setting of the front bearing. Carry out the same procedure as in paragraph 28 “e” or “f”.
30 To assemble the intermediate train (see Pl. 52):

Place in the box the intermediate train and the 1st speed loose pinion (85) together with its sliding pinion (86).
Put the sliding pinion in the 1st speed position in order to obtain an approximate centring of the intermediate
train and of the loose pinion.
31 To assemble the 1st speed fork in the groove of the sliding pinion
Position the fork so that the articulating spindle in the lever is towards the front and the large boss of the lever
is towards the casing (see Pl. 57 for position). Do not fit the pin for the lever and swivel the latter towards the
rear of the box.
32 To assemble the reverse gear layshaft (see Pl. 54, fig. 2)

Make sure that the screw (87) is in the spindle (29).
Smear this screw with Hermetic when fitting. Offer up the spindle (29) in its bearings; position the hole for the
spindle locking screw (27) towards the front. With the sliding pinion (89) in position, the groove for the fork
should be towards the rear.
Fit in the bore of the pinion (88), the needle bearing cages and a thrust bearing (30) at each end. (The ground
face against the pinion).
Put the assembly in position on the spindle, measure the end play with a set of feelers.
Determine the thickness of the adjusting shims (31), in order to obtain a clearance of between 0.05 mm and
0.20 mm.
Fit the shim in front of the pinion between the pinion and the thrust bearing.
Tighten the pointed screw (27) and the locknut.
33 To assemble the bevel pinion shaft (see Pl. 52)

NOTE - On cars produced before October 1957, it is necessary to fit the mainshaft before the bevel pinion
(see following paragraph).
Engage the bevel pinion (25) in the intermediate gear train.
In order to fit the roller bearing in the bore of the casing, (use the mandrel MR-3676-30) (see Pl. 65, fig. 2).
Fit an adjusting shim, for example : 3.7 mm thick, then the bearing (35) on the end of the bevel pinion . . . . . Mandrel MR-3676-30
IMPORTANT - 1. It is necessary to fit split adjusting shims.
2. If the nut (12) was retained by a lockwasher, do not refit either this nut or the lockwasher. Obtain from our
Spare Parts Department, a new nut with a thin collar No. DS 344-5.
TOOLS
34 To assemble the mainshaft (see Pl. 52):
a) Fit on the mainshaft prepared in paragraph 28, the 3rd and 4th speed synchromesh (90) (the shouldered face
against the 3rd speed), the 4th speed loose pinion (36) with its needle bearing cage.
b) Place the assembly in the box by inclining the shaft towards the rear; engage it first into the bore of the rear
bearing.
c) Fit a paper joint on the front face of the casing, stick on with grease. Put the bearings (21) and (35) in position.
d) Put on the shaft (22), the 1st speed pinion (19) and the rear bearing (17) (mandrel MR-3045, see Pl. 65, fig. 1). Mandrel MR-3045
e) Put two gears in mesh and tighten the starting handle dog (11) to 72 to 87 ft/lbs (10 to 12 m.kg) (insert a
lockwasher) (spanner 1734-T, see Pl. 65, fig. 3). Turn over the lockwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 1734-T
f) Tighten the bevel pinion shaft nut (12) to 144 ft/lbs (20 m. kg). (Do not fit a lockwasher). If the nut (12) was
retained by a lockwasher, do not refit the nut on the lockwasher. Obtain from our Spare Parts Department, a
new nut with a thin collar No. DS 344-5.
35 Fit the mainshaft bearing cover plate (7) together with a paper joint smeared with grease and the adjusting shims
(9) determined in paragraph 28 “e” or “f”. Put the rear bearing in position. Fit the distance piece (18) and
the circlip (16) (circlip pliers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circlip pliers
36 To adjust the bevel pinion shaft (see Pl. 52 and 59, fig. 1)
NOTE - This adjustment is of the greatest importance. Giving the teeth the correct bearing will ensure silence
and long service from the crown wheel and pinion. The setting dimension is given in millimetres and
hundredths of millimetres and is etched on the ground end of the bevel pinion.
This dimension represents the distance “y” which should exist when the adjustment is completed, between the
centre line of the differential shaft and the ground end of the bevel pinion.
This will vary with each crown wheel and pinion.
The adjustment of the bevel pinion setting should be made by using the adjusting fixture 2044-T, together with
the dial gauge 2437-T, see Pl. 59, fig. 1).
This fixture is constructed so that the distance between the centres of the semi-circular ground bearing faces
and the two ground bearing pads is 55 mm. This number is etched between the two pads.
The measurement should not be taken from the face of the joint of casing, as this differs in relation to the
centres of the differential bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial gauge 2437-T
Adjusting fixture 2044-T
a) Fit the lower bearing cover plate (8) together with the adjusting shims (10) (determined in paragraph 29 “c”)
and a paper joint without Hermetic.
Tighten the screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
b) Carefully clean the bearing faces for the differential bearings and the semi-circular faces of the adjusting
fixture 2044-T. All faces should be free from scratches or burrs.
TOOLS
c) Put the adjusting fixture on a surface plate, resting on the two ground bearing pads. (In this position, the pointer
of the dial gauge is at 55 mm from the centre line of the ground semi-circular bearing faces).
Turn the figure "0" on the movable dial on the dial gauge opposite the large needle.
Note the position taken up by the needles on the dial gauge.
Example : Totalising needle between 4 and 5; large needle on “0”.
d) To measure the actual bevel pinion setting.
1. Put the adjusting fixture in place of the differential.
Turn the adjusting fixture by means of the knurled handle until the large needle of the dial gauge changes its
direction of location.
Mark the information given by the needles of the dial gauge.
Example : Totalising needle between 1 and 2; large needle on 82.
2. Bring the needles to the position in which they were in paragraph “c” (in the example chosen, the totalising
needle was between 4 and 5; the large needle on “0”), by pulling on the dial gauge spindle.
3. Release the spindle of the dial gauge slowly, counting the numbers of turns and fractions of turns described
by the large needle, until the point of the dial gauge spindle rests on the ground face of the bevel pinion.
Check that the dial gauge needles have taken up the position indicated in paragraph “1”.
Example : The large needle has turned 1.45 turns, that is to say, that the difference between the positions
when the adjusting fixture 2044-T was checked on the surface plate (see paragraph “c”) and the point of the
dial gauge has moved forward 1.45 mm.
The actual bevel pinion setting “y” is 55.00 + 1.45 = 56.45 mm.
The dimension etched on the ground end of the bevel pinion being for example : 56.70, it is necessary to
withdraw the bevel pinion shaft from the centre line of the differential by 56.70 - 56.45 = 0.25 mm.
The adjusting shim being 3.7 mm thick, it will be necessary to replace it by a shim of a thickness: 3.7 - 0.25
= 3.45 mm.
Remove the lower bearing cover plate (8). the nut (12), extract the cage and bearing assembly, replace the shim.
Refit the lower bearing cover plate. The joints to be fitted with grease. Insert a spring washer under the head of
the screws. Put Hermetic under the heads of the screws passing though the casing.
Check the adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
37 Fit the speedometer pinion, the bush and the flange. Insert a spring washer under the head of the screw.
38 To adjust the engagement of the gears (see Pl. 52 and 55).

a) Put the selector fork (64) in the 3rd or 4th speed position. The object of this operation is to immobilise the
selector shafts. Put the synchromesh gear (90) in the position corresponding to that of the fork.
Put the other sliding gears in the neutral position.
TOOLS
Fit the cover, the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork together with its thrust pads (smear with grease to prevent
them falling out of position)
Make sure that the forks are properly engaged in the grooves of the sliding pinions. Fix the cover by the two
centring screws.
b) To adjust the 3rd speed cylinder.
Bring the base of the 4th speed synchro (90) as far as possible into contact with the thrust washer of the pinion,
by pushing on the selector shaft (61).
Measure the distance by which the shaft stands proud at “e” (see Pl. 55, fig. 5), use the straight edge MR-3377
(see Pl. 56, fig. 2), together with the dial gauge 2437-T. Set the dial gauge, by putting the fixture on a surface
plate. Set the dial at “0”. Mark the position of the needles. Put the straight edge on the thrust face of the
cylinders, on the cover, the pointer of the dial gauge in contact with the end of the shaft. Using a drift, maintain
a pressure of approximately 25 kg on the end of the shaft. Bring the needles of the dial to their original position
(setting position). Release the spindle of the dial gauge slowly, counting the number of turns and fractions of
turns. For example: a distance of 1.40 mm.
Measure the distance that the piston stands proud of the bearing face of the cylinder on the casing (see Fl. 55,
fig. 7).
Push the piston to the base of the cylinder.
Place a bush 20 mm high on the cylinder and measure the distance “d” between the face “x” of the bush and
the end of the piston by means of a depth gauge. For example: “d” = 18.65 mm.
The distance between the face of the piston and the bearing face of the cylinder on the cover is therefore
“e” = 20 - 18.65 = 1.35 mm.
In order to obtain a clearance of 0.1 to 0.3 mm between the face of the synchro and the thrust washer, the
adjusting washer should have a thickness of between
1.35 - 0.1 = 1.25 and 1.35- 0.3 = 1.05 mm.
Select from the adjusting washers sold by our Spare Parts Department, a washer of the appropriate thickness.
In the example a suitable washer would be 1.1 mm thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth gauge
c) To adjust the 1st speed cylinder.
Put the gearbox in the neutral position. Engage the 2nd speed as far as possible by pushing on the shaft (77).
Proceed as mentioned in paragraph ‘b’, the clearance obtained between the synchro and the reverse pinion
should be between 0.30 and 0.65 mm.
d) Fit on each cylinder the washers determined above.
e) Put the gearbox in the neutral position. Engage 3rd speed as far as possible by pushing on the shaft (61).
Carry out the same procedure for the 4th speed. Put the washers thus determined on the 4th speed cylinder.
Check that the other gears work normally by pushing successively on the shafts.
39 Remove the cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
40 Fit the spring cups (compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor 1798-T
TOOLS
41 On cars produced before January 1957. put on the mainshaft (22), the circlip, the distance piece and the oil seals
in the bearings.
42 On cars produced since January 1957. fit the distance tube (15).
a) Measure the distance “a” between the joint face on the gearbox of the clutch bellhousing and the rear end of the
distance tube (is).
b) Measure the distance “a” between the joint face on the clutch bellhousing of the gearbox and the bearing face of
the oil seal (13) on the hub of the thrust race support (74).
c) Take the difference between the two above dimensions and select from those sold by our Spare Parts
Department a shim (14) of appropriate thickness in order to bring this difference to 16.2 + 1 mm. Fit the oil
seal (13). 0
43 To fit and adjust the differential (see Pl. 59 and Pl. 60)
a) Put the crown wheel and differential housing assembly, together with its bearings in the clutch bellhousing.
Connect the clutch bellhousing to the gearbox. Smear the face of the joint with Hermetic fluid or linseed oil.
Tighten the screws and nuts.
b) To fit the differential shaft and bearing housing, right-hand side.
Place against the outer bearing race of the differential, a distance piece 3. 3 mm thick and an adjusting
washer 3.2 mm thick, in order to obtain a thickness of 6. 5 mm.
Offer up the shaft and bearing housing assembly, insert a paper joint.
Tighten the screws (3) fixing the bearing on the box. Make sure that the crown wheel is not binding on the
bevel pinion.
c) Remove the gearbox from the stand and let it rest vertically on the clutch bellhousing face.
d) Put the dial gauge support 1766-T, together with the dial gauge 2437-T, fitted with the extension 2438-T on
the left-hand housing (see Pl. 60, fig. 2}.
In order to carry out this operation, it is necessary for the pressure plate (A) to be totally enclosed in the
recess in the support base (B) and the dial gauge should indicate about 10 mm when the extension is in contact
with the bearing face (p) of the housing (91).
Hold the fixture by hand. Set the dial at “0” and mark the position of the needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support 1766-T
Dial gauge 2437-T
Extension 2438-T
e) To fit the fixture on the gearbox (see Pl. 60, fig. 1). Tighten the adjusting screw (C) in order to move the
pressure plate (A) forward. Do not alter the setting of the dial gauge. Offer up the fixture on the box. Insert a
paper joint. Locate the pin in the splines of the planet wheel.
Fix the fixture. Tighten the adjusting screw (C) to 72 ft/lbs (10 m. kg) and then unscrew it 1/3rd of a turn.
Tighten the locking screw (D).
Pull on the dial gauge spindle in order to put the needles in the position taken in paragraph “d”. Release the
spindle of the dial gauge slowly and count the turns and fractions of turns.
For example : a distance of 8.20 mm.
TOOLS
f) To measure the clearance between the teeth.
Fit the dial gauge support on the box (see Pl. 59, fig. 2). Fit the extension 2439-T on the dial gauge. Then fix
the dial gauge on to the support 2039-T. The point of the extension resting perpendicular to the flank of a tooth
on the crown wheel, as near as possible to the outside diameter with the dial gauge reading several millimetres.
Take up the clearance between the teeth by moving the differential housing by the right-hand brake disc.
Check this clearance on four teeth spaced at 90˚ approximately. Take the average of these four readings.
For example : a clearance of 0.62 mm, the clearance between the teeth should be between 0.19 and 0.24 mm, it
is necessary to reduce it by 0.38 mm. In order to reduce the clearance between the teeth by 0.1 mm, it is
necessary to increase the thickness of the washers by 0.2 mm. In the preceding example, in order to reduce the
clearance by 0.38 mm, increase the thickness of the washers (4 and 5) fitted between the right-hand housing and
the outer race of the bearing by :
0.2 × 0.38
= 0.76 mm
0.1
The thickness of the washers needed will be : 6.5 + 0.76 = 7.26 mm.
In order to obtain the bearing clearance, the total thickness of the washers and distance pieces determined
in paragraph “e” should be 8.20 mm.
The thickness of the shims fitted on the left side should be :
8.20 – 0.76 = 7.44 mm.
Select from the washers and distance pieces sold by our Spare Parts Department in order to obtain :
On the right side : 7.26 mm, an adjusting washer (4) of 3.15 mm and a distance piece (5) of 4.10 mm.
On the left side : 7.44 mm, an adjusting washer (4) of 3.35 mm and a distance piece (5) of 4.10 mm.
Remove the dial gauge.
Remove the adjusting fixture and right-hand housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support for dial gauge
2039-T
Extension 2439-T
43 To prepare the left-hand bearing housing assembly (see paragraph 27).
44 To prepare the shaft and bearing assembly (see Pl. 54, fig. 1).
Put the adjusting washers (4) and the distance piece (5) previously prepared, in their respective positions. Fit a
paper joint on the housing.
Put the housing in position, the oil drain channel towards the bottom. (The longer housing fitted on the left
side). Make sure that the distance piece (92) is in position. Put the large diameter washer (93) between the
bracket and the housing and the washer (94), under the head of the screw.
Tighten the screws fixing the housing. Check the clearance between the teeth as indicated in the preceding
paragraph. Screw up, without tightening the screws (1) fixing the brackets. Fit on the bracket arms (2), the
support fixture 1799-T (see Pl. 51), tighten the screws fixing the fixture. Tighten the screws (1) fixing the
brackets on the box. Remove the support fixture. The object of this operation is to line up the brackets (2) Support fixture 1799-T
TOOLS
45 To fit the cover plate on the box. Insert a paper joint stuck with grease on the cover plate. Fit the centring screws.
Put the expanding washers in position, using Hermetic. Fit the other screws. Fit the pipe assembly bracket
and the silentbloc bracket. Tighten the screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
46 To fit the rear pipe assembly (see Pl. 55) :

a) To determine the number of shims fitted on the outer cylinders.
1. (Cars produced before March 1957 see fig. 6).
Put the 4th speed cylinder together with its adjusting shims (59), on the edge of a surface plate. Using a depth
gauge, check the dimension “r” (see fig. 8). Carry out the same operation to check each of the outer cylinders,
for these cylinders, a dimension ‘s”. The difference of the height is : r – s = t.
This last dimension “t” is reduced by the thickness of the retaining plates (each retaining plate is 0.3 mm thick),
in order to obtain the thickness of the shims placed on the cylinder.
NOTE - In the case where “t” = 0.3 mm, replace the shim by a retaining plate.
2. (Cars produced since March 1957 see Pl. 55, fig. 3).
Put the 4th speed cylinder together with its adjusting shims, on the edge of a surface plate. Using a depth
gauge, check the dimension “r” (see fig. 8). Carry out the same operation to check each of the outer cylinders,
for these cylinders, a dimension “s”. The difference of the height is : r – s = t. Select a shim from those sold by
our Spare Parts Department, in order to obtain a difference of between 0 and 0.3 mm.
b) To fit the pipe assembly and cylinders.
1. (Cars produced before March 1957 see Pl. 55, fig. 6).
On each of the outer cylinders, fit the height adjusting shims (58) and their retaining plates (57). Fit the
cylinder fixing clamp (56) (serrated washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
2. (Cars produced since March 1957 see Pl. 55, fig. 3).
On each of the outer cylinders, fit the adjusting washer (99). Fit the clamp (20) and tighten the screws fixing
the clamp to 12 to 14 ft/lbs (1.7 to 1.9 m.kg) equal tightening (socket 1773-T, see Pl. 64, fig. 6) ........... Socket 1773-T
47 Fix the pipe assembly plate to the pipe assembly bracket.

Tighten the nuts (plain and spring washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 mm ring spanners
48 Fit the front pipe assembly (see Pl. 55)

Carry out the same procedure as in paragraph 46.
49 To fit the clamp on the rear pipe assembly (see Pl. 55, fig. 3):
a) Put the rubber protectors (98) on the pipes, the slot towards the top. Position so that the dimension “u” =
15 to 20 mm as indicated on fig. 3.
b) Open the triple collar slightly, then put in position on the rubber protectors. Fit the tightening screw, the nut
from the left side. Tighten the nut (spring washer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
Replacement of a differential shaft - brake disc or a differential shaft housing
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 330 - 4 or a front support arm Op. DS 330 - 4 213
PARTICULAR POINTS
Removal.
3 Mark the position of the steering in its bearings and the position of the wheel in relation to the pinion before removing the steering.
7 Do not lose the spacer (4) and the differential bearing adjusting washer (5) (see Pl. 54).
Assembly.
9 If the differential housing is renewed, it is necessary to readjust the new housing (follow the instructions given in paragraph 9).
15 Adjust the position of the brake unit after fitting in position (see Op. DS 451-0).
16 Fit the steering and note the marks made when dismantling.
19 Refill the radiator, vane of the heater control open (bleed).
TOOLS
REMOVAL
1 Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1). Release the pressure in all the systems. Put the front
of the car on stands (jacking bracket 2505-T, see Pl. 168) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop MR-4158
Jacking bracket 2505-T
2 Remove the spare wheel, the spare wheel support, the front wings, the air deflection panel, the battery, the brake
cooling duct and the wheel on the side to be worked upon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12-14 mm box
spanners
4 Remove the radiator and the brake unit (see Op. DS 451-1).
5 To remove the assembly or the pivot, driveshaft and flexible coupling (bibax) :
a) Remove the screws fixing the sealing plate lining on the sidemember, remove the lining, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
b) Disconnect the steering rod from the lever on the pivot (extractor 1964-T, and pressure pad 1968-T, see
Pl. 97, fig. 2). Remove the rubber cup and the nylon cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor 1964-T
Pressure pad 1968-T
c) Disconnect the front axle arms, from the pivot (extractor and pressure pad 1864-T, see Pl. 97, fig. 3). Remove
the rubber cups and the nylon cups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extractor and pressure
pad 1864-T
TOOLS
d) Disconnect the “bibax” from the brake disc 12 mm socket and
extension
e) Disengage the assembly of the flexible coupling, driveshaft and pivot, through the opening in the sidemember.
6 Remove the closing panels, under the brake discs. Drain the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
7 Remove the screws fixing the gearbox support arm on the front crossmember and on the gearbox. Move the
support arm towards the brake disc and remove the four screws fixing the housing to the gearbox. Disengage
the assembly of the housing and brake disc from underneath the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
14 mm box spanner
12 mm spanner
IMPORTANT - Do not lose the spacer (4) and the differential bearing adjusting washer (5) (see Pl. 54).
8 Prepare the bearing face on the gearbox (see Op. DS 330-3, paragraph 19).
REFITTING.
9 If the differential shaft housing is renewed, it is necessary to re-adjust. Proceed as follows
a) Put the dial gauge support 1766-T, together with the dial gauge 2437-T, fitted with the extension 2438-T, as
shown on Pl. 60, fig. 2, on the old housing.
Set the dial at “0” and note the position of the totalising needle. For example : between 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support 1766-T
Dial gauge 2437-T
Extension 2438-T
b) Put the support 1766-T on the new differential shaft housing and note the position of the needles. For example
totalising needle between I and 2 and large needle at 16. The new housing being shorter than the old one by
0.16 mm. When assembling, it is necessary to increase the thickness of the assembly of the distance piece (4)
and the adjusting washer (5) (see Pl. 60, fig. 1), by 0.16 mm, in order to retain the adjustment of the differential
bearings.
c) If the new housing is longer than the old housing (large needle at 90, for example), it is necessary to reduce the
thickness of the bearing adjusting washer and distance piece assembly (by 0.10 mm in the example selected).
NOTE - This setting can also be obtained by using a straight edge MR-3377 (see Pl. 56, fig. 2) fitted with a dial
gauge 2437-T and an extension 2438-T, or using a depth gauge fitted with a straight edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or straight edge
MR- 3377
Dial gauge 2437-T
Extension 2438-T or
Depth gauge and
straight edge.
10 Prepare the bearing face on the gearbox (see Op. DS 330-3, paragraph 27).
TOOLS
11 Put the distance piece (4) and the differential bearing adjusting washer (5) in position (see Pl. 54).
Offer up the bearing housing assembly (the oil drain channel positioned towards the bottom), insert a paper joint
stuck with grease on the housing. Tighten the four screws fixing the housing to the gearbox 12 mm spanner
12 Fit, without tightening, the screws fixing the support arm on the gearbox (special flat washers under the heads).
Tighten the screws fixing the support arm on the front crossmember, turn over the lockwashers. Tighten
the screws fixing the support arm on the gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
14 mm spanner
14 mm ring spanner
13 To fit the assembly of the pivot, driveshaft and flexible coupling (bibax) :
a) Couple up the flexible coupling to the brake disc. Make sure that the dowels of the brake disc are in position in
the dowel holes in the flexible coupling ”bibax” and tighten the fixing screws ......................... 12 mm socket and
extension
b) Thoroughly degrease the tapers of the front axle arms and the pivot ball joints. Couple up the axle arm to the
pivot ball joint, inserting the nylon and rubber cups. Tighten the nuts and fit split pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 mm box spanner
c) Degrease the tapers of the steering rod and of the pivot lever ball joint. Connect the rod to the lever, inserting
the nylon and rubber cups. Tighten the nuts and fit split pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm box spanner
d) Put the sealing linings in position on the sidemember. Tighten the fixing screws (plain and spring washers under
the heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
14 Fit the closing panels under the brake disc. Refill the gearbox with 3 1/2 pints (2 litres) SAE 90 EP oil.
15 Fit the brake unit and the radiator (see Op. DS 451-1).
16 Fit the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraphs 43 and 45).
17 Bleed the front brakes (see Op. DS 453-0) and put the systems under pressure.
18 Fit the brake cooling duct and the wheel on the side which the work has been carried out. Fit the air deflection
panel, the front wings, the spare wheel support, the spare wheel and the battery ........................ 8-12-14 mm box
spanners
19 Lower the car to the ground. Tighten the wheel fixing screw to 108 to 144 ft/lbs (15 to 20 m.kg). Refill the
radiator, the vane of the heater control open. Bleed the system. Make sure that the flexible heater pipe of the
carburettor is warm.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331-1: Replacement of a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331-1 216
PARTICULAR POINTS.
Removal.
3 Mark the position of the steering in its bearings and the position of the steering wheel in relation to the pinion, before removing the steering.
4 When removing the engine-gearbox assembly front crossmember support, do not lose the adjusting shims fitted between the crossmember
and the side-members.
8 Commence removing the cover vertically and remove the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork thrust pads in order to avoid dropping them
downwards.
Refitting.
10 Assemble the cover. Do not fit the fork return spring thrust cups.
12 To adjust the 4th speed cylinder.
(a)~ Engage the 3rd speed as far as possible and hold the shaft in this position.
(b) Hold the rear pipe assembly in position (without the adjusting washers) and measure the clearance between the cylinder and the cover
(feeler gauges).
(c) Reduce the clearance obtained to 0.1 to 0.3 mm.
13 To adjust the 3rd speed cylinder.
Proceed as indicated in paragraph 12 above, by engaging the 4th speed as far as possible.
14 To adjust the 1st speed cylinder.
Proceed as indicated in paragraph 12 above, by engaging the 2nd speed as far as possible, then reduce the clearance obtained at “b” to
0.30 to 0.65 mm.
16 Adjust the clamps fixing the pipe assembly (see Op. DS 334-0) and fit the fork return spring cups.
20 Connect the front pipe assembly clamp. On cars produced since March 1957, screw the studs on the rear pipe assembly flange before fitting
the feed pipe assembly flange (5 pipes).
23 To fit the front crossmember support.
Fit the shims found when dismantling, between the crossmember and sidemembers.
25 Adjust the front brake connecting cable (see Op. DS 454-0).
26 For the steering.
Note the marks made when dismantling.
29 Refill the radiator, vane of the heater open. Bleed.
30 Bleed the system controlling the gears (see Op. DS 334-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331-1 Replacement of a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331-1 217
TOOLS
REMOVAL.
1 Hold the bonnet open (stop MR-4158, see Pl. 16, fig. 1). Remove the spare wheel, the spare wheel support, the
front wings, the air deflection panel and the battery tray. Release the pressure in the hydraulic systems . . . . . . Stop MR-4158
8-12-14 mm spanners
8-12-14 mm box
spanners
2 Drain the radiator, retain the water which contains anti-freeze. Remove the radiator (see Op. DS 232-1).
4 To remove the front crossmember support :
a) Support the engine-gearbox assembly by means of a sheathed chain sling, passed around the water pump cover
(chain sling and stand 1797-T (or lifting tackle), see Pl. 51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chain sling 1697-T
Stand 1797-T
b) Remove the clamp fixing the expansion chamber and its support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
c) Remove the lower adjusting nuts of the brake unit front support tie-rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 mm spanner
21 mm box spanner
d) Remove the screws fixing the crossmember (lower part) on the gearbox support arms 14 mm box spanner
e) Remove the screws fixing the crossmember (upper part) on the sidemember. Disengage the crossmember,
retain the adjusting shims fitted between the crossmember and the sidemember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
5 Remove the front brake connecting cable.
6 Remove the connecting pipe between the high pressure pump and pressure regulator (spanner 2222-T, see Pl. 71,
fig. 4 or 14 mm spanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2222-T or
14 mm spanner
7 Disconnect the pipe assembly (5 pipes) controlling the gears, from the gearbox cover ...................... 8 or 10 mm box
spanners
8 To remove the gearbox cover. Commence by lifting the cover vertically, from the gearbox. Remove the 3rd and
4th speed selector fork thrust pads in order to avoid dropping them downwards. Remove the cover, together
with the control pipe assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
9 Dismantle the cover (see Op. DS 330-3, paragraph 20).
ASSEMBLY
10 To fit the selector forks on the gearbox cover (see Pl. 55) :
a) Engage the 1st and 2nd speed shaft (77) through the rear of the cover, fit the return springs without the cups
then fit the selector fork (78) (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1).
Fit the locking plungers (66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
b) Fit the reverse selector shaft (79), its return spring and the selector fork (80) 1798T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331-1 : Replacement of a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331-1 218
TOOLS
c) Insert the 3rd and 4th speed selector shaft (61) and its return spring. Fit the locking plungers (66), the rocker
(63) and the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork (64).
d) Tighten the locking screws on the selector forks. Lock the screws with an iron wire so as to prevent any
rotation in the direction of unscrewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 mm spanner
11 To fit the cover on the gearbox :

a) Make sure that the selector fork shafts and the sliding pinions are in the neutral position.
b) With grease, stick the paper cover joint on the cover. Also stick the 3rd and 4th speed selector fork thrust pads
in position, with grease.
c) Put the cover in position on the gearbox. Make sure that the selector forks are correctly positioned in the groove
of the sliding pinions and that the 1st speed control lever is engaged in the 1st and 2nd speed selector fork.
d) Fix the cover on the gearbox with the two centring screws, then with the other screws and studs.
12 To adjust the 4th speed control cylinder (see Pl. 52):

a) With the help of an assistant, bring the base of the 3rd speed synchro (90) as far as possible into contact with
the thrust washers of the pinion, by pushing the selector shaft (61) and holding the shaft in this position. Put the
rear pipe assembly in position (do not fit the adjusting washers between the 4th speed control cylinder and the
joint face on the gearbox cover.
b) Hold the pipe assembly and, with a set of feeler gauges, measure the clearance (at several points) between the
control cylinder and the gearbox cover, for example : 1.35 mm.
In order to obtain a clearance of 0.1 to 0.3 mm between the face of the synchro and the thrust washer, it is
necessary to fit an adjusting washer with a thickness of between
1.35 – 0.3 = 1.05 mm and 1.35 – 0.1 = 1.25 mm.
c) Select from the adjusting washers sold by our Spare Parts Department, a washer of the appropriate thickness.
In the example: a suitable washer would be 1.1 mm.
13 To adjust the 3rd speed control cylinder :

Proceed as in paragraph 12 above, after having engaged the 4th speed as far as possible (push the shaft (61)
towards the front).
14 To adjust the 1st speed control cylinder (see Pl. 55).

Put the 3rd and 4th speed shaft in the neutral position. Engage the 2nd speed as far as possible by pushing on the
shaft (77). Proceed as mentioned in paragraph 12 above. The clearance obtained between the synchro and the
reverse pinion should be between 0.30 and 0.65 mm.
15 Remove the cover, fitted with the pipe assembly from the gearbox ..................................... 14 mm hex spanner
16 Adjust the clamps fixing the pipe assembly (see Op. DS 334-0) and fit the clamp fixing screws (socket 1773-T,
see Pl. 64, fig. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket 1773-T
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331-1 : Replacement of a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331-1 219
TOOLS
17 Fit the fork return spring cups (compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1) .................................. Spring compressor
1798-T
18 Fit the cover on the gearbox (see paragraph 11, this operation).
19 Fit the gearbox end thrust block fitted with its bracket and fit the pipe assembly bracket on the gearbox cover
(plain and spring washers under the nuts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
20 Put the pipe assembly flanges in position, inserting seal plates. Tighten the fixing screws and nuts (plain and
spring washers).
NOTE - On cars produced since March 1957, tighten the studs on the rear pipe assembly flange before fitting the
feed pipe assembly flange (5 pipes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 mm box spanners
21 Fit the connecting pipe between the high pressure pump and the pressure regulator (spanner 2222-T, see Pl. 72,
fig. 4 or 14 mm spanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2222-T or
14 mm spanner
22 Fit the front brake connecting cable. Put the sheath stop in position .................................... 12 mm spanner
12 mm box spanner
23 To fit the front crossmember :
a) Offer up the crossmember on the gearbox brackets. Engage the front adjusting rods in the yokes on the brake
units and fit the lower nuts on the rods.
b) Fix the crossmember (lower part) on the gearbox brackets. Tighten the screws and turn over the lockplates.
c) Lower the engine-gearbox assembly until the upper part of the crossmember rests on the sidemember.
Fit the shims found when dismantling, between the crossmember and sidemember. Tighten the fixing screws
(plain and spring washers under the heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 mm box spanner
24 Fit and tighten the lower nuts of the brake unit front adjusting rods ..................................... 21 mm spanner
21 mm box spanner
25 Adjust the front brake connecting cable (see Op. DS 454-0).
26 Fit the steering (see Op. DS 100-1, paragraphs 43 to 45).
27 Fit the radiator and the expansion chamber bracket (see Op. DS 232-I). Fit the clip fixing the expansion chamber on
the bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 mm box spanners
28 Fit the air deflection panel, the front wings, the spare wheel Support and the spare wheel. Fit the battery tray and
the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
29 Refill the radiator, the vane of the heater control open. Bleed the water system.
30 Bleed the system controlling the gears (see Op. DS 334-0).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331-3 : Overhauling a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331-3 220
PARTICULAR POINTS
Assembly.
5 (a) Remove the pistons from the cylinders with compressed air.
(c) It is permissible to lightly clean the pistons with No. 600 abrasive paper moistened with alcohol.
(d) Fit the seals (mandrels MR-3676-120 and 130, see Pl. 64, fig. 4 and 5).
6 Calibrate the fork return springs..
Length 68 mm under a load of 24.5 to 26 kg.
8 To adjust the pipe assembly controlling the gears :

(a) If a pipe assembly is replaced, see Op. DS 334-0.
(b) If the cover is replaced, see Op. DS 33 I-I.
TOOLS
1 To remove the cylinders controlling the selector forks :

a) Cars produced before March l957 see fig. 2 and 6).
Remove the fixing clamps (56).
Remove the clips (57) and the adjusting shims (58).
Remove the cylinder and pipe assembly.
Remove the cylinder adjusting shims (59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
b) Cars produced since March 1957(see fig. 1).
Remove the cylinder clamp plate (20) (socket 1773-T, see Pl. 64, fig. 6).
Remove the clamp plate adjusting shims (99).
Remove the cylinder and pipe assembly.
Remove the cylinder adjusting shims (59) Socket 1773-T
2 Remove the selector fork fixing screws. Check that all the shafts are in the neutral position ............... 9 mm spanner
3 Remove the cup (60) from the 4th speed selector shaft (61) (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1).
Slide the shaft towards the front until the front cup (62) is on the small diameter of the shaft, zone “a’. Fit the
spring compressor as shown on Pl. 56, the nose pieces engaged between the two end coils of the spring.
Compress the spring. Remove the cup (62), the shaft (61), the rocker (63), the spring, the selector fork (64)
and its thrust pad.
Carry out the same operation for the other selector shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor 1793-T
4 Remove the expanding washers (65) and remove the locking plungers (66).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 331 - 3 Overhauling a gearbox cover. Op. DS 331 3 221
TOOLS
NOTE - Except for the replacement of seals (which is an obligatory procedure) no work can be carried out on the
control cylinders, except for cleaning in alcohol.
5 To replace the seals for the control pistons :

a) Mark each piston and corresponding cylinder. The pistons can easily be removed with compressed air (put the
cylinders in a clean rag in order to prevent the pistons being thrown out).
b) Remove the seals from the cylinders, using a small brass wire hook.
c) Clean the cylinders and pistons by immersing them in clean alcohol. Blow with compressed air. In the case of a
few scratches on the piston a light rubbing with No. 600 abrasive paper moistened with alcohol is permitted.
d) Place successively in each cylinder a mandrel (mandrel MR-3676- 120 and MR-3676-130, see Pl. 64, fig. 4).
Offer up the seal, smeared with hydraulic fluid and put it in position in the groove of the cylinder by means
of a reversed piston (see Pl. 64, fig. 5). Remove the mandrel by means of a 6 dia. 100 pitch screw . . . . . . . . . Mandrel MR-3676-120
and MR-3676-130
e) Oil the cylinders and pistons with hydraulic fluid. Push the pistons as far as possible into their corresponding
cylinders.
6 To check the selector fork return springs :

Under a load of 24.5 to 26 kg, the length should be 68 mm (fixture for calibrating springs 2420-T, see Pl. 6). . Fixture for calibration
2420-T
7 To fit the selector forks :
a) Fit the 1st and 2nd speed selector shaft (77) through the rear of the cover. Fit the return spring without the cup,
then the selector fork (78) (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1). Insert the selector shaft locking
plunger (66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
1798-T
b) Fit the reverse selector shaft (79), its return spring and the selector fork (80).
c) Insert the 3rd and 4th speed selector shaft (61) and its return spring. Fit the selector shaft locking plunger (66),
the rocker (63) and the selector fork (64).
d) Tighten the fork locking screws and lock the screws with iron wire fitted so as to prevent any rotation in the
direction of unscrewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 mm spanner
8 To adjust the pipe assembly controlling the gears :

a) In the case of the pipe assembly being renewed, proceed as indicated in Op. DS 334-0.
b) If the cover of the gearbox is renewed, proceed as indicated in Op. DS 331-1.
9 Fit the cups for the selector shaft return springs (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. I).
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 334-0 Checking and adjustments on the change speed control. Op. DS 334-0 222
PARTICULAR POINTS
Important remark.
Before carrying out any work on the gearbox or its controls, check the following adjustments:
(a)The adjustment of the slow running, of the clutch clearance, clutch drag, and clutch engagement control.
(b) The setting of the hydraulic gear selector.
(c) If it is not possible to engage 2nd gear by passing from 1st to 2nd gear, check the assembly of the gear lever washers.
(d ) Check the distribution of the pressure by observing the operation of the clutch fork (car raised at the front). If not proceed to check the following:
To check the pressure (test bench 2290-T).
Insert the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) between the feed pipe assembly (5 pipes) and the front pipe assembly of the gearbox. Fit the pipe (W) successively
in each of the openings of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1), the other openings being closed, the other end of the pipe (W) connected to the pressure
gauge (M2) or (M’) using the pipes (A).
Operate the gear lever successively through each gear. One should read a pressure between 1,920 p.s.i. and 2,490 p.s.i. (135 to 170 kg/cm2) The
needle will pause for a short period at 570 p.s.i. (40 kg ‘cm2) (on the synchronised gears). If not, check the hydraulic gear selector.
To check the hydraulic gear selector (test bench 2290-T).
Connect the pipe assembly (P or P1) to the feed pipe assembly (5 pipes) and blank off the pipe assembly (P or P1) using the blank flange (D).
Proceed as indicated above. One should read a pressure between 1,920 p.s.i. and 2,490 p.s.i. (135 to 170 kg/cm2). The needle will pause for a short
period at 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2) (on synchronised gears).
To check the sealing of the cylinders controlling the gears (test bench 2290-T).
Insert the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) between the feed pipe assembly (5 pipes) and the front pipe assembly of the gearbox. Fit the pipe (B) successively
on each of the openings of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1), the other openings being closed, the end of the pipe (B) connected to the test bench pump.
Build up the pressure to 2,490 p.s.i. (170 kg/cm2). There should be no drop in pressure.
To check the operation of the gears (test bench 2290-T, assembled as in the above paragraph).
Engine stopped, one wheel raised, declutch (hand control). Pass successively through each gear.
Operate the pump and turn the wheel by hand. Read the pressure at the precise moment that the wheel stops turning, this pressure should be less than
1,920 p.s.i. (135 kg/cm2).
If not, check the pipe assembly, the synchro and the gearbox cover.
To adjust the pipe assemblies controlling the gears (Replacement of a pipe assembly).
20 Check the position of the piston in relation to the bearing face of the cylinder, using a depth gauge placed on one washer (distance “d”, see Pl. 55, fig.
7).
21 Check the same measurement on the corresponding cylinder of the new pipe assembly.
22 Modify the thickness of the shims in order to keep the same setting.
23 Carry out the same operations on each cylinder of the old and new pipe assemblies.
To adjust the clamps fixing the pipe assemblies.
25 When the cylinders are in position with their adjusting washers, the flange should rest on the cylinders to within 03 mm precisely.
To adjust the pipe assembly controlling the gears (replacement of the cover).
In order to carry out this operation, the selector fork return spring thrust cups should not be fitted.
30 To adjust the 4th speed cylinder.

(a)Engage the 3rd speed as far as possible and retain it in this position.
(b)Hold the pipe assembly in position (without the adjusting washers) and measure the clearance between the cylinder and the cover.
Reduce this clearance by 0.1 to 0.3 mm, in order to obtain the thickness of the adjusting washers.
31 To adjust the 3rd speed cylinder.

Proceed as indicated above, after having engaged the 4th speed.
32 To adjust the 1st speed cylinder.

Proceed as indicated in paragraph 30, above, by reducing the clearance by 030 to 065 mm in order to obtain the thickness of the adjusting
washers.
34 Do not forget to fit the selector fork return spring thrust cups.
To bleed the hydraulic gear selector.
With the parking brake on, engine running, make successive movements through all gears and operate the auxiliary clutch lever (gear lever
in the neutral position).
Carry out this procedure for about ten minutes.
TOOLS
ADJUSTMENT OF THE AUXILIARY CLUTCH CONTROL LEVER ROD (see Pl. 67).
1 Remove the cover from the dashboard. Remove the fixing screws (left side) and disengage the three anchor plates.
Do not break these plates.
2 Make sure that the front end of the control rod (12) is in position in the hole of the valve on the hydraulic gear
selector.
3 Unscrew the screw (6) locking the rod (12) in the trunnion (13). Push the rod (12) as far as it will go towards the
hydraulic gear selector, the lever (14) pulled towards the driver and tighten the screw (6) locking the rod (12).
PRELIMINARY CHECKS TOOLS

In the case of difficulty in operating the gears, before removing the gearbox or the hydraulic gear selector, one
should carry out the following checks :
a) Make sure that the following adjustments are correct :-
Adjust the slow running (see Op. DS 142-0).
Adjust the clutch clearance (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 20 to 23).
Adjust the clutch drag (see Op. US 314-0, paragraphs 18 and 19).
Adjust the clutch engagement control (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 24 to 26).
b) Make sure that the hydraulic gear selector and the gear lever are correctly set (see Op. DS 334-1, paragraph 2).
c) If the 2nd gear will not engage (by moving from 1st to 2nd gear) and if 2nd gear jumps out by pressing lightly
on the lever towards the 1st gear position, it is necessary to check the gear lever (play on the rivets assembling
the washers forming the selector gate).
d) Make sure that the distribution of the pressure is correct for each gear.
Raise the front of the car, engine running at accelerated idling. Engage 1st gear and observe the movement of
the clutch fork, it should move slowly towards the rear (engaged position). Proceed in the same manner for the
four other gears.
If the fork remains in the declutched position, it is necessary to carry out the following checks :
CHECKING THE PRESSURE (see Pl. 73).

In order to carry out this operation, use the test bench 2290-T.
Raise the car with a jack.
Remove the air deflection panel. Disconnect the pipe assembly (30) between the gearbox and the hydraulic gear
selector, from the front and rear pipe assemblies of the gearbox.
4 Insert the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) between the flange of the pipe assembly (30) and the flange of the gearbox front
pipe assembly. Connect the assembly on the flange of the gearbox rear pipe assembly by means of the screw (U).
Insert a seal plate between each flange.
Close four of the openings of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) by means of the plugs (V).
Connect the restricted flowpipe (W) on the fifth opening of the pipe assembly (P).
Connect the other end of the restricted flowpipe (W) to the pressure gauge (M2) or (M3) using the pipe assembly (A). Test bench 2290-T
Start the engine and engage the gear corresponding to that to which the connection is made (on each union of
the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) the number of the corresponding gear is engraved).
The pressure gauge should indicate a pressure between 1920 p.s.i. and 2490 p.s.i. (135 to 170 kg/cm2), the
5 needle will pause for a short period at 570 p.s.i. (40 kg/cm2) on synchronised gears : (2nd, 3rd and 4th gears).
The gear selector lever being shifted to one of the other synchronised gears, the pressure will drop to zero.
Repeat the operation for the other gears.
TOOLS
REMARK - Before each alteration to the pipe, make sure that the gear lever is in the neutral position.
If for one or several gears, the pressure indicated is not obtained, check the functioning of the hydraulic gear
selector (see paragraphs 6 and onwards, this operation).
CHECKING A HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR
This check can only be carried out when the gear selector is fitted to the car (see Pl. 74).
6 Disconnect the pipe assembly (25) connecting the gearbox to the selector unit from the front and rear gearbox pipe
assemblies (26) and (27).
7 Connect the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) to the flange of the pipe assembly (25). Using the blank flange (D) insert a
seal plate and blank off the outer face of the flange of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1).
8 Fit the end of the restricted flowpipe (W) to one of the holes of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) and close the four
other holes with the plugs (V).
9 Connect the other end of the restricted flowpipe (W) to the pressure gauge (M3). Use the two pipes (A) connected
together (the pressure gauge (M2) can be used).
10 Start the engine and move the gear lever to the gear corresponding to that to which the connection is made (on
each union the number of the corresponding gear is engraved).
11 The needle of the pressure gauge (M3) should indicate a pressure of between 1920 p.s.i. and 2490 p.s.i.
(135 and 175 kg/cm2) (on the synchronised gears, the needle will pause for a short period at 750 p.s.i.
(40 kg/cm2). The gear selector lever being moved to another synchronised gear, the pressure should
drop to zero.
12 Repeat the operation on the four other holes of the pipe assembly.
IMPORTANT - Put the gear selector lever in the neutral position, before disconnecting the pressure gauge.
CHECKING FOR LEAKAGE FROM THE GEAR CONTROL CYLINDERS (see Pl. 75).
13 Remove the pipe (W). Prepare the test bench as indicated on Pl. 172.
Replace the pipe (A) by the pipe (B) and connect it to one of the unions of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1).
Disconnect the pipe assembly (30) and seal the outer face of the flange of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1) using
the blank flange (D).
Insert a seal plate.
TOOLS
2
14 Tighten the bleed screw (b). Operate the pump in order to build up the pressure to 2490 p.s.i. (170 kg/cm ). Check
the pressure gauge which should not show a drop in pressure.
Release the pressure by unscrewing the bleed screw (b) on the test bench.
15 Repeat the operation on the four other unions of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1).
If there is a drop in pressure, the joint of the cylinder being tested is defective and it will be necessary to replace
it or to replace the pipe assembly.
CHECKING THE GEAR OPERATION (see Pl. 75).

16 With the engine stopped, put one front wheel on the ground (the other being already raised). Engage the clutch by
using the auxiliary clutch control.
The test pipe (B) being connected to one of the unions of the test pipe assembly (P) or (P1), tighten the bleed
screw (b) and operate the pump.
During this period, have the wheel turned by hand by an assistant. When the wheel can no longer be turned, the
gear is engaged. At this moment, read the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge. This pressure should be
less than 711 p.s.i. (50 kg/cm2).
Release the pressure by unscrewing the bleed screw (b).
17 Carry out the operation successively on the four other unions of the pipe assembly (P) or (P1).
REMARK - If on one of the gears of the gearbox, the speed does not change for a pressure less than 711 p. s. i. (50
kg/cm2), it may be caused by pipe assembly stoppage, defective gearbox cover or a defective synchromesh.
18 Release the pressure by unscrewing the bleed screw (b).
Remove the pipe assemblies (A) and (B).
Remove the blank flange (D), disengage the pipe assemblies (P) or (P1).
Connect the pipe assembly (30) to the front and rear pipe assemblies.
Insert the seal plates.
Fit the air deflection panel.
Put the auxiliary clutch control in the “running” position.
TO ADJUST THE PIPE ASSEMBLY CONTROLLING THE GEARS (in the case of a replacement
pipe assembly (see Pl. 55).
To adjust the pipe assembly of the front cylinders.
19 Push the piston to the bottom of the cylinders on the pipe assembly removed and on the new pipe assembly.
20 On the 3rd speed cylinder, check the position of the piston in relation to the bearing face of the cylinder on the
cover (see fig. 7). To do this : place a bush about 20 mm long on the cylinder, using a depth gauge, measure Bush:
the dimension “d” between the face “x” of the bush and the end of the piston, for example : “d” = 15. 5 mm Internal dia. = 16 mm
External dia. = 22 mm
Length 20 mm
TOOLS
21 Carry out the same procedure on the corresponding cylinder of the new pipe assembly. For this, the dimension
“d” = 15.8 mm.
22 In the example, in order to keep the same selector fork adjustment, it is necessary to reduce the thickness of the
shims (59) between the cylinder and the cover by : d’ – d = 15.8 – 15.5 = 0.3 mm.
If the dimension “d” measured on the new pipe assembly is smaller than the dimension “d” measured on the old
pipe assembly, it is necessary, on the contrary to increase the thickness of the shims by a thickness equal to the
difference measured (d-d’).
23 Carry out the same operations on the 1st speed cylinder of each of the pipe assemblies.
To adjust the clamp fixing the front pipe assemblies.
24 Fit the shims (59) determined in paragraph 22 on the cylinders.
25 (Cars produced before March 1957.) To determine the number of shims (58) to be fitted on the 1st speed cylinder.
a) Put the 3rd speed cylinder together with its adjusting shims (59) on the edge of a surface plate. By means of a
depth gauge, take the dimension “r” (see fig. 8). Carry out the same operation on the 1st speed cylinder to
obtain a dimension “s”.
b) The difference of the height is: r - s = t. Subtract from the dimension “t”, the thickness of the plates (57)
(each plate is 0.3 mm thick) to obtain the thickness of the shims (58) to be placed on the 1st speed cylinder
(tolerance = 0.3 mm).
26 (Cars produced since March 1957.) To determine the number of shims (99) to be fitted between the clamps (20)
and on the cylinders.
As indicated in paragraph 25 above, measure the dimension “r’” and “s’” (see fig. 3), in order to obtain the
difference of the height “t’”. Select from the adjusting washers sold by our Spare Parts Department, a washer
which will bring this difference to a maximum of 0.3 mm.
To adjust the cylinders of the rear pipe assembly.
27 Only the central cylinder is adjustable (4th speed). Proceed as indicated in paragraph 22, this operation.
To adjust the clamp fixing the rear pipe assembly.
28 (Cars produced before March 1957.) (see fig. 8).
a) Put the 4th speed cylinder, together with the adjusting shims determined in paragraph 27 above, on the edge of a
surface plate. With a depth gauge, measure the dimension “r”. Carry out the same operation successively on
each of the outside cylinders, in order to obtain a dimension “s”.
b) The difference in height is : r – s = t. Subtract from the measurement “t”, the thickness of the plates (57) (each
plate is 0.3 mm thick), in order to obtain the thickness of the shims (58) to be placed on the outside cylinder
being measured (tolerance = 0.3 mm).
c) Carry out the same operation on the other outside cylinder.
TOOLS
(Cars produced since March 1957.) (see fig. 3).
29 As indicated in paragraph 28, measure the dimensions “r’” and “s’” in order to obtain the difference of the height:
Select from the adjusting washers sold by our Spare Parts Department, a washer which will bring this
difference to a maximum of 0.3 mm.
TO ADJUST THE PIPE ASSEMBLIES CONTROLLING THE GEARS (in the case of replacement
of the gearbox cover (see Pl. 52 and 55).
REMARK - In order to carry out this operation, the selector fork return spring thrust cups should not be fitted.
30 To adjust the 4th speed control cylinder

a) With the help of an assistant, bring the base of the 3rd speed synchro (90) as far as possible into contact with
the thrust washers of the pinion by pushing the selector shaft (61) and holding the shaft in this position. Put the
rear pipe assembly in position (do not fit the adjusting washers between the 4th speed control cylinder and the
joint face on the gearbox cover).
b) Hold the pipe assembly and, with a set of feeler gauges, measure the clearance (at several points) between the
control cylinder and the gearbox cover, for example: 1.35 mm. In order to obtain a clearance of 0.1 to 0.3 mm
between the face of the synchro and the thrust washer, it is necessary to fit an adjusting washer with a thickness
between: 1.35 – 0.3 = 1.05 mm and 1.35 – 0.1 = 1.25 mm.
c) Select from the adjusting washers sold by our Spare Parts Department, a washer of the appropriate thickness. In
the example : a suitable washer would be 1.1 mm.
31 To adjust the 3rd speed control cylinder.
Proceed as in paragraph 30 above, after having engaged the 4th speed as far as possible (push the shaft (61)
towards the front).
32 To adjust the 1st speed control cylinder.
Put the 3rd and 4th speed shaft in the neutral position. Engage the 2nd speed as far as possible by pushing on
the shaft (77). Proceed as mentioned in paragraph 30 above. The clearance obtained between the synchro and
the reverse pinion should be between 0.30 and 0.65 mm.
33 Place on each of the cylinders, the washers determined in paragraphs 30, 31 and 32 and adjust the pipe assembly
fixing clamps (see paragraphs 24 to 26, this operation for the front pipe assembly and paragraphs 27 to 29, this
operation for the rear pipe assembly).
34 Fit the selector fork return spring cups (spring compressor 1798-T, see Pl. 56, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring compressor
1798-T
TO BLEED THE HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR
35 Apply the parking brake. Put the front of the car on stands and start the engine. Pass the gear lever successively
through each gear. Operate the auxiliary clutch control several times, the gear selector lever being in the
neutral position. Carry out this operation for 10 to 15 minutes.
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 334-1 : Work on the gear control. Op. DS 334-1 229
PARTICULAR POINTS
Replacement of a gear selector lever.
Removal.
1 In order to carry out this operation it is necessary to remove the facia board.
2 Put the selector lever in the 1st speed position. Place the setting rod (2429- T) in the hydraulic gear selector.
4 Disengage the selector, leaving the auxiliary clutch control rod connected on the hydraulic gear selector.
Refitting.
6 Check that the gear selector lever is in the 1st speed position before connecting to the hydraulic gear selector.
7 Pull the auxiliary clutch control rod as far as possible towards the front and the lever pressed towards the rear, then fix the rod in the
trunnion of the lever.
Replacement of a hydraulic gear selector.
Refitting.
21-22 Put the sliding valve in the 1st speed position, the rod (2429- T) engaged in the locating hole and offer up the hydraulic gear selector on the
gear selector lever which should also be in the 1st speed position.
26 The hydraulic gear selector being in position, remove the locating rod.
27 Pull the auxiliary clutch control rod as far as possible towards the front and the lever pressed towards the rear then fix the rod in the
trunnion of the lever.
35 Bleed the hydraulic gear selector (see Op. DS 334-0).
36 Adjust the slow running, the clutch clearance, the clutch drag and the clutch engagement control.
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A GEAR SELECTOR LEVER
1 To remove the dashboard :
Remove the negative cable from the battery.
Remove the cover from the dashboard; remove the fixing screws, right-hand side and remove the anchor plates.
Remove the upper part of the glove box. Through this opening, remove the two screws fixing the facia board
surround. Remove the facia board surround.
Remove the screws fixing the facia surround, the nuts fixing the facia board, the earth wire, disconnect the
speedometer cable, disconnect the wires and remove the facia board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
12mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
TOOLS
2 Put the change speed lever in the 1st speed position. Insert in the locating hole a rod 3.94 mm diameter
(rod 2429-T, see Pl. 67, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rod 2429-T
3 Remove the rubber plug from the steering tunnel and unscrew the screw (4) of the clamp (5) connecting the change
speed lever rod to the sliding valve of the hydraulic gear selector. Do not unscrew the screw (3).
Unscrew the trunnion screw (6) locking the auxiliary clutch control rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
4 Remove the screw (17) fixing the change speed lever on the bracket of the steering tube. Remove the nuts (7) from
the studs fixing the hydraulic gear selector to the change speed lever (spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1).
Disconnect the sockets from the starter switch (15). Disengage the change speed lever, leaving the auxiliary
clutch control rod (12) in position on the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
Spanner 2431-T
5 Put the change speed lever in the 1st speed position. Put the selector in position, carefully passing the auxiliary
clutch control rod (12) through the hole in the flange, then in the trunnion (13) of the auxiliary clutch control
lever. Engage the change speed lever rod in the clamp (5) connecting the gear selector to the hydraulic gear
selector. Put the nuts (7) in position on the fixing studs (ratchet spanner 2428-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 3) and tighten
(spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1). Fit and tighten the screw (17) fixing the selector on the steering tube
bracket (plain and spring washers under the heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2428-T
Spanner 2431-T
12 mm box spanner
6 Check that the change speed lever is in the 1st speed position. Tighten the screw (4) of the clamp connecting the
change speed lever rod to the sliding valve of the hydraulic gear selector. Remove the locating rod, plug the
locating rod hole in the hydraulic gear selector and in the steering tunnel (rubber plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
7 Push the rod (12) of the auxiliary clutch control as far as possible, towards the hydraulic gear selector, the lever
(14) towards the driver. Lock the screw (6) of the trunnion (13).
Connect the sockets to the terminals of the starter switch (15).
8 To fit the facia board :

a) Put the facia board in position, the centring dowels perpendicular in the rubber sockets. Connect the wires,
noting the colour of the end terminals. Connect the speedometer cable.
To fix the facia board : fit a plain washer on the two fixing studs and tighten the nuts moderately. Put a locknut
on the right-hand stud and lock it. Put the earth wire on the other stud, fitting a shake-proof washer and tighten
the nut. Fix the facia board surround and the stop for the glove box.
b) Put the facia board surround in position, position the beading correctly. Fit the three fixing screws.
c) Put the facia board cover in position and engage the anchor plates in their housing. Tighten the fixing screws.
d) Connect the negative cable to the battery ...................................................... 12 mm box spanner
DS 19 OPERATION No. DS 334-1 Work on the gear control. Op. DS 334-1 231
TOOLS
REPLACEMENT OF A HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR
9 Remove the facia board (see paragraph 1, this operation).
10 To release the pressure: unscrew the bleed screw on the pressure control valve (1/2 a turn approximately). Put the
manual height control lever in the low position. On early models, without the manual height control, raise the
front of the car with the wheels resting on the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm spanner
11 Unscrew the left-hand suspension sphere. Place a cloth under the union in order to avoid spilling the fluid.
12 Disconnect the pressure feed pipe from the pressure distribution block (2nd union (42) from the right) (see Pl. 25). 10 mm spanner
13 Disconnect the union plates from the clutch engagement control and from the hydraulic gear selector. Remove
the pipe assembly from the fixing studs. Remove the seal plates (see Pl. 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm spanner
8 or 10 mm box spanner
14 Disconnect the union plate of the gearbox pipe assembly (1) (5 pipes under the hydraulic gear selector) without
bending the pipes. Remove the seal plates .................................................... 8 mm ring spanner
12 flats
length = 100 mm
15 Disconnect the rubber pipe (2) feeding the low pressure pump and the low pressure pipe assembly (10) from the
hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm box spanner
16 Remove the rubber grommet in the steering tunnel, and through the hole “a”, untighten the screw (3) in the
coupling of the selector lever to the sliding valve of the hydraulic gear selector (hydraulic gear selector side).
Do not untighten the screw (4) in order to avoid moving the flange (5).
17 Disengage the speedometer cable from the steel plate on the hydraulic gear selector. On early models, it is
necessary to disconnect the plate from the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
18 Untighten the fixing screw (6) from the auxiliary clutch control rod.
19 Remove the nuts (7) from the studs fixing the hydraulic gear selector to the selector lever assembly
(spanner 2431-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 1).
Disengage the hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spanner 2431-T

20 Put the sliding valve in the 1st speed position. To do this
Pull and turn the sliding valve (11) until the hole in the sliding valve corresponds with that of the rear cap on the
hydraulic gear selector.
Fit a rod of 3.94 mm diameter in the locating hole (rod 2429-T, see fig. 2). It should penetrate approximately
30 mm; if not, turn the sliding valve half a turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rod 2429-T
TOOLS
21 Put the gear selector lever in the 1st speed position.
22 Put the hydraulic gear selector in position and with care, pass the auxiliary clutch control rod (12) through the
hole in the selector flange, then in the trunnion (13) of the auxiliary clutch control lever. Engage the sliding
valve (11) of the hydraulic gear selector in the selector clamp (5).
23 Put the nuts (7) on the fixing studs (spanner 2428-T, see Pl. 72. fig. 3). Tighten the nuts (7) (spanner 2431-T,
Spanner 2431-T
24 Make sure that the lever is in the 1st speed position.
Tighten the screw (3) of the clamp (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
25 Withdraw the rod 2429-T, from the hydraulic gear selector. Refit the rubber plug in the locating hole. Refit the
rubber plug in the hole “a” of the steering tunnel.
26 Push the rod (12) of the auxiliary clutch control as far as possible towards the hydraulic gear selector, the lever
(14) towards the driver. Lock the screw (6) of the trunnion (13).
27 Check that the sockets are connected to the terminals of the starter switch (15).
28 Fit the pressure pipe to the pressure distribution block and engage the union flanges on the clutch engagement
control and on the hydraulic gear selector (spanner 2219-T or 2221-T, see Pl. 72, fig. 4). Fit the seal plates (pay
attention to the assembly position of the seal plates, the rubber seal rings corresponding to the fluid holes).
Tighten the pipe union (42) on the pressure distribution block (see Pl. 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
Spanner 2219-T or
2221-T
29 Connect the gearbox pipe assembly (1) to the hydraulic gear selector.
Insert the seal plate after having checked that the holes are correctly positioned. These should be renewed
after each removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm ring spanner
30 Connect the flange of the low pressure pipe assembly (10) to the hydraulic gear selector. Inserting the seal plate,
make sure that the holes of the hydraulic gear selector correspond to the rubber joints 8 or 10 mm spanner
8 or 10 mm box spanner
31 Connect the rubber pipe (2) feeding the low pressure to the hydraulic gear selector. Insert a rubber bush and fit a
clip.
32 Put in position, the rubber grommet and the speedometer cable on the hydraulic gear selector or fit the fixing
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm box spanner
33 Refit the facia board (see paragraph 8, this operation).

TOOLS
34 Start the engine, let it idle for a few minutes. Tighten the bleed screw in order to put the systems under pressure.
Check the joints for leakage. Change into each gear in succession in order to check the sealing of the flanges . . 8 mm spanner
35 Bleed the hydraulic gear selector (see Op. DS 334-0).

Adjust the clutch drag (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 18 and 19).
REPLACEMENT OF A GEAR CHANGE SPEED CONTROL (Adjustment of Pressure)
Removal.
37 Release the pressure in the system. Put the auxiliary clutch control lever in the “declutched” position.
Remove the nuts fixing the flange of the feed pipe assembly from the gear change speed control.
Remove the screw fixing the gear change speed control on its bracket and remove the control. Remove the
seal plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm ring spanner
Refitting.
38 Put the gear change speed control in position, insert the seal plate. Offer up the nuts fixing the feed pipe assembly
flange to the gear change speed control without tightening (spring washers). Tighten the screws fixing the gear
change speed control on its bracket (plain and spring washers under the heads) and tighten the nuts fixing the
feed pipe assembly flange to the gear change speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 or 10 mm ring spanner
39 Bleed the system controlling the gearbox (see Op. DS 334-0).

PARTICULAR POINTS
To overhaul a gear selector lever assembly.
Assembly.
All the joints and moving parts should be greased (Antar Cardrex EP grease).
19 To adjust the selector gate.

(a) Put the gear lever and the gate in the 4th speed position. Tighten the screw fixing the gate.
(b) Make sure that the gate slides normally on all gears.
(c) Place the lever in the 1st speed position and pin the gate and the control rod.
20 To adjust the tension in the reverse speed position.

(a) Put the selector lever in the - 1st speed position.
(b ) Bring the locking clamp against the tension spring, without clearance or pressure. Tighten the clamp.
(c) Make sure that the lever can occupy the reverse speed position.
To overhaul a gear change speed control.
Dismantling.
23 Do not turn the adjusting screw (55) for the spring (54).
25 Clean the parts with alcohol only.
Assembly.
26 It is imperative to fit a filter (57) even if the gear change speed control was not so fitted (1st model).
To overhaul a hydraulic gear selector.
Dismantling.
Clean the parts in alcohol only.
Assembly.
All the parts should be immersed in hydraulic fluid. Note the markings made when dismantling.
TOOLS
OVERHAULING A GEAR SELECTOR LEVER ASSEMBLY
Unscrew the screw (1) and remove the clamp (2) coupling the lever control rod (3) to the sliding valve on the
hydraulic gear selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
2 To remove the auxiliary clutch control lever (10) :

Unhook and remove the spring (9), remove the pin (5), the thrust washer (6), the spring (7), the thrust washer (8),
remove the lever (10) and remove the washer (11).
3 Remove the pin (12), holding the selector gate (13) in position. Unscrew the screw (14) locking the selector
gate (13).
4 Unscrew the screw (15) locking the clamp (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
5 Remove the pin (17), the thrust washers (18), the spring (19), the thrust washer (20), and disengage the spindle
(21) of the sector (22). This spindle is screwed into the housing (23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
6 Disengage the assembly of the lever (24), sector (22) and control rod (3). Disengage the selector gate (13), the
thrust washer (25), the spring (26), the thrust washer (27) and clamp (16) of the control rod (3).
NOTE - Do not lose the 1st and 2nd speed locking ball and its spring.
7 Disconnect the housing (23), from the steel support (30) : disengage the locking circlip (31), the washers (32),
the spring (33), the thrust washer (34) and disengage the housing (23) from the support (30). Do not lose the
ball (28) and the spring (29).
Remove from the housing (23), the felt joint (35) and its cup (36), the spring (37), the felt joint (38) and its cup
(39).
8 Drive out the rivet (40) and disengage the guide tongue (41) of the selector gate (13).
9 Using a 7.5 mm diameter drill, remove the peening at “a” of the rivet (42) retaining the starter switch (43)
and remove the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill = 7.5 mm dia.
10 Remove the pin (44), the washer (45) and the spring (46). Remove the control rod (3) from the lever (24) and
remove the felt washer from the yoke of the control rod (3).
11 Clean the parts.

TOOLS
NOTE - When refitting, all joints and moving parts should be greased (ANTAR Cardrex EP grease only).
12 To connect the control rod (3) to the lever (24)

a) Put the felt joint, previously soaked in engine oil, in the recess in the yoke of the control rod (3).
b) Put the lever in position in the yoke of the control rod (3); fit the spring (46), a washer (45) and the pin (44).
When the parts are assembled, the coils of the spring (46) should be touching or should have a lateral clearance
of between 0 and 0.2 mm. If not, add a second washer (45) of a thickness suitable to obtain this clearance.
13 Put in position and rivet the starter switch (43) on the steel support (30) (see fig. 5).
14 Put the selector guide tongue (41) in position, the flat “b” positioned on the side facing the switch (see fig. 5).
15 Engage the aluminium housing (23) in the steel support (30). Put the felt joint (38) (previously soaked in engine
oil) in position together with its cup (39), the spring (37), the felt joint (35) (previously soaked in engine oil)
and the thrust cup (36).
Fit the thrust washer (34), the spring (33), the washers (32) and the circlip (31). When the parts are assembled,
the coils of the spring (33) should be touching or should have a lateral clearance of between 0 and 0.2 mm. If
not, modify the thickness of the washers (32) in order to obtain this clearance.
16 Engage the control rod (3) in the housing (23). Fit the clamp (16), the thrust washer (27), the spring (26), the
thrust washer (25), the selector gate (13) (the guide finger (41) engaged in the gate).
17 Fit the spring and locking ball for the 1st and 2nd speed in the housing (23). Engage the sector (22) in the housing
(23) and screw in the spindle (21). Fit the thrust washer (20), the spring (19), the washer or washers (18) and
fit the pin (17). When the parts are assembled, the coils of the spring (19) should be touching or should have
a lateral clearance of between 0 and 0.2 mm. If not, modify the thickness of the washers (18) in order to obtain
this clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm box spanner
18 Put the spring (29) in position and the locking ball (28) in the housing (23).
19 To adjust the selector gate :

a) Place the lever (24) and the gate (13) in the 4th speed position (see fig. 5). Tighten the fixing screw (14).
b) Make sure that the gate (13) slides the full distance on guide tongue (41).
c) Put the lever (24) in the 1st speed position. Using a 2 mm diameter drill, drill through the gate (13) and the
control rod (3). Fit a pin and rivet the ends (see fig. 4). (The replacement of the gate (13) necessitates the
replacement of the rod (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill = 2 mm dia.
TOOLS
20 To adjust the tension in the reverse speed position :
a) Put the lever (24) in the 1st speed position (the locking ball being in position in the corresponding hole in the
sector).
b) Bring the clamp (16), the assembly of the washer (25), the spring (26), the thrust washer (27), the spring being
practically without lateral clearance or tension. Tighten the screw (15) fixing the clamp (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
c) Make sure that the lever (24) can occupy the reverse speed position.
21 To fit the auxiliary clutch control lever :
Place in the following order on the spindle (4) : the thrust washer (11), the lever (10), the thrust washer (8), the
spring (7), the thrust washer (6) and the pin (5).
After assembly, the lever (10) should have a lateral clearance of between 0 and 0.2 mm. If not, modify the
thickness of the washers (6) in order to obtain this clearance.
Put in position the return spring (9) of the lever (10).
22 Fit the double clamp (2) on the end of the control rod (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 mm box spanner
OVERHAULING A GEAR CHANGE SPEED CONTROL

23 Remove the plugs (51) and (52).
Remove the piston (53) and the spring (54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 mm box spanner
NOTE - It is essential not to alter the spring adjusting screw (55); otherwise the flow through the gear change
speed control will be changed which will bring about fluctuations in the operation of the gears and will even
cause damage to the gearbox.
24 Remove the screw (56) from the piston. Disengage the disc restrictors (58) and (59), the distance pieces (60) and
the filter (57).
25 Clean the parts with alcohol to the exclusion of all other products. Do not use trichlorethylene.
26 To prepare the piston.
IMPORTANT NOTE - It is imperative to fit the filter (57) even if the gear change speed control was not so fitted;
note the order of assembly.
a) Early model gear change speed control without filter.
Remove the washer with the central hole (58) and assemble the parts in the following order
1 distance piece (60).
1 filter (57).
1 disc with an eccentric hole (59).
1 disc with a central hole (58) etc.
TOOLS
b) New model gear change speed control with flat base.
Assemble the parts in the following order
1 filter (57).
1 disc with a central hole (58).
1 disc with an eccentric hole (59) etc.
For information, there are in the gear change speed control
15 distance pieces.
8 discs with a central hole
7 discs with an eccentric hole.
Tighten the screw (56).
27 Put the spring (54) in the body of the change speed control. Put the piston (53) in position, smeared with hydraulic
fluid, the screw engaged in the spring.
28 Put a ring seal (61) on each plug. Fit the plugs (the plug (52) with the slotted end should be fitted by hand; if not,
the spring is out of position). Do not reverse the plugs (51) and (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 mm box spanner
NOTE - The adjustment of the flow of the change speed control can be carried out on the hydraulic unit test bench
2298-T (see Pl. 176) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test bench 2298-T
OVERHAULING A HYDRAULIC GEAR SELECTOR
IMPORTANT REMARK - In the case of difficult gear engagement, it is necessary to carry out the following
checks before removing the hydraulic gear selector
A - Make sure that the engine adjustments are correct
Adjust the slow running (see Op. DS 142—0).
Adjust the clutch drag (see Op. DS 314-0, paragraphs 18 and 19).
B - Make sure that the hydraulic gear selector and the gear change speed lever assembly are correctly set
(see Op. DS 334—1).
C - If the 2nd gear will not engage (by moving from 1st to 2nd gear) and if 2nd gear jumps out by pressing lightly
on the lever towards the 1st gear position, it is necessary to check the gear lever (play on the rivets assembling
the washers forming the selector sate).
TOOLS
D - Make sure that the distribution of pressure is correct for each gear.
Raise the front of the car with the engine running at accelerated idling speed. Engage 1st gear and observe the
clutch fork; it should move slowly towards the rear (engaged position).
Carry out the same procedure for the four other gears.
If the fork remains in the declutched position, it is necessary to repair the hydraulic gear selector.
NOTE - One can also carry out this operation by means of the test bench 2290-T (see Op. DS 334-0, paragraphs 6
to 12) or better still, check the leakage as indicated in the operation DS 391-0).
E - It is possible to check the operation of a removed hydraulic gear selector by means of the test bench 2298-T. . . . Test bench 2298-T

28 Fix the hydraulic gear selector in a vice by the rear cover end (stand MR-3053-200, see Pl. 71, fig. 4) ........ Stand MR-3053-200
29 Remove the nuts fixing the union plates of the pipe assembly connecting the hydraulic gear selector to the gear
change speed control.
Remove the gear change speed control and bracket. Remove the pipe assembly and seal plates. Replace the nut
fixing the bracket and the front cover ....................................................... 8 mm spanner
8 mm box spanner
12 mm box spanner
30 To remove the front cover (5) :
Unscrew the screws and nuts progressively in order to avoid jamming the cover. Remove the cover, the springs
(4) and (7), the spring cups (8) and (9), the vellumoid joint, the ring seal (1) of the automatic gear control piston
(3) (on the first models only).
Remove the automatic clutch control piston (2).
NOTE - On the second assembly model, the synchronising pistons (11) are positioned by the spring cups (28) and
(29) and the pistons are slightly different (see fig. 6), the spring (30) is also different.
Remove the gear control valve (10).
Remove the 3rd speed synchronising piston (11) and its joint. Raise the 2nd speed piston (31) by pushing with
the clutch control valve (12). Immediately after their dismantling, put the pistons (3), (11) and (31) in a
wooden rack (rack MR-3053-210, see Pl. 71, fig. 3).
Clean the bores of the hydraulic gear selector with alcohol, blow out with compressed air.
Check the diameter of the bore at “d’ (see fig. 2), between the end of the selector and the first groove. Use the
plug gauge 2277-T (see Pl. 71, fig. 1), and check the diameter in several positions.
If the “not go” end can be inserted or if deep scratches exist in the bore, the selector is unusable . . . . . . . . . . Plug gauge 2277-T
Rack MR-3053-210
31 To remove the synchronising pistons :
Press on the valve (12) using a brass drift in order to remove the pistons. Place them in the rack in the order of Rack MR-3053-210
disassembly Brass drift = 5 mm dia.
Remove the auxiliary clutch control valve (12) Length = 60 mm.
TOOLS
32 Remove the ring seals (27) from the synchronising pistons. Use a brass wire hook. Be careful not to scratch the
bore or damage the groove, the edge of which must be a sharp angle.
33 Remove the unit from the stand :

a) If the 3rd speed automatic control piston is sealed by a seal ring, do not turn the unit over, in order to avoid
dropping the other pistons.
Proceed as follows
To remove the rear cover (13). Remove the screws and studs, then remove the cover, the springs (14) and
(15) and the spring caps (16) and (17) and the joint (21).
Remove the automatic gear control pistons through the front face of the selector, by pushing with the valve,
then with a brass drift.
Put the pistons (3) in a rack MR-3053-210 (see Pl. 71, fig. 3), in their order of disassembly.
Remove the automatic gear control valve (18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack MR-3053-210
Drift = 5 mm dia.
Length = 60 mm.
b) If the 3rd speed automatic control piston is sealed by an aluminium plug, proceed to dismantle in the following
manner
Remove the rear cover as indicated above (line a).
To drive out the aluminium plug (22) : tap lightly on the gear change automatic control valve (18) (brass drift),
until the plug (22) is removed.
Take care not to drive out all the pistons.
Disengage the pistons and place in the rack.
Remove the valve (18).
Remove the clutch automatic control valve (19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drift = 5 mm dia.
Length = 60 mm
34 Remove the ring seals (20) from the gear control valve (10).
35 Remove the bleed screw (23) and its joint (24) (1st model).
36 Very carefully clean all the parts with alcohol and blow with compressed air.
NOTE - All the parts should be dipped in hydraulic fluid before assembly.
37 Fix the unit on a stand by the front cover (stand MR-3053-200, see Pl. 71, fig. 4) ........................ Stand MR-3053-200
38 Fit the auxiliary clutch control valve (12), through the front face of the unit. Fit the rubber distance piece (25)
with the slot facing the overflow return hole, then the cup (26).
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS I
No. of
COMPONENT Illustration DESCRIPTION
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Longitudinal section.

2 Cross section.
4 Valve seats.
5 Fitting of valves.
6 Calibration of springs.
7 Cylinder head.
8 Replacement of valve guides.
9 Replacement of valve guides.
10 Oil pump.
11 Adjustment of oil pump.
12 Fitting cylinder barrel joints.
13 Piston and connecting rod.
14 Assembly of oil seals.
15 Setting timing wheels.
16 Various tools.
17 Various tools.
18 Stands for dismantled engine.
19 Stand for dismantled engine-gearbox assembly.
20 Checking the distance between support and crossmember.
21 Adjusting the longitudinal position of rear engine supports.
22 Adjusting the height of rear engine supports.
23 Adjusting centres of rear engine supports.
24 Spanners for adjustment of rear engine supports.
25 Engine and gearbox assembly.
CARBURETTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Weber 24/30 DCZCI.

27 Zenith 24-30 EEAC.
28 Controls – Filters.
PETROL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Section of GUIOT pump.
30 Inspection for leaks.
IGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Contact breaker.

32 Adjusting the synchronisation of the breakers.
33 Testing ignition coil.
34 Testing ignition coil insulation.
PULLEYS AND TENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Belt tensions.

36 Alignment of pulleys.
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS II
No. of
WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Low pressure pump and water pump.

38 Low pressure pump and water pump.
38A Ignition advance curve.
39 Low pressure pump.
CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Assembly.
43 Adjustment of the toggles.
44 Adjustment of the toggles.
45 Controls..
46 Re-engagement control – accelerated idling.
47 Re-engagement control – accelerated idling.
48 Clutch engagement control – clutch cylinder.
49 Clutch cylinder.
GEARBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Exterior view.
51 Removal and replacement.
52 Assembly.
53 Shafts.
53A Assembly of pinions.
54 Differential
55 Cover.
56 Cover.
57 First speed selector lever.
58 Clutch housing.
59 Adjustment of crown wheel and bevel pinion.
60 Adjustment of the differential bearings.
61 Differential bearing.
62 Stand for gearbox for use on bench.
63 Various tools.
64 Various tools.
65 Various tools.
GEARBOX CONTROLS .......... 66 Gearbox and clutch system.
67 Hydraulic gear selector.
72 Various tools.
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS III
No. of
GEARBOX CONTROLS (cont’d) . . . . . 73 Hydraulic gear selector..

75 Gearbox.
76 Checking non-return valve.
SOURCE OF RESERVE
OF PRESSURE .......... 77 High pressure system.
78 High pressure reservoir.
79 Checking hydraulic units on the car.
80 Checking hydraulic units on the car (second arrangement).
80A Stroboscopic revolution counter.
80B Revolution counter.
HIGH PRESSURE PUMP .......... 81 High pressure pump.

82 High pressure pump.
84A High pressure pump.
PRESSURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Pressure control valve.

87 Pressure control valve.
88 Suspension sphere – accumulator.
PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION ....... 89 Pressure distribution block, brake accumulator.

BLOCK, BRAKE 90 Pressure distribution block.
ACCUMULAOR 91 Pressure distribution block.
92 Brake accumulator.
93 Pressure control valve – accumulator.
94 Sealing plugs – tapered sleeves.
FRONT AXLE ................... 95 Sectional views.

95A Section of upper ball joints.
96 Various tools.
97 Various tools.
98 Support for half-axle.
99 Various tools.
100 Fitting of seals.
101 Assembly of the driveshaft cover.
102 Adjusting the castor angle.
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS IV
No. of
REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Hub drum assembly.

104 Articulating bearing.
105 Locking the articulating bearing.
106 Holding the arm in a vice.
107 Extraction of the hub – brake drum.
108 Extraction of the outer hub bearings.
109 Extraction of the inner ring of the outer hub bearing.
110 Adjustment of the bearing clearances.
SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Hydraulic suspension circuit.
112 Hydraulic suspension circuit.
113 Front axle suspension.
114 Anti-roll bar and height corrector control.
114A Arrangement of anti-roll bar springs.
115 Rear axle assembly.
116 Rear suspension cylinder.
117 Height corrector – suspension cylinder.
118 Various tools.
119 Suspension cylinder.
120 Height variation control.
121 Height variation control.
STEERING ....................... 122 Assembly.
123 Sectional views.
124 Rotating union.
124A Adjustment of pinion.
125 Adjustments.
126 Fitting the steering wheel.
127 Various tools.
128 Various tools.
129 Various tools.
130 Various tools.
131 Assembly of joints.
132 Hydraulic steering system.
133 Rotating union.
134 Piston-cylinder assembly.
135 Adjusting the pressures.
136 Adjusting the pressures.
RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Section of relay assembly.
138 Adjusting the position of a relay.
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS V
No. of
RELAYS (cont’d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Various tools.

BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Hydraulic system for brakes.
141 Brake assembly.
142 Brake assembly.
143 Tools for brakes.
REAR BRAKES ................... 144 Rear brake backplate.
145 Removing and fitting the return springs.
146 Rivetting the brake – cam pins.
147 Grinding the rear brake drum.
148 Centring the brake shoes.
CONTROLS ...................... 149Hydraulic brake control.
150 Hydraulic brake control.
152 Brake pressure switches.
153 Mechanical brake control.
ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 DUCELLIER dynamo 7116-A.
155 DUCELLIER dynamo 7116-A.
156 PARIS-RHÔNE dynamo G 11 R 75.
157 P PARIS-RHÔNE dynamo G 11 R 75.
158 DUCELLIER starter 6008-A,
159 DUCELLIER starter 6008-A.
160 PARIS-RHÔNE starter D 11 B 42.
161 PARIS-RHÔNE starter D 11 B 42.
162 BENADA drive.
163 Assembly of the field coils and field magnets.
164 Wiring diagram.
165 Wiring diagram.
166 Wiring diagram.
HEATING AND DEMISTING . . . . . . . . 167 Heating and demisting circuit.
HYDRAULIC 168 Lifting points of the body.
169 Inspection of camber angle.
170 Pre-adjustments of the front heights.
171 Test bench.
172 Test bench.
173 Pipes and unions.
INDEX OF ILLUSTRATIONS VI
No. of
HYDRAULIC (CONT’D) . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Dynamic test bench assembly.

176 Regulator feed.
178 Accumulator –pressure distribution block – suspension spheres.
179 Steering.
180 Steering.
182 Steering.
BODYWORK .................... 183 Lifting for towing.

184 Lifting the car for towing.
130 Pressure distribution block. Inspection for leakage of the valve settings.
131 Pressure distribution block. Inspection of the valve settings.
132 Main accumulator - pressure test.
134 Suspension cylinder. Inspection for leakage.
BODY .......................... 135 Lifting the car for towing. Points of anchorage.
136 Lifting the car for towing (details).
137 Support for towing.
138 Support for towing (details).
139 Support for towing (assembly).

DS19 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DS19 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DS19 Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

How does the manual handle illustrations?

How does the manual handle illustrations?

What are some ways users can navigate the manual?

What are some ways users can navigate the manual?

Editor’s notes for DS19 manual:

In the interests of clarity and economy of space I’ve occasionally

a) The indication of the type of vehicle : DS.

Use of the code:

The figure 0 indicates the adjustments.

Operation No. DS 334-0 : Adjustments on the change speed control.

The spe c ia l tools use d f or r e pa ir ing the DS 19 a r e indic a te d a s f ollows :

ENGINE ............................................................................ 100

GENERAL . . . . . . DS 00 Work on the hydraulics – Precautions .................................... 1 27

ENGINE . . . . . . . . DS 100-1 Replacement of an engine gearbox assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34

DS 100-3 Overhauling an engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 46

Crankcase ...... DS 111-1 Work on the crankcase.

Oil system ...... DS 111-4 Work on the oil system.

Cylinder head . . . . DS 112-0 Adjusting the valve rocker clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 68

Cylinder head (cont’d) DS 112-3 Overhauling a cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 73

DS 112-4 Work on the cylinder head

Timing gear ..... DS 120-1 Work on the timing.

Carburettor . . . DS 142-0 Adjustment of the slow running

DS 142 1 Replacement of a carburettor ........................................... 1 103

Carburettor (cont’d) DS 142-3 Work on the carburettor.

Controls . . . . . . .. DS 142-4 Work on the carburettor controls.

DS 142-6 Overhauling an accelerated idling control assembly (second type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 114

DS 171-3 Overhauling an air filter silencer.

Petrol pump ..... DS 173-l Replacement of a petrol pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 118

DS 173-3 Overhauling a Guiot petrol pump........................................ 1 119

Piping . . . . . . . . . . DS 174-1 Replacement of a feed pipe (tank to pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 121

DS 174-3 Repairing a feed pipe (or a flexible return pipe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 123

Petrol tank ...... DS 175-1 Work on the petrol tank.

Exhaust ...... DS 180-1 Work on the exhaust system.

Ignition system . . DS 211-0 Ignition adjustments.

DS 211-1 Work on the contact breaker.

DS 211-3 Overhauling a contact breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 140

DS 212-0 Checking an ignition coil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 142

Cooling system . . DS 231-0 Adjustment of the pulleys and belts.

DS 231-3 Overhauling a water pump (second type). ................................... 1 148

Pulleys and belts . . DS 231-4 Work on the pulleys and belts

Radiator and fan . . DS 232-1 Work on the radiator and fan

CLUTCH . . . . . . . . DS 312-1 Replacement of a clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 164

DS 312-3 Overhauling a clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 165

Controls ........ DS 314-0 Checking and adjustment of the clutch controls.

DS 314-1 Work on the clutch controls.

Controls (cont’d. ) . . Replacement of a clutch thrust race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 178

DS 314-3 Work on the clutch control unit.

Overhauling a clutch re-engagement control ................................ 3 183

GEARBOX . . . . . . DS 330-1 Work on the gearbox.

DS 330-2 Stripping and assembling a gearbox ....................................... 1 193

DS 330-3 Overhauling a gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 197

Gearbox cover ... DS 331-1 Replacement of a gearbox cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 217

DS 334-1 Work on the gear control.

DS 334-3 Work on the gear control.

DS 334-4 Work on the hydraulic gear selector (on the car).

Pipe assemblies . . DS 334-7 Work on the pipe assemblies.

TRANSMISSION . DS 372-1 Work on the transmission.

High pressure pump DS 391-1 Work on the high pressure pump.

DS 391-3 Work on the high pressure pump.

Brake accumulators DS 392-1 Replacement of a brake accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 283